A :
| GRAMMAR |
| OFTHE |
SUNSCRIT |
LANGUAGE |

 

me) ALDERMAN
E STACKS
e PK
e663wv iyrene

 

 

 

‘
%
~~ A

aef

beret:A GRAMMAR

OF THE

SUNSCRIT LANGUAGE,

 

BY

WILLIAM YATES.

~ ape >< e———

f

> “ Ian
eyTs YR hho

 

a ae ee

 

\

e ~ en . /
Oday 000k weouireoue. Pinpart Otymrra, Opa ix,
Primus 07 1 legendi scribendi leptus erit facul i
us in e€O qui legenar scrivendique adepius erit facultaten,

grammaticis est locus. Qvuinc. DE Inst. ORAT., lib. i.

 

 

CALCUTTA:

PRINTED AND SOLD AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS,
SOLD ALSO BY MESSRS. BLACK, PARBURY, AND
ALLEN, LEADENHALL STREET, LONDON.

1820.

 

 

{ ;
Eee
Ph ; 4
ie i
tite :
Vane
ae
af Sah
i
ie 7
: :
{i ’ Ye
ie . i
as A
ae
Fag, 5
fg
i Pay
} i
i coil hs
ie ; i
Hf i i
ii i
ian “|
;
jj 4
¢ ua: eA
1
j hy.
i !
f + ee |
aye 4 a |
f a 1
{ ; q
VW 4
} i
Z it oe
Tk Tn
7 i
in A ,
} '
i $ +
{it ast
i >
{
aa et!
iy !
ih Yi :
ie ¥ ”
t i
j 7 :
; /
:
uy :
y ' +
mh |
i ;
a :
i} re
Hi :
i wees
4}
1 : “
- nae 3
ipl |
x ry
3
¢ t 4
i { :
f
o s
ft ; ;
u oi
& u
i ast
\
4 3
i 4
ul Hee 4
4
; | ;
i +a ‘
a5) ie i
eat
} ( 2:
i - behets
‘ ; ;
4 i
i
i
Gs ye :
hed t
ed ;
TP dg 5
t f
1a ;
+) Se
hy
{ ibouat™
: ‘
* }
‘ » i
TETRA PSI NEN TT p STEPS TUT TRO Uo area Er iH sty sila
is baciirer Po icoe rte stati cele Ste oes Cale apbt el bales sheets) e}s] cr th mad veietene shee [EaseTO THE MOST NOBLE

FRANCIS, MARQUIS OF HASTINGS,

Earl Moira, Baron Rawdon, Governor General of India,

&ce &c. &C.

My Lorp,

TO <“ render to all their due, tribute
to whom tribute, custom to whom custom,
fear to whom fear, and honor to whom
honor;’’ is a maxim dictated by the high-
est authority, and calculated in every relation
of life to promote the interests of Society.
In dedicating this volume, therefore, to
Your Lorpsuir, as a small, but sincere tri-
bute of respect, I feel myself at once dis-

charging a duty and enjoying a privilege.DEDICATION.

<
p= ©

It has been the felicity of India to witness,
that by aline of conduct which could pro-
ceed only from an enlightened judgment,
Your Lorpsnie has united the wisdom of
Politics, and the glory of Arms, with the im-
perishable honors of Literature ; and amidst
the splendor of foreign triumphs and public
applause, has considered it no derogation of
character, to become the Patron of Learning,
the Encourager of Science, the Protector of
Civil and Religious Liberty, and the Friend
of such Institutions as are designed to
alleviate the misery, or advance the im-
provement of mankind. Hence has Your
Lorpsuip secured the approbation of every
British subject, and in the annals of History

rendered permanently illustrious the name of

HASTINGS.DEDICATION. Vil

Considering myself therefore singularly
happy in being allowed the favor of inscrib-
ing this Work to Your Lorpsurp, and of
thus presenting it to the world under aus-

pices so favorable,

I have the honor to subseribe inyself,
My Lorp,
Your Lorpsure’s most Obedient
Humble Servant,

W. YATES.

Carcutta, November, 1820.THE PREFACE.

rEN

i HE Sunscrit isacknowledged, by the most competent
oO 3

Judges, to be an ancient, energetic, and useful language,

So prepossessed are most of the Natives of India in
its favour, that they ascribe to ita celestial origin, and
account it the medium of divine communications. Its
claims to antiquity are of the fairest order, and from the
deepest researches that have been made to trace its
source, it appears highly probable that it was one of
those original languages which existed at the time of
the dispersion, and which, like some others, has since
given rise to a variety of inferior dialects—From the
endless number of compound words, capable of being
formed at pleasure, and from the ingenious method of
permuting the last letter of each word to agree with
the initial of the succeeding one, the Sunscrit is pro-
bably unrivalled for diversity of sound, and harmony of
enunciation.—Its being the source of so great a number
of words in several other Eastern languages, and its
containing all the principal works of the Hindoos on
Religion, Philosophy, History, Jurisprudence, &c. give
it a decisive claim on public attention ; and the erowing
anxiety felt by a considerable part of the literary world
to gain an acquaintance with it, notwithstanding the

bvi THE PREFACE.

difficulties with which it has been encumbered, suffici-
ently shews that it is not devoid of interest or utility.

If perspicuity and precision are essential In any
Grammar, it is certainly in this, where rules are so
numerous, and in several instances, after the clearest
explanation that can be given, so necessary to be closely
studied, before they can be fully understood. In attempt-
ing to beconcise, there is a danger of becoming obscure.
A medium is therefore to be observed, between swell-
ing the subject to the greatest extent of which it is
capable, and on the other hand, of condensing it so
much as to render it unintelligible and indefinite.
The learned Sunscrit Grammars formerly publish-
ed, however excellent in many respects, are confessed-
ly two voluminous, and in various particulars too
abstruse ;—hence some Europeans, after cursorily in-
specting them, have concluded either that they should
not have time and patience sufficient for the acquire-
ment of a language so complex, or that it was altoge-
ther unattainable by them ;—and thus have relinquish-
ed in despair, what might otherwise have proved to
them a pleasing and profitable study. E

As this work professes to be formedon a new plan, it
will be proper to explain the principles on which it
proceeds, and point out the particulars in which it
differs from other Sunscrit Grammars.

The whole is divided into four parts, Orthography,
Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody. This, though a
common and convenient division, has not heretoforeTHE PREFACE. vii

been applied to Sunscrit: the first three parts have
been divided in various ways, and the last one entirely
neglected. Native Grammarians divide the whole into
two parts, viz. TX, sounds or words, and wry verbal roots.

The more important rules and remarks are
printed with a larger type, while the exceptions to
general rules, and observations of less consequence, are
represented in a smaller size. The printing of rules
and exceptions, &c, with the same sized type, is produc-
tive of two serious inconveniences: the one is, that it
causes the student much needless labor, by leading
him to suppose that the rules thus printed are all of
equal importance, and must be committed to memory;
the other is, that when he has passed through the fa-
tigue of learning them all, he finds himself frequently
in a labyrinth through not understanding their proper
application : and attempting to account for every thing
by general rules, which should be accounted for by
general rules with their corresponding exceptions, he
perceives thatone rule is in direct opposition to another,
and knows not which is to be regarded, The method
which has been adopted of employing characters of dif-
ferent sizes, it is hoped, will remove these obstructions,

The character in which Sunscrit works are usually
printed is called Daivi-naguree; it is read like the
English, from the left hand to the right. The native
Pundits of Bengal learn to read this character, but few
of them can write it with expedition; in composing
and copying Sunscrit works they make use of the
Bengalee alphabet, which corresponds exactly with the
other, except in the shape of the letters.

 

aE ON ran EE NP ae
managers nce me ae

ee ee MIE Spt > ear ae

  

Ona ey re aTi Vili THE PREFACE.

In representing the vowels of the alphabet in Roman
characters, such letters in our own language have
been selected as agree not only in sound, but in kind
with those for which they stand, vowel for vowel, and
diphthong for diphthong. By this means the real
nature of the alphabet becomes evident. Afterwards,
in explaining the powers of the letters, other charac-
ters are given, which, though they do not literally
agree with those which they may be used to represent,
often serve to express the sound more-distinctly or
neatly in Roman letters.

A little alteration has, been made in the scheme for
the permutation of the letters, by which it is rendered
more consistent with the order of the alphabet, and
consequently easier to be retained in the memory. The
vowels standas in the alphabet, andthe semivowelsrange
under their corresponding vowels. The classified let-
ters are like the alphabet taken backwards ; reckoning
from the right hand to the left, and from the top to
the bottom; and the remaining miscellaneous. ones
are placed under their corresponding classified let-
ters.* So much would not have been said respect-
ing this trifling alteration, had it not been for the in-
fluence whichit has on the succeeding Rules of Permu-
tation, In uniting a number of words together for the
harmony of a sentence, the rules of Permutation may
be occasionally dispensed with; but in general, they
are attentively regarded, and the frequent neglect of

* In order to understand the difference between this arrangement
and that formerly adopted, compare the one at the beginning of the
2nd Chapter of Orthography with the other in the Appendix.THE PREFACE. ix

them considered as a great inelegance. The general
rules should be closely studied, the notes may be read
and referred to as exceptions occur.

One peculiarity of considerable magnitude in this
work, arises from omitting the system of rejected let-
ters, It appeared to the Author, after minute investiga-
tion, calculated rather to exercise the patience than to
improve the understanding. The reader will be able to
form a judgment respecting it, after seeing an example
of its operations in the case of a noun, and the tense of
averb ; at the same time he must bear in mind, that
what is here stated relative to these two examples,
equally applies to the other cases and tenses, &c. and
that the rules which constitute this system are not all
collected together by those who have usedit, but are fre-
quently to besought for throughout the whole Grammar.

In the Dictionary we find the word art, @ man.
Desirous of putting this wordin the Nominative case, we
turn to the Grammar, and find that fq is added to
Nouns of the masculine gender to form the Nominative
case, which makes the word aqfa; but the < of fe is
rejected, which leaves it a{¥. Is this then the Nomina-
tive case ? No; because when a letter is rejected some
effect is produced by it. What then is the effect of
rejecting £? It is equivalent to arule. What is the
rule to which it is equivalent ? It is this, ‘ that when
= is rejected, the word must end with a final consonant.’
Does this rejection then save a rule? No; it only
implies one which must be previously learned, and
which, being applied in the present instance, makes thex THE PREFACE.

word aya. Having obtained the result of the rejected
letter, we are afterwards informed that : is substi-
tuted for @ followed by 3 which makes the word az: ;—so
that the w vhole i is to find out that : is added to form
the Nominative case, which is sufficiently shewn by
the declension of the noun without any such process.

Again, in the list of verbal roots we have the word
aTt—-7, &; ask, request. \st, The inflection to be added
to form the third person of the Indefinite tense is {g,
which makes the word arate. The = of f= must be
rejected, which, according to the rule before given
in the case of the Noun, makes the word aay.
2nd. In accounting for the formation of the Indefinite,
it is stated that fa must be inserted after the
root, by which the preceding word becomes aTatey :
but the x of fa is rejected, which leaves it aay,
3rd. Another rule states, that q is lost when € is in-
serted in the root, but is retained when it is not: in
the case before us & is regularly inserted, consequently
the @ is lost, which leaves the root just as it was
before fa was inserted, arae- 4th. A succeeding rule
informs us, that when f@ is ; ‘inserted # £A_must be pre-
fixed to the inflection fz, which will make the root
in question, ar@lue. The & of £7 is rejected, and
we must now search for arule to know what is to
be the result of such a rejection; we find one which
informs us, ‘ that when a is rejected, the increment
with which it is united must be prefixed to the syl-
lable or word ;’ which is simply saying that ¢ must
precede f€, by which the verb will become are.
oth. Another rule states, that 314 must always be pre-THE PREFACE. xi

fixed to verbal roots in the Imperative, the Indefinite,
and the Subjunctive, unless constructed with the ad-
verb ar. ‘The # is rejected, which according to the
rule for the rejection of 4 makes the word s7arete.
Lastly, we have to find a rule, if we are able, for éHang:
ing the final = toa, and then we arrive at the regular
Indefinite tense syarqt7. Now let any one judge whether
all this winding is necessary to find out, that when & is
inserted in the Future, the Indefinite is formed from it,
by prefixing the augment 3] and changing Zar into Ea;
as aifant, qarstqz. As much might be said concern-
ing the other rejected letters ; but it- would be tedi-
ous to enlarge, as the reader must at once perceive
the absurdity of this complicated system, whatever may
be its pretensions to ingenuity.

‘The Nouns might be divided into two classes; the
first ending with vowels, the second with consonants ;
but since the variations of the former so much exceed
those of the latter, it is conceived that a more regular
distribution of them could not be made than that
which has been attempted, by forming them into five
declensions. Nouns of the lst declension are equal in
number to those of the remaining four. In each
number several of the cases are alike ; viz. in the sin-
gular number, the Ablative and Possessive, with the ex-
ception of nouns ending in # ;—in the dual, the Nomi-
native, Objective, and Vocative ; the Instrumental, Da-
tive, and Ablative; the Possessive and Locative ;—in the
plural, the Dative and Ablative. Also the Nominative
and Objective of neuters in all the numbers.| xii THE PREFACE.

Nouns, Adjectives, Pronouns, and Participles have
been mixed together more or less in preceding Gram-
mars; in this they are treated of separately.

The Verbs are divided into Primitive and Deriva-
tive, and subdivided into Common, Active, and Depo-
nent. . The Primitives amount to nearly two thousand,
and are kept separate from other words by the
Natives. That the Derivatives are distinct verbs, and
not particular moods of other verbs, must be evident
from their having voices, moods, tenses, &c. like other
regular verbs, which properties could never be
ascribed to moods. A Common verb is one com-
mon to the two voices, active and middle. An Active
verb does not signify, as in English grammars, a
transitive one, but one conjugated only in the active
voice, whether transitive or intransitive. A Deponent
verb is conjugated only in the Middle voice, but has
an active signification. The Passive voice is common
to them all. In the selection of verbs for examples
of the different conjugations, Common ones have been
chosen ; not because they are the most numerous, for
this is not the case, but because they include both
the others, all the Active verbs being inflected like
the active voice, and all the Deponents like the middle
voice of Common verbs. Instead of laying down
rules for the formation of each tense as totally un-
connected with the rest, allof them have been formed
from the three principal parts of the verb ; the Present,
the Past, and the Future. If averb is irregular in only one
of the principal tenses, under that tense the irregu-

larity is specified ; verbs that are irregular in more

FEDER aT TE AGT Ey PUT TEETER TGTHE PREFACE. Xl

than one of the principal tenses, are considered Anoma-
lous, and are arranged together in alphabetic order as
the last section of the verbs. Verbs of the lst conjuga-
tion exceed in number those of all the others combin-
ed. All the conjugations are alike, except in the
present tense and its formatives: .and even in these
the 4th, 6th, and 10th, are like the Ist, and the Sth
like the 5th, when prepared for inflection by the addi-
tion of the affixes. Hence the ten might be reduced
to six conjugations. By dividing them according as
the inflections are united mediately or immediately
with the root, they might be reduced totwo: but as
neither the size of the Grammar nor the labour of
the learner would be abridged by either arrangement,
it has not been adopted. The Rules of Permutation
preceding the conjugations generally serve to extend
or diversify the ideas of those contained in the Ortho-
graphy ; and may be attended to at first, or omitted till
the conjugations have been learned, at the pleasure
of the Student.

One singular plan by which Sunscrit Grammars
have been rendered exceedingly prolix, has been that
of laying down rules to account for the formation of
almost every derivative word. In most cases deriva-
tive words may be traced to their respective roots*
with the greatest facility; in particular instances, where
the origin is doubtful, the methods of tracing them
are often so fanciful, that little dependance can be
placed upon them. Moreover, as this is a subject

* The Hindoos, like the Jews, trace nearly every word in their

language to some verbal root.

Hs| xiv THE PREFACE.

which belongs to a Dictionary rather than to a Gram-

3 +Q a L 4?
mar, and as a minute investigation of it is ratnet
ee. essary, no apology is¢ seen ed

requisite for not having discussed it more extensively.

A new arrangement has been made with respect
to compound words ; they are divided, not as before
in an arbitrary manner, but according to the distinct

denomination of the words that are formed.. Under

 

six heads Native grammarians inclu

de only compound
Nouns, Adjectives, and Adverbs: in this work com-
pounds are divided into o four classes, Nouns, Adjectives,

Verbs, and Adverbs. The former two being numerous,

on

are subdivided into genera and species; the genera
include the classes specified by the Natives, and the
species shew the various combinations which each

genus admits.

In the Syntax the same order has been preserved
as in the Etymology. It commences with the nouns,
and proceeds gradually through the different parts of
speech, including under each part whatever relates
either to its concord or government. The examples
selected to illustrate the rules have been taken from
classical writers. The rules have been regularly num-
bered from the beginning, to avoid perplexity in re-
ferring to them; and the examples of parsing, which
succeed, will prove their utility by shewing their ap-
plication.

In compliance with the usage of European Gram-
marians, and on account of the important rank which
Poetry holds in Sunscrit, a comprehensive and syste-THE PREFACE. XV

matic view of Prosody has been introduced; to which
have been added, specimens of the different kinds of
prose composition. The versification of the Hindoos,
though extensive, is tolerably simple; and a knowledge
of it will enable the student to correct many blunders,
which will be found to exist in almost every book he
may peruse. The name of each species of metre is
contained in the example given of it, on which ac-
count many verses have been retained, though not
quite literally rendered, which otherwise had been
changed for some of a more moral and less idolatrous
description.

For the convenience of those who may have to
converse withlearned natives, an Appendix, containing
alist of the technical terms used by Sunscrit Gram-
marians, has been added.

In addition to the preceding remarks, which are
designed chiefly to illustrate the specific plan of the
work, it may not be improper to offer a few others,
more interesting to those who are desirous of forming
a coriect estimate of the origin, unity, and diversity
of languages.

It has frequently been asked, Was the Sunscrit
ever a spoken language? Some taking the meaning
of the word Sunscrit to be, done together, and the
meaning of the word Pracrit to be, not done
together, argue that the latter was spoken; but that
the former was modified by a number of learned men

assembled for the purpose, and used only in writing.

It is true that the word Sunscrit does mean, compact,THE PREFACE.

XVi

pure, and the word Pracrit, wncompact, impure; but
to maintain on this account, that the former sprung
from the latter, is like deriving the fountain from the
stream, instead of the stream from the fountain. To
account for the formation of many corrupt dialects
from an original language is not difficult; but to ac-
count for the formation of a pure unspoken language
from a corrupt spoken one, is far from being easy.
The determining of the question however involves in
it nothing of particular consequence, since not what
the Sunscrit may have been, but what it now is, gives
to it, as far as it concerns us, all itsimportance. The
works composed in Greek and Latin would not be
less valuable to us at this period, even should it be
supposed that they never were spoken Janguages.
Yet if we form our judgment of the Sunscrit from its
being the grand depository of Hindoo literature and
science ;—from its having living languages derived
immediately from it, which resemble it quite as much
as the Italian doesthe Latin, or as the Modern does the
Ancient Greek ;—and from its containing three kinds
of prose composition, one of which is not more difficult
than many pieces in its derivative languages, and is spoken
with fluency by many Pundits, and also by the higher
classes in certain provinces, we shall feel ourselves
drawn almost involuntarily to the conclusion, that it
must have been once the medium of communication
to a considerable part of this country. That it never
was spoken in the manner it is now most commonly
written by the learned Natives, is very evident ; be-
cause the existence of so many compound words, andTHE PREFACE. xvii

the exactness with which the sentences are construct-
ed, would imply that forethought and contrivance on
the part of the speaker, and that quickness and ex-
tent of comprehension on the part of the hearer, which
could not possibly exist in common conversation.

Is the Sunscrit more difficult than any other language?
Speaking generally, there is little hazard in saying
that itis not. In some particulars it may be more so ;
in some equally so; but in others less.

In the permutation of letters, and the formation
of compound nouns and adjectives, it perhaps exceeds
any other language. All the words in a sentence are fre-
quently run one into another, and the final letters of each
word changed to agree with the initial of the succeed-
ingone. In English, were words thus joined together
without any permutation of the letters, it wouldbevery
puzzling to a learner; but if the final letters of each
word were changed to agree with the initial of the next,
the difficulty would be greatly encreased. This is the
case in Sunscrit ; and although the changes are all na-
tural, and easily acquired by a little perseverance, yet
to a beginner they form a serious obstacle. In some
other languages compound nouns and adjectives are
numerous, but in none perhaps so much so as in the
Sunscrit. The compounds of other polished tongues
are generally contained in their dictionaries ; those of
the Sunscrit are not: indeed it is impossible that they
should ; for it admits not only of compounds, but of
double compounds; and of both not a definite, but-anXVili THE PREFACE.

indefinite number. Instances are to be found in
which, by means of this double composition, a single
word is a hundred syllables long: and no person, how-
ever well he may be acquainted with the elements of
which they are composed, and able to explain them
when formed, can ever say that he knows all the com-
pounds which the language admits; because the
formation of them depends upon the fancy, and may
consequently be as diversified as its operations, A
man may know how many genera and species of
compounds there are, but can never tell the number
of words which each genus or species embraces. This
plan of compounding words has offered to Indian poets
a boundless scope in the use of vocables, and may serve

to account for the great variety of their poetical metres.

In the number of its synonimous terms, the
Sunscrit perhaps equals any other language. Words
serving to express the same idea vary generally
from two to thirty-five; for instance, for hand there
are 5; for light 11; for cloud 15; for moon 20; for
snake 26; for slaughter 33; for fire 35; for sun 37, &c.

With regard to inflections, the Sunscrit falls far
short of the Greek, In the declension of Nouns, &c.
it has three more cases; but in the conjugation of a
verb under the different moods of the three voices, it
has fifty-four tenses less. Under the different moods
there are 1] tenses in the Active, 1] in the Middle, and
1] in the Passive, making the sum total 33; in Greek
there are 28 in the Active, 28 in the Middle, and 31 inTHE PREFACE. xIx

 

the Passive, making the sum total 87: so that there
are nearly three times as many inflections in a Greek,
as Ina Sunscrit verb. Besides this, there is a much
greater number of verbs inflected in the three voices
in the former than in the latter, Again, in Sunscrit
there are no contractions, and a much less number of
compound verbs. Now since the inflections of verbs
form a principal part of any Grammar, and since the
Sunscrit will scarcely bear a comparison with the
Greek in this respect, though it is more perplexing
to a learner in some other particulars, we conclude on

the whole, that it cannot be a more difficult language.

Does the Sunscrit resemble any other language ? In
several particulars it is like the Greek or Latin. To
state them all would far exceed the bounds of this
Preface; it may not however be amiss, in order to
excite farther inquiry, to adduce a few instances. It
must be premised, that sj] is equivalent to the Greek o
or to the Latin short wz; that is equivalent to the
Greek » or the Latin m; and that: is equal to s*.

The Rules of Permutation in Greek, as far as they

 

extend, correspond very much with those in Sunscrit :
as, & + hewrw == shrcwrw, illustro, tdluminate ;
fagra + faata =
Greek and Latin the declensions are five; there is

fax fauta, a wise man writes.—In

the same number in Sunscrit.—In Greek the feminine

gender generally ends in @ or @ ; so it does in Sunscrit ;

 

* These are not fanciful premises, for I has always the sound of
short u or 0; ‘asa final may always be written 4 m, and when join.
ed with another consonant it generally becomes n; and © s, when
final, is always expressed by:.XX THE PREFACE.

as, ayvele, Isa, pudicitia, modesty or shame. ryuvi,
ait, foemina, a woman.—In Greek the numbers are
three; they are the same in Sunscrit.—In Greek a
great part of the Masculine nouns end with os, and
the Neuters with on; in Latin the former end in us,
ard the latter in «wm: in these respects the Sunscrit
resembles either. As, Masc. Nom. 20106, ERITH, domi-
nus, a lord or master ; Obj. x0EbOY, ETATH, dominum;
Inst. plur. Em e, KUCLOIS, dominis. Neut. Nom. and
Objective cparpo.eaH, aratrum, a plough.—In Greek
and Latin most adjectives have three terminations, some
have only two; the same applies to Sunscrit: as,
Nom. zaA0os, 20d), xadov; LAA, VHT, qu; bonus, bona,
bonum; good, fair. Obj. HOUNKOV, HOARY, H#OLAOY, QUA,
waa, THA; bonum, bonam, bonum.—In Greek, the
comparisons are formed by regog and taro; in Sunscrit
by ava and qaa.—-In Greek and Latin the pronouns
are irregular ; so they are in Sunscrit; as, Nom. éya,
sie, ego, 7. Obj. we aI,;me, me. Nom. ov, 4, tu, thou;
Obj. o&, mat, te, ‘hee.—The Sunscrit plurals are like the
Latin ; as, 44, nos, we ; 48, vos, ye.—In Greek there are
two kinds of verbs, Primitives and Derivatives; so there
are in Sunscrit.—In Greek the conjugations of Primi-
tives admit of various divisions*, but there are four sorts
of Derivatives; the same applies to the Sunscrit.—In
Greek there are three Voices; so there are in Sunscrit.—
The Imperfect and Indefinite tensesin Greek are formed

* The Westminster and Eton Grammars make nine of them,
six simple and three contracted; others make less, but by a pro-
cess which, if applied to the Sunscrit, would equally reduce its
number. See page xiii.

se feTSUAUATR Cah apse te Leahey asf pase selene ie laie is ie )tit ItisielsTHE PREFACE. Xxi

by prefixing the augment and changing the finals ; the
perfect by reduplicating the first letter and changing
the finals, or by affixing the auxiliary verb: the
same is done in Sunscrit.—-Some of the inflections
also are the same in Sunscrit as in the Greek ;
as, Mid. 8rd singular and plural airéeros, airbovres ;
aram, ara; he asks, they ask: jréero, Aréovro; Sarai,
Karat; he asked, they asked.—Many of the derivative
and compound words are formed in the same manner
as those in Greek ; as, Aoyia, from Adyos; arar, from
are, a word or account, &c. S60g + hoyia = Deoroyia ;
P7qT! as alal =F 2ataI~I, a word or account of God.
Yravnos + arb = yAaubszanrd, or yAavnamic; ares + aifa
= atarat, blue eyed.

How far the Sunscrit in general agrees with the

‘|
i
fl
4
j
4
i>
4
¥
a
ii
|
V9
i)
4
i
f
;
HS
;
? i
:
bet,
at
iy
te
i,
i
‘4

Greek in its concord and government, and some of

its poetical metres, may easily be ascertained by
perusing the rules of the Syntax and Prosody. There
is a striking likeness between the Greek and Sun-
scrit in the position of words and the use of participles :

fe

and there are also many instances in which Sunscrit
words correspond with others in Latin or Greek.

a ae

From the above remarks it is evident, that there
is a similarity existing between the structure of the
Greek and Sunscrit; on which account the plan
pursued in this work will be found to agree very
much with that adopted in Greek Grammars :—which
therefore is not entirely new in itself, but will readily
be acknowledged as new, in its application to this

language.Xxil THE PREFACE.

The present age is too much enlightened by experience
tourge against this or any other attempt the stale objec-
tion, that innovation in what has been established by
long custom, is intolerable; for in this case there
would be an end to all latitude of enquiry, and a com-
ple stagnation of ideas in the moral world; which
would not only stop the progress of literature and
science, but reduce us again to the barbarity of our
ancestors.

It is true, that freedom of thought and latitude of
investigation to a mind, in which fancy predominates
over reason, and the rage for novelty over the love of
truth, are the fruitful source of many errors ; and when
exercised on important subjects are worthy of entire
neglect, or severe animadversion. But every arduous
attempt either to develope what is unknown, to illus-
trate what is obscure, to simplify what is complex,
or to render easy what had before been considered
almost insuperable, on any subject connected with
the interests of learning, is at least entitled to can-
dour. In this light it is hoped the present work will
be looked upon by the reader. The Author has en-
tirely mistaken his own motives, if in any instance
he has made the least innovation through a desire
to depreciate the labours of others, or vainly to
distinguish his own; and will be willing to confess
any errors which may still exist, when pointed out
by the candid and enlightened critic.

To the works of his Predecessors he would not

forget to acknowledge himself highly indebted: inTHE PREFACE. XXiil

the prosecution of his design they have been con-
stantly referred to, and the substance of many rules
and various examples taken from them :— indeed it has
been his concern to avail himself of every advantage
they could afford, together with the assistance of
able Pundits, and the advice of those kind friends,
with whom he has the happiness to be more immedi-
ately connected. The Authors principally consulted
have been Dr. Carey, Dr. Wilkins, Mr. Colebrooke,
Mr. Foster, Vopadaiva, Durgadasa, and Gingadasa.
Probably no one ever entered on the study of this lan-
guage, without sincerely wishing, that by some means
or other the Grammar of it could be rendered less
circuitous and toilsome. -A conviction that it might be
made so by modelling it on a new plan, first induced
the Author to compose this work; and a hope that it
will prove so, has since encouraged him to offer it to
public notice, Whether he has been judicious in the
application of this new method, and how far former
intricacies are removed by it, it now remains for the

impartial reader to determine.raryCONTENTS.

sie

PART I—ORTHOGRAPHY.
Page.

Cuap. I. Of the Number, Power, Divi-
sion, and Combination of the

Letters, ,
Cuap. II. Of the Peiasien of a Lon
HOTS ts, ae « i eS

 

—

PART II.—ETY MOLOGY.

Caap. I. OF Substantivesy “antes... SE
mect. J.,Of- the Declensionsy¥™s. .. gae

First Declension, rs ge ee
Second, .. fe oh AGS Bo
towd, .. i De ee
Fourth, ny i eG eee
se ae 46

2. Of the Gender, Number, ie ae
of Sypsotives, —o. 1. 4. OF
Caap. IT. Of Adjectives a3. 303 -,0 +... 65

sect. 1. Of the Declension of RES cation, 65
2. Of the Comparison of Adjectives, 75
—— 3. Of the Numerical Adjectives, 77

 

 

re ee
ie =F oe

Sa a = = es ie

Ee ea ae ee
ee eee
ee ee

|

Hi

ee

\A aes

ea
'CONTENTS.

 

Xxvl
Page.
Gap, 111. Of Pronouns, —... > . 82
Sect. 1. Of Personal Pronouns, .. .. 82
_ Of Relative and bein Pro-
nouns, 86
3. Of Adjective Pr ONGUNS,.s)-- Oo

 

Gav IV. Of Verbs, _ .-- e ipo
Sect. 1. Of Verbs in General, i. ao 06

 

Rules of Permutation, w 101

2. Of the Conjugation of V a. 108

First Conjugation, i x . LOS

Second, a ay c. ee

Third, ote &, ee

Fourth, a be. va ee

Fifth, Se ee - 143

Sixth, Me * . Sao
Seventh, ci bee oe

Eighth, fl aa ,. LAs

Ninth, a 4 ; deo

Tenth, Pe Y 167

Sect. 3. Of the Formation of the Tenses, 172
The Present, &c..  -. ube -, <a

The Perfect, 3 ia ;: re

The Futures, bs ie Leo ee

The Indefinite, ss - oi ee
Participles, ay at 4 eae

Sect. 4. Of the Causal Verbs, .. -. 206
—— 5. Of the Optative Verbs, 1 stAQ12
— 6. Of the Frequentative Verbs, .. 218
—— 7. Of the Nominal Verbs, LS
—— 8. Of the Anomalous Verbs, .. 228CONTENTS. XXVIL

Page.
Coarp, V. Of Adverbs: -.. o.. 4... «24h
—— VI. Of. Prepositions,. ... .. 245
—— VII. Of Conjunctions,.. ... 249

—— VIII. Of Interjections,  .' . 250
—— IX. Of Derivative Words, .. 251

 

 

Sect. 1. Of Nouns, i: 1 2 2.2

2.. Of Adjectives,«:x oo a

Cuap. X. Of Compound Words, .. 263
Sect. 1. Of Nouns, Sa ee rs
2, ‘Of Adjectives, >. ree

—— 3. Of Verbs, ny La ee
—— 4. Of Adverbs, a $2.1. J93285

 

 

PART IT.—SYNTAX.
Cuap. I. The Syntax of Nouns, .. 288

 

—— II — — of Adjectives, co OE
= “Tt. —— oh Pronouns. oe a,
oo FY. ee of Verbs, Me eee
Bg V. ee OL WOVE ts Uk okt
—— VI. —— of Prepositions, .. 317
—-— VII. ———.of.Conjunctions, .. 319
——VIII. —+> of Interjections; ©... 322

—— IX, Examples of Parsing, .. 324XxXVIil CONTENTS.

PART IV.—PROSODY. soa
Preliminary Observations, .. 342

Cuap. I. Of Poetry regulated By the
number of Syllables, .. 846

Sect. 1. Of Verses in which every half line
is the same, .. ee *: 347

—— 2. Of Verses in which every line is
the same, AS, “ 380

+—— 3. Of Verses‘in which every two lines
are the same, Fe ba 382

Cuap. Il. Of Poetry regulated by the
number of Instants, .. 387

Sect. 1. Of Verses regulated by Feet and

 

Quantity, ie oe <> Bd

2. Of Verses regulated oC ae by
Quantity, om 393

Cuar. Ll. Of the different einety? of
Prose Composition, —. «fOX308
APPENDIX, pe ee eeSUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

 

SUNSCRIT Grammar may be divided into
four parts, viz. Orthography, Etymology,
Syntax, and Prosody.

ei =

roa Ee

ORTHOGRAPHY.

OrrHocrapny teaches the number, power,
division, combination, and permutation of
Letters.

— Ge
C Ha. P, I.
OF THE NUMBER, POWER, DIVISION, AND COM-
BINATION OF THE LETTERS.

(1.) There are fifty Letters, sixteen of
which are called Vowels, and thirty-four
Consonants.q

a
>=
S)

a ka
q cha
ce la

a ia

qT pa
aq ya
x sha

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

VOWELS.
HT a x8
Bu ze re
a lre z=, a
HT ow Hang
CONSONANTS.
wkhti «auga «a gha
ezchha ayé wWyha
a tha eda wt dha
gthi @€da ~wdha
m pha aha wa bha
= 7a ala ava
q sha aS, Se ae
pn

[PART I.

S gna
Ss ned
Ww ana
q na

q ma

a ksha

(2.) The following observations may serve
to illustrate the powers of the Letters.

7 The vowels in relation to each other are to
be considered only as short (~), andlong (-) ;
but when the short vowel has a medial soundCHAP. f. | ORTHOGRAPHY. 3

according to English Orthography, it is dis-
tinguished by this sign ( +).

FT, FT.

3] is pronounced like ain the word folerable or Ame-
vicd, as S1aa dnila, fire. At the beginning of words,
when it is a privative, or comes before a double conso-
nant, it sounds nearly like @ in fall, as saw akirunt,
Without acause; 31W a@gha price. In the middle of
words it is generally pronounced like w in tub, as AT@
murunt, death. By the natives of Bengal it is often
sounded like o in for, asa noshta, destroyed. At the
end of words a short @ always expresses its proper
sound. In the pronunciation of many Sunscrit words
in Bengalee and English, the final a is dropped, as Ram
for Ramu, and Sunscrit for Stinscrité.

st is a long vowel corresponding to 37 ;—it requires
double the time in pronunciation, and has the sound of

a in far, but is rather longer, as arq A/a, time.

=z =
x is pronounced like e in devout, as frat péta,
a father; but when followed by a double or final
consonant, it may be more fitly expressed by i in
pin, as farct ninda, reproach ; Rea dustin, an ele-
phant. |

BZ1 tense OR

ve 4 SUNSCRIT. GRAMMAR. [Part 1.

According to the rules of English Orthography, 7 is
never used, and e is always mute, at the end of words;
hence when ¢ is final, it should be expressed by y short,
which when a final, is always a vowel, and exactly
of the same power as ¢.or 7: as af, vureddhy, in-
crease,

€ ° ° ne es

= is the corresponding long vowel of £, and is rather
longer than any sound of ¢ or ee in English; the e in
me is nearly like it, as Ht bhe, or bhee, fear.

wdiw4.

These, like the preceding, are two corresponding vow-
els, the one short and the other long; the first sounds
like win bull, the second like wz in prune, but is rather
longer; asqurtkimara,a prince; Yara bhupala,a king.

oo being a diphthong cannot fitly represent single
vowels, yet it may often with advantage be used to
express their sound, For 3%, it must be pronounced
like oo in foot; and for =, like 00 in fool: as 7M goonda,
quality ; 4 bhoo, earth.

3, FE; a, a.
2 €

The first two are compounds formed by the union of
the simple vowels x and ¢ with the semivowel 7; the
other two are formed by the union of the former with
the semivowel 4.—They are pronounced, according to
the power of each letter taken separately, re, re;

lyre, bre.CHAP. I. | ORTHOGRAPHY. oD

~ ~ =
q, 5. FI,.. Bt

@ and @ are formed by the union of syand str with
x and €; the other two by 3 and’ 31 with “= and &.
The © and St are improper, the Fand Sf proper diph-
thongs. |

w has the sound of ai in rain, or et in rein, as az
vaida. The French e (é) has been generally used to ex-
press the first of these sounds; but there seems no need
of referring to the French, or of representing diph-
thongs by single vowels, when the English language
supplies both appropriate sounds and characters.

@ has the sound of oi in oil, as oq, doitya, a -de-
mon. JZ when long is considered as a diphthong in
English, and may therefore be used at pleasure for oi.
When @ and @ are final, they should be expressed by
ay and oy, as H may, mine; ? roy, wealth.

3y sounds like oa in coal, as ara% loaka, people. o long
may at anytime be used to express the sound of oa, but
being a single vowel cannot be considered as a proper
representative of the diphthong 3.

BN ce . ° at
31 is pronounced like ow in how, as aT now, a boat.

Ou may be used for ow, but it is not so uniform in its

sound.6 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART I.

8

| Hy, WM.

The former is substituted for 3, and is pronounced
likeit, but occurs only in the middle and at the end of
words :—the latter seems to be substituted for % there is
no sound exactly likeitin the Englishlanguage, the near-
est to it is the abrupt sound of A when pronounced ‘in
the interjections ah! oh! as a: kah, who?

The 31 before ° and : (in3j and 3:) does not belong
to them as letters, but is prefixed for the sake of
pronouncing them: they are always preceded by a
vowel or diphthong.

a, TT; GU, AT; ©€,S;5; A, <> U, 4.

The above are all simple letters; the first two guttu-

rals, the second palatines, the third linguals, the fourth
dentals, and the fifth labials.

* and a arelike # and g hard, in the words king,
give; but are pronounced by putting the tongue rather
farther back in the mouth: as, atx kaka, a crow; Waa
gumuna, a going.’ In English ¢ is generally used for
k before a single consonant, and may also at pleasure

be used for & before a, 0, and uw: as Geet Sunscrit ; AIT
cara, a prison, &c.

q and 3 are like ch and 7 in the words church and

just; as Farat chinta, thought; sa yaya, victory.

aCHAP. I. ] " ORTHOGRAPHY: 7

@ and = are like ¢ and d in the words take and do,
as d}at tek@, a commentary; Tw dundi, a staff. #2
preceded by a vowel is pronounced like a French r by
the Bengalee Pundits, as ttst pera, pain.

# and = are pronounced by applying the tip of the
tongue to the roots of the teeth... In Roman letters a
dot under them, or ‘italics, may be used to distinguish
them from the common ¢ and d, as mt tara, a star; ea
dasa, a servant.

y and @ are like p and b in pace and book, as wx
patra, a vessel; ata bala, a child. A stroke is drawn
through 4 4 to distinguish it from 4 v; but by the Na-
tives ¢and¥ are often written alike, and by those in Ben-
gal pronounced alike.

Ga; 84; 5,6; U4; A, a.

These are the aspirates of the foregoing simple con-
sonants. There are no sounds like them in English: they
have generally been represented by the last letter of one
word and the first of another, as black-heath, hog-herd,
fetch-hence, &c. This appears tobe the best representation
that can be given of them: yetit is not exactly correct,
as a certain hiatus takes place between the two letters
in these examples; but to give these aspirates their pro-
per sounds, it is necessary to pronounce both the letters
with the same breath. The aspirates therefore are to
be considered as letters which contain the powers of
their corresponding simple letters, and of 4 «o closely8 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART I.

united with them, that both can be uttered with
one breath, as Tie shakha, a branch; ae ghasa, grass,
&ce. = has the sound of rf in the same situation as =
has that of the French 7, as, 4 murha, afool. % is
often pronounced by some Pundits like pA in physic,

as Tu phaina, froth.

S, FH, UW, 4, &.

These are all nasals, and must be varied in their sound
according to the class of letters to which they belong,
the first being a guttural, the second a palatine, the
third a lingual, the fourth a dental, and the fifth a la-
bial nasal. = at the beginning of a word is pronounc-
ed like gna; in the middle like a strong nasal n*, and
at the endlike ng in rung. *, w, and 4 have all the
sound of », but are modified by the different organs
with which each is articulated, as, & gnw,sound; 3 =
dnka, amark; at nurung, a man; Bawa sunchayd, a
collection, &c. 4 is like min the word mind, as Arar,

mata, a mother.

Though the one sign 2 is used for four of the above
five letters, it will not be difficult to ascertain which it
represents; since if it stands for the first, it will generally
be distinguished by a following guttural letter; if for
the second, by a following palatine; if for the third, by

* m has this nasal sound in English, when medial and fol-
lowed by g, k, or its representative c; but when followed by
any other single letters ng appears necessary to express it,
though ng as a medial in Roman letters has not the most ele-
gant appearance. See Walker's Principles, p. 61.CHAP. I. | ORTHOGRAPHY. 9

its being a simple 2; and if for the fourth, by its

having a dot-under it,

qT, U3 a, F-
. é am eo
aw has the sound of y in young, as aHax yajuka, a
lest. its i engal give it the sound of 7
riest. The Pundits in Bengal give it the sound of 7
in jest, as jajuka,
° ° e Sn WY
q is pronouncedliker in rod, as & rupa, form, color.
~ sounds like 7 in lane, as arm labha, gain.
¥ is like vw in vain, as att vata, wind: when it is the
last letter of a compound consonant, it has the power

of ws as lwarda, a door
2 / eit AW G7 ay a e

z, YW, a.

The first is like sh, and the last like s in English:
the middle is sh pronounced by raising the tip of the
tongue to the top of the mouth; as wry shapa, acurse;

Wa shaisha, an end; WIT sara, essence.

S, WW.

@ is pronounced like A in heart, as we usta, a hand ;
when compounded with 4, it is softened by the inhabi-
tants of Bengal into 7, as aafat mtyyunty, they are
foolish.

eisa compound of # and 4; its proper sound
therefore is Asha; but by the Pundits in Bengal it is

pronounced khya.10 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART I.

(3.) The letters are divided into Vowels
and Consonants. The Vowels are subdi-

vided into

Short a ~z S mE w
Long BT k S FE z
Grave wT x <3 ar Zz
Similar Wat KR TS We S q

Dissimilar WR WIS JR JR AR
€

Four of the remaining six are diphthongs:
the other two, having powers peculiar to
themselves, may be considered as anomalous.

@, FE; UT, &, though placed among the pure
vowels, should also be considered as ano-
malous; since like # and #: they participate
the properties both of a vowel and a conso-

nant.

he Consonants are dividedinto two sorts,
denominated Classified and Miscellaneous.
The former includes the first five lines, which
are classed in regular order, and denominat-
ed, from the first letter in each class, the &CHAP.T, | ORTHOGRAPHY, © ly

class, the @ class, &c.——All the others: are
miscellaneous. They may all,-with the ex-
ception of w, be thus arranged, according to
their specific nature, and theorgansby which
they are pronounced :—

Gutturals a ww Wanye ¢

Palatines @ S ST Wea Berk

Luguels tenet SF Het ei

Dentals a Ueee, Ft 1.

Labials G Mot F a @q
pa

(4.) There are two ways of combining

 

letters: —the one by uniting a vowel witha
consonant ; the other by uniting two or more
consonants together.

3f is inherent in every letter, except when
this mark (_), or another consonant is sub-
scribed, as wa tak, a kia. ft another
vowel is compounded with the consonant, it
naturally supplies its place, as fa Xe.

* The first and third letters in each line are called unaspi-

rated, the third and fourth aspirated. 5, 4, W, 4, A are
ealled nasals, and 4, 4, % &, 4, semivowels.

+ Or Cerebrals,

 

rep 412 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART I.

The other vowels, when united with a
consonant, are contracted in the following

manner :—
art becomes T as At ka
=z nr f — ta ke
= — Sine pay ke
3s oe e — a ku
S ae — a ku
c ce
2
WE oe — a kré
€
a a a = a klré
é é 2
g moa Poe a klre
x —— 2 a A kat
~ ~ we :
€ Ta = = kot
at  — ee — aT koa
AN ~ x
BT Tat T — AT kow
of Ge Oho a Oia
te. 1 Tins aeCHAP. I. | ORTHOGRAPHY. 13

Compound Consonants are numerous, but
simple in their formation. Those of two let-
ters are of several sorts :

Ist. =F, #, a, &t, a, 4, added to any
other consonant, as

 

m Ana aq. kma aq kya
a kra a kla a kwa
@ tna @ ima @ tya
aorg fra a tla a (wa
¥ Ana a hma a hya
¥ Ara 3 Ala = hwa

2d.—Doubhble Letters.

a kka wakkha mega aggha F nna
achcha S@chchha sya aha =F nnea
= tta ettha gdda gddhi «a nna
aifa altha ~edda gddhi anna
appa wmppha whbha ubbha amma
ayya walla w shsha = shsha Wssa

 

* When two aspirates are compounded, the first is always
expressed by the unaspirated letter.Rees
i McG

 

SS
v : See Tees

14 SUNSCRIE GRAMMAR.

[ PART: 1.

3rd.——Nasals,..with their. corresponding

Letters.
x nka | nkha F nga
y nya ¥ nla ¥ nwa
enshi Fnsa = nha

gncha sanchha Yya

we nta w ntha aw nda
va nla y nth =z nda
ympa wampha Amba

4th.— Miscellaneous.

a kta ay ktha aksha

wedha agha m obha
schna = Syna* ¥y dga
mika watkha wy ipa
wisi qdei gdgha
gedbha 4 npa amy mph
aInsha Ansa a pla
qgpsa = hd a bdha

* Pronounced gyd.

F nohd
Eg nsha
= nksha
ar npha
ws ndha
“i ndha

ari mbha

7 oda
7 cha
¥ dbha
mH ipha
@ dba
a ndha
wy ptha
ACHAP. I. | ORTHOGRAPHY: 15
alsa lta wy [pa al lhha
ela Bua awvha «zwzudha
ashcha shchha sta % shtha

mshna wy shpa wm spha Bska
wskha wa sta wstha waspa

Wspha whna

Compounds of three Letters are formed
by adding a, ¥, 4, H, a, ©. H, 7, or @ to

some of the preceding; as

 

wa kiya a ktra ex kiwa
a knya a krya x kshsha
we tstha eq isna aq isma

wy isya wa fsra we iswa

va ntia “aq niya va ntra

mq niwa mE nisa za ndhwa
wy pstha GH psma Wy psya
 pswa wy mpya wy mpra

aq mpla  mpsa #q Upta

eg Iptha wy Ipya wy Ipsa, &c.16 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART I.

Compounds of four Letters are formed by

adding a, 4, or 7 to some of the above.

3g oddhwa § nkiwa ey tsnya
gl ddhnya aq nirya way nlwya
meq ntsyd we niswa ea lpsma
wy Ipsya Sa Ipswa we slrya

Most of the following signs are used as
substitutes for some of the preceding let-
ters :-—

& is used for a whenit is not to be pronounced: as,
asa, who is this?

my is sometimes used for &.

. at the end of words is used for #, as A{H, AY, @ man.

: at the end of words is used for Wand {, as wae,
» \ ~
was, almost; Wat, yTA:, early. .
»
% is a substitute for : in certain situations, as #
aitfa, who acts ?
& . e e ®
denotes that the letter over which it is placed is
nasal, as Walfeqala, himself writes.
on ee
is used for ~, when it is the first member of a com-
pone eee oe <
pound consonant; ~« when it is the last:—as qa, the

sun; Feat, an action.CHAP. 1. | ORTHOGRAPHY. 17

° ec Y
A single consonant after” may be doubled, as aw, @

work.

t with = is thus expressed, &; with = thus, Kor T5

aS RR, & stag; Wi, OF Fy, a form.

3 lrais properly the-last letter in the alphabet; it is
used in.the Vaida, and in. mostof the provincial alpha-
bets. In Bengal it has become obsolete, and sf occu-

ples its place.

An>oblique line drawn through a letter, signifies that
it. is doubled; placed under one, that it has no inherent

vowel, but is final; as @ 2a; ay, vach, a word.

2 or = is used to distinguish the. grave from the short

vowel, as a3 or tty, O Rama!

| over a vowel is used in the Vaida for an acute
accent, - under one for a grave, and” above one for a

circumflex.
j in poetry is used for dividing distichs and verses:

at the end of the latter it is frequently doubled. In
prose it is used for a period.

D18 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. PART I. |

CHA PT fie ie
OF THE PERMUTATION OF LETTERS.

This part of Orthography applies to the
changes that take place in uniting one letter
with another to form a syllable; one syllable
with another to form a word; one word with
another to form a compound word; and all
the words in a sentence together to preserve
harmony of sound in the pronunciation.

The following artificial arrangement of the
Alphabet has been adopted, to express the
rules for the permutation of letters in a con-
cise manner :—

FCs eS ze FT HH
2 a gq. eee Sat Waqaq
q wea TH S|
aEesuw a a a

LF a

Under the above short vowels their cor-
responding long ones are included. AnyCHAP. 11 | ORTHOGRAPHY. 19

two letters being mentioned with a dash
between them, the intermediate ones are in-
luded ; thus 3—¥ ll

ciuced ; thus —gt means all the vowels,

and ¥—gq all the consonants.

i

el

¥, though one of the semivowels, is also
included in y—e,.

TET -
ae ee ee a eo
Sea nee = : sa
anes ary See

AS

al

 

The changing of x and ¢ tor; 3 ands to Tee? 4, ec vl
Hi; 3 and se to Hc; and w and to Wa; HH, ee
is called goon. wm. 3. & ¥

Aine Sila

The changing of ¥ to yt; x, , and z, tod;
3S, BS, and sr to 81; az and = to HIt; Vand = x
@ to ATa ; is called vriddhy..

———__

ie

 

RULES OF PERMUTATION.

RULE I.
When two similar vowels come together,
they coalesce and form a long one: as,

 

qT +) 34. . = wa, not to-day. 3 os gl
Wat + FS = ay, oso.
at + Iva = ara, she is come.

et BT pre cade ny aT, q, 7. 3 Ke RE WZ ,
ev Q prodeces bn ine giles ones

34 n> ee20 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART I.

ofa +eac = FATUT:, an emperor.

farm + suri fade, but the remedy.

fos + afe: = foafe:, a father’s wealth.
=

1. Interjections when single vowels, and indeclinable

vowels whether similar or dissimilar, as 3] s¥4=7, O Eter-
nal; % 233%, O Lord! sand ¢fa make sxfa and fafa,
O this! '

ve 2. In like manner 374 preceding the plural, dual
e . ¢ . .
nouns ending with ¥, si, and g@, and vocatives with the
ee, ‘ |
4 ..grave accent, do not coalesce; as svat Fut, these lords ;

an

Ha xa, these two cows; TAR Ue, O Rama, come.

 

8. =, if it follows w—v and is succeededby a vowel,
admitsof two forms; as faq + SH—= Pram or fara,

what rs spoken 2

A. 4z and coalesce and form a, as RIE -+ SARI,
— RIT ATT ; the sign of a priest; but Zand = dre

used only in the formation of fanciful words.

a
RULE II.

y sand gt final, if they come in contact
fas fact teeke with a dissimilar vowel, produce the change
a pth. eadled goon; if with a diphthong, that

ahi Kk o rac’

wes called vriddhy ; as,
" # 3 : .

®

&

~~

a “¢
=
oe

 

words ending with 31, do not unite with the followingCHAP. II. | ORTHOGRAPHY. : 21

Uta + BVT: = eae, the great God. }
fea + Juan: = featem, ood advice.

   

fo

a]
a
G
AY
5

— Wie, Ganges’ water.

aq + is = wate, thy wealth.
4, +. 2d = Gad, and this.
aq +s = aa, thy laps. ws

1. sq1 final followed by 3 has three forms, as at
and afa make yr arta, Us miu, or craft,” a royal €
sage. waadmits vriddhy only ee particularly empha- “7” we lhenwt/

f

  

tic: as aq, to-da aa a , go to-day.
A 3 314 3 0 Ys _ J ae § YY Hy ,
2. The diphthongs = and St cannot be made longer, abe :

and therefore suffer no change: as, EDIT + tay £7g7 a,
~ o \ ° » Se
the unity of God; Wa + Srazj == HaTay, medicine for the

world.

 

 

3. In the above rules, the 3 and Sr may be considered
either as dropped, or as coalescing with the vowel that
follows.

——

RULE IIL.
All the other final vowels and the diph-
thongs, when they come m contact. with

dissimilar vowels, undergo the following
changes :—— /'¢ , «Le are Me eed ap h lion g/ Px

taruek Cowan ea hy en one

alga) Au lag “s22 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART 1.

xand ¥ become a, as ufa +3qtq = WUaTY,
he replied.

$2. Y.. >) 4 + Rot =, Poet’.
and now.

ae: — Seysa <. OONUE+ Sieie: — ATA,

: a mother’s joy.

S- ¥ — BY tage = aqAe,

the characteristic @.
&.

= becOmes AS, == a + GATS: = TIRE:

thy perseverance.
ee =
& — ST, —— TH + SA: = aaae:,
* spoken to ham.
a — 8 Tat + eer = ufasr,
desire of heaven.
x N ;
ct =— Wh eets te: = Saree,

he fave rice.

1. The vowels admit of three forms, as aet 3, afg
sq, and aaa, a river here.

2. The diphthongs admit of two forms, by dropping a
ora ; asgeq +efa—wenfafa or yea xi, thusit happens.
rfn, following a vocative ending with a, has three
forms, as SHI xfa, yuEfa, Gufafa, this Sir!

8. When Zor St comes before 4,the 8 is dropped,

— hs + sefq te afd they. also. ; att 4+ Iq = Twa, save

& ss

i es
APRA n ae,” adh Mncinnon, YoderCHAP. It. | ORTHOGRAPHY, 23
Steeped Sere fe legese ne
RULE IV. of An elafer f= 4
‘ when followed by s—u, becomes sq; = z Aw Vi

when followed by a vowel, #; as, boc A

ft + Ae! =o fees, a servant. ae
° : a

fe + faa = fafya, a little. x *q
Hee Ae

tt + Bove =i but.

fe + waa = fataa, - whatisthis?

lay — + \
‘ te ti - .
a
i
5
* : :

I. In distinet words" generally remains unchanged, i
when followed by a consonant; at the end of a line or

sentence, it always admits of two forms: as fa asHIa, 4 asgiet AL )
what is that knowledge ? aq or AH, a man. hy

t
t

     

 

2. ie is followed by a, a, or 4, it may become
the same, * but admits of two forms: as qaqqy or aay Aya,

hey fc Wf /

he frequently desists.

4

RULE V.
: preceded Be 4 and followed ag BW or
¥—a, becomes 3; 5 preceded by x—3t, and ~*~“ Keven}

_.. followed by 3—a, becomes X53 as, “ . BY f-_
PO i aS i+ Se’ a ie) ke ae

4

= = s

-

*
>

Syaet + sfy— suentt, instruction also.

Re + Wa: == Alia, who is gone ?
gf: + ya =wirare, this fire.
ag + Was = afanta:, the sage 2s gone.

 

on ees
ae a) TS FTE a
5. e hee comer &

‘=st feed
HF ey da ra

| a eh 2
Jew seerty Ke

e

24 SUNSCRIT. GRAMMAR. [PART I.

1. The = is changed to 31 by Rule 2nd, and the
following 3] is dropped by Rule 3d, note 3d.

. If st precedes :, and is followed by 3—a, the :
is dr asned as, SU + SX == BIAS, spies here.

Ai WE
3. If si or e—3 follow: preceded by 3 or St,
the : is generally dropped, but may become @i as,

ate + SPATS Or ATAY:, an angry man.

4....Ehe + of tm, svat:.and wit: is lost when followed
=
by w—a, but. when followed by sj—s1, has twoforms,
as Wire, O save! WaAaA, or vigaa, O Eternal.

5. The : substituted for ~_ becomes {, if preceded by
sj-—3y7, and followed by 33—=#; but has two or more
forms, whenfollowed by @—¥; as BIH: + HA | BATA,
here in the morning; Wt -+ af: :ufa:, wyofa:, and

aeata:, master of speech.

6. If two Vs come together, one of them is
dropped, and the preceding vowel is made long; as,

Te: + tfa t= fafa, the child was preserved.

‘ RULE VI. BesuMnyr fedqgugqgya |
/uaduy BAS +: followed by e—a becomes X—; as, 2” “fi

AUT ES eee TTR, and they. Or
arerey: etna —aiefustad, the char coteer 20es.
a: aa aaita = RA ait a, who extends ?

Te Wek =— FU ~ i whe sleeps ?

oe » aus oo

% sat #8 ak

~ sate . :
® . & *
- : > sg ‘ . % “i a
' : x ~~ ‘ \

feu° j* Ys "i ¥- oa “kDCHAP, 11. | ORTHOGRAPHY. 2

qu

1. When : is followed by &, & a, ow, it generally
remains unchanged; if followed by any other letter of seal}
{—¥ compounded with ¥, it always remains unchang-
ed; if followed by W—w, it admits either form: as

Ses»
aa TaA , whosoever, &3 TAR:, what hilt? WA, OF HWA,
who sleeps?

Nr rare teen erence ees - . + coma perert segment TERT gee
Dt sinhieonnd GER 2 nal * es ms ae Meu " - - .
oe = a : = aa aS ; ‘
See pi ESTs ES ye y As ;
= i : Gs Wey : hie ; Erbe ge ae
? ? oa - : }
”

tac ieee:

amon:

me <a
~ailpeemmenrsneir
ae

 

2. Before *, @ 4, w, it sometimes becomes x a Mi
més 3%, ay
and is pronounced from the root of the tongue before Hl
the former two, and from the palate before the latter ; \ :
as, A RATT 1, who acts? 4% qsfa, who reads ? !
3. The: of the pronouns ¥: and wa: is dropped
when followed by any: letter besides 3, as WUs: this
man; "nef, he goes. If 3 privative is prefixed, the :
snot dropped; as sjul #v:, not this man.
SS bee noe —
a! RULE VII, opm apt iaie vase

gle

+t, follow ed by qe. baer gat Toe cote
and q—e, followed by a4, become 7 arm Ay

&% Xn.f-se' ty LS ~ ™
as, /
= + oe, a compound ®.

@aq + qq = wad, he will gain.
aiaa + wat= afawat, awood-cutter.

: a compound ..
aafu:, by the points of

the compass.

 

\ :

zeta, the six Dorshuns. by
s heen Lak Crt Bf Fo ncfoninnfeah }
C _ &. Vie sek hc cortever a r

z

i a. \ yee *

 

   

f26 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART i.

i. This rule particularly ‘applies to the finalletters

Soest of Rouns,” adjectives, “and verbs when inflected,

whether the inflection be made by the simple change
of the final, or by joiningit with another affix or
hunger, Nominative a or &&; “

iS

word: as @u,

Instrumental eater.
F/ 9 olf 1, S, Sor @ precede aH, when changed

by ©this rule, they. are. conyerted — into. .their .corre-

 

 

sponding as pirates ; as Sa. from 5%, Nominative aa Or
UR, a milker ; so 94, Nom. a or uz, wise.
—
i ee _ — RULE VIIL Pt le eee
| 2. at htvati #4 z Arg Veneer
' —T, followed py I—4, become a—4 ;
followed by Suz, become ©: aw; and fol-
lowed: by .2e, or *¢,> with 3m after them,
change the x to , and the ¥ to — 5; as,
ave + EM: mogmitw:, «master of speech.
wa fe: = wer, ‘actoud.
| wad + aaa: = TawHAtag:, ches man.
: tug lo ¢/ oe af + we = aera, — that shastra.
qa + Sta: = arrdta:, destetuteof speech.
Myatwooert.F Ss fates, something stolen.

1. a@—y, followed by s—w,.w, or Hy admit of

i two ran 5 3 as, aes ee aimeia: ; that in
ape a oyrerflenbe

ae Ce 3 tt. cigét F ia om Cor pty eager Shen
Beg) 9. cently tReet ea Anns or, Hie ¥

|e ee (Tank « f he fu wad evan udCHAP.11.] «ORTHOGRAPHY... 27

the rule-is amost: commonly.used, and the @ of an affix
admits only the. regular form; .as, alsqa:, eloquent ;
favaa:, wise.

=

RULE IX.

The «a class, ‘followed by the @ class, or
mg, 18 changed to the @ class; followed by
the < class, is changed to the €’ class ; “and
followed by @, is changed to @ : as,

aa+ faa = afaa, good intellect.

Td +. Ae. = Waal, having heard that.
at + Stat. = TETAal, his commentary.
rata fafeat=aaifatear, wrotien afterwards.

1, When =, 4,and a, are produced from a nasal, : esate: oS
they mustalways have "placed: over them, as Pratt a: nciagptiicaad ‘
faafa = faaifaafa , awise man writes, The os 3 ww rs q
also sometimes placed over the nasals produced from ‘; i

as, A+ WAS WAH, worship him. %
eS - =
RULE X. ,
2. pif
a preceded by %, HE; <, 4, becomes a; ~ aft As
Lg

a, or a, followed by ua, becomes * ;

and 4, @, §, or %, preceded by a,short vow-
el, and followed by #—3t, is doubled ;. as,

> TRE KA ey 50S ae

ras. * het as tu. he bifid vomamin, YD
, ‘i. 7p Seah a OF

¥
we

4

% . i . re
F ; t “¥? %, ¥ Pe ~

agent

> Sah28 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART I

o~

DH © e
Ww. « Ad = WAa, he wyures.
yw + ae = yare, shout of applause.
faat + afa = faaata, he desires to ex-
tend.

qa + afer sata, he will cease.
uaa + xfa — crafafa, thus, O king!
act + Brat = AERRTAT, the shadow of man.

1. Whenthe @ is final, or forms acompound withany
letter of the w class, except 4, it is not changed to w ;
in other cases it is, even if a vowel, produced from 4
or 4,:, any letter of the x ory class, 4, 4, or ¥, inter-

yenes.
=a

   
    
    

RULE XI.

4 ota oomel zw, preceded by xa, or the @ class,
fomevawellwhecomes 4; a, followed by the qclass or «,
\aRAAS becomes x; followed by the < class be-
iT Ce oe comes ¥; and the a, followed by the @ class,
» aftio ely “™ changes them to the € class: as

a1 S «td .
To G40 ft + wtefa= feta, he is sad.
wile CF Wwe + 4 ata, wn the words.
ate tf |
: qt] + WE = AABTe, a good mind.
aTq + Rte = wawtd, cold water or milk.

l

tf

} ge ll

/

"74 Bs ': f i ae % oa ee o ; ‘i : 2 ‘7 -2 weg f

a ee Pe ; a er a = Mogi nt comet
ee a frsesds2 ‘ ony wel Peasctopesel a ae
i é G GB Acme 24% Qi, ch Poy eho

2
plows by 2 TH — % YF, fofona de, T ip heen,CHAP. II. |

ORTHOGRAPHY. 29
Vag + SHIT: = Baegre:, the twang of a how.
qe + 8 — WS, the sixth.

1. If : or intervenes, ‘the q@is still changed tow;

~ ~ :
as, RU + @ = Fw, inthe arms.

RULE XII.
To»some finals. other~letters..are .affix-- 0 of
ed. €, followed by z—a, may affix 4; a
é, followed by a, may affix wa; wz, followed 5 ie Sh. ata
by w—e, may affix ¢. a, followed by z, .2 all
may affix a; followed by a, may affix Fa; oe |
but followed by a, &, zc, , a, ¥, with
3—aA after them, must affix T—a; as,
MIS + Fe: = Aires or (Sass,
before the sixth.
Ge ob VU = Bey: or qe aa,
sia good ones.
GNM +) Fg = YM ye: Or ATW BE,
the siath well counted.
aq + Fit —Ayqtie:, Axa, or AARiTe:,
a good touchstone.
Me ee AA: or aa a,

the good man.

FT phous ty ea WR at ap ret

LR. 1 S Gad

 

 

as Oar. tg Up poten?

Tht’ 7, 3.0.5,7, 0

of tin — es wateiP a cerreipertiy

aery selelare , ae
hae 7 - “sy Pe
haoty enw el b—
hat a30 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART =

acia +fefe = actPats, cut the men.
carat wife = watearfe, save the sons.
~~ XQ = ~9

ae ~ ¢ :
l. wwzra does not affix {—~ 5 as, gureaatfa, the meek
: .
man increases. ara followed by ara, and 24 followed
~w ax nN
Dy q, have both forms; as, nye or aTAaIA, what?

aie or que, save the me

ad

N. B. When another letter different from

,
° a epee e 7
those mentioned in any rule precedes or fol-

4 hea
ae 2 . lows, no change takes place; as, 7X+4=

% Taya oe qEta=wEed, they six; BA

fa» + 3 PATE!, a ood hilt.

wa In the inflection ‘ofsa word, the 7 class; following
JEY pe. 2

 

7 the = class, is changed to the <class: as, ES ef i= ES,
he praises.

If by one rule a letter is dropped, no ef-
fect is afterwards produced by any other
rule: as, aoa + eta = aea =xfa, and not

qeata; UU + FA — WII Fa and not wets.

a a

Ils

uw is still changed to u according to Rule XI. even
when a letter is dropped; as, aifaa + 3 = wifau,
\ =

among the wise. “There is a-celebrated verse in which

: : ~\ . -
W: + Te: is written wa:; but it is regarded by the

Qe TS

Pundits as a breach of the rules of Orthography, and

=

as a poetical license,PART I.

ETYMOLO GY.

This part of Grammar treats of the dif-
ferent sorts of words, their inflections, deri-
vation, and composition.

The parts of speech are eight, viz. the Sub-
stantive, the Adjective, the Pronoun, the
Verb, the Preposition, the Conjunction, and
the Interjection.

 

CHAPT pK “YF.
OF SUBSTANTIVES.

There are five declensions of Substantives,
of which four end with vowels*, and one ends
with consonants.

 

* There are a few ending with diphthongs, but they are irre-
gular,a

32 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

The Genders are three, the Masculine, the
Feminine, and the Neuter.

The numbers are three, the Singular, the
Dual, and the Plural.

The Cases are eight, the Nominative, the
Objective, the Instrumental, the Dative, the
Ablative, the Possessive, the Locative, and
the Vocative.

SECTHOM +

OF THE DECLENSIONS.

FIRST DECLENSION.

The first declension has two terminations,
3 and st. Nouns ending with 3 may be mas-
culine or neuter ; when masculine they form
the nominative case by :, when neuter by *.
Those ending with st are feminine. Asac, a
man; ATE, a star; wa, knowledge.CHAP. “I. |

Nom.
Ob).
Instr.
Dat.
Abl.
Poss.
Loc.
Voe.

Nom.

‘Oy.

Instr.
Dat.
Abl.
Poss.

Loc.

Nom.
Obj.
Instr.
Dat.
Abl.

Tab) Roy.

Loc.

ETYMOLOGY.

- MASCULINE.

Singular.

qz
Dual,
>
q<I
TT
ATTAT
ACTRIT
ALTUT

i ge
e 2 eT:

*.

_.
ALT:
Plural,

aman,

a man, .

by a man.
toa man.
from aman,
of aman.

am aman.

O man!

two men,

two men.

by two men,

to two men.
from two men,
of two men.
an tivo men,

men,
men.

by men.

fo men.
from men,
of men.

am men.

: . , Bee,
, +4 A € %&

5 i. meSingular.

aTeT

SOF 2 eee eee
A
=

Singular.

PUT 8 A

- fe
sly)
ra
4

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

FEMININE.
araT, @ star.
Dual.

%,

ate

ALA:
ic

= Si
NEUTER.

ata, knowledge.

Dual.
Re
aa
SUA
STAT
STATTUT
SAT
SUT:

K

[PART II.

Plural,
aTaT
ATIT:
arattat:
ATE TH:
—_—*

ATCT Y

)

aidy :

Plural.

Satter
Sr tthe
Slat:

Sai ey:

Se WCHAP. I. | . ETYMOLOGY. Bo

There are a few compound substantives ending with
su, which are of the masculine gender: as, ssqur, a
drinker of clarified butter, an. ancestor. Nom. s13quI1:
SUS 1, SSAA: ; Obj. srsazi, ssa yr, susqa:; Inst.
SST, SST, srsgufu: &c. like the fifth declen-

sion. SAT, SHI, Stet, a mother, make Vocative a,
&e. |

In the examples of each declension, when the Vocative
differs from the Nominative, it is supplied; when it is

the same as the Nominative, it is omitted.

SECOND DECLENSION.

The second declension has two termina-
tions, ¥ ands, which may be of the masculine,
feminine, or neuter gender. When of the
masculine and feminine gendey : is added in
the Nominative case. As, fate, &@ mountain;
TE, a teacher ; uta, intellect; WA, a cow;
afc, water; wa, honey.

a
?

i} > > > Sse Ge) F3% > ws36 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Il.

MASCULINE.
fnfc, a mountain.

 

Singular.
N. fatz:
O. Tate
I. fabcut
D.. face
A. fae
P. fae
L. ofiert
Veo FRE

wx, a teacher.

Singular,

Za

ES

Ss

TH

~~

é ‘A, 2
‘he

oS oe i Te ©
“
A

is

“ “ap ‘4

ot

Dual.
frat
frat
fafxeat
fafa
fafoout
frat:

farsit :

aie

&

Dual.

Plural.
farce:
fratt
fafete:
fatea:
Faroe:

firetpant
fafca

Plural,
Teg:
Wey

wh ~
wate:
Te:
DP

eH

TET

wD

a

fed €}| .CHAP. I. ] ETYMOLOGY. 37
FEMININE.
afta. ztellect.
Singular. Dual. Plural.

N. ata: wat ot
O. ata wat wat:
I. war areat afafa;
D. waa andaaa aft ara
A. wat: anda = atnut Atay:
P.: wut and aa: Aa: aatat
L. watand wat wal: atay
V. aa

=

aa, a cow.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

N. 2a: aa yaa
O. #7 aa ale
I. Bat wat wate:
D. Fe and aaa wat yaaa:
A. at: and Wat: Bayt Bi roe
P. Fat and Wate Bat: raat
L. gat and Fat Tat: aay
V. Wat38 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. __[ PART II.
NEUTER.
atfz, water.
Singular. Dual. Plural.

ate atfeut aratra
ate afcut aratia
afcat =. atta aifcfe:
atfoat atfaut atau:
atfout atfaeu
atfcu: atfeat: aratut
attcfu atfcanr: afcy
qre and atfe

<r ow = bor cae
a,
‘4

a

we, honey.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
ay ayat wats
AY Heat aut
UAT aut rate:
Ua
AU: weat WaT:
aa: WTaT. meat
| wares Aaa HUG
I : V. wat and wy

Ber oro 2

he The vy 0%. je c sll f Llane. C2 FX t y q fi te’ ;
ee Mee, hot ee oe
p 2 "“ttba* ~ Gift 7Y “AtjAtw (+

 

CHAP. I, | - ETYMOLOGY. 39

sife, a bone; sifg, an eye; <fu, sour milk; efaa, a
thigh; are inflected like neuters of the 5th declension,
ending with 34, in the Instrumental case, and the
other cases formed from it; as Nominative and Ob-

jective, afg, safgal, seitfa. Instrumental, eM,
sfgai, afefi:. Dative, Te &e. like ataq.

ag, a ridge of a hill, makes in the Objective plural

argfa and @fa, &c.
Q\
Ra ea
THIRD DECLENSION.

The third declension has two terminations,
% and &, which are chiefly of the feminine
gender; as 4T<t, a woman; Tq, a wife.

FEMININE.

Alat, a woman.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. aret at aT arey:
O. aret atea'y Att:
Joe ATA Tetat TTT Fat:
D. may atztut aTohy:
A. ara: arepat aap:
P, ara arat: arctut
L. aret arayt: arte

V. aft40 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART Il.

FEMININE.

qa, a wife.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
: TS
N. aa: qtat awa:
= s
O aa eat aes
I, qT apat wat:
2 ;
D. ae qaat aa
A. @at: qereut qa
P. ‘@qRaT: aa: awa
L. qt aut: qugq
V. ay

There are afew simple words of the masculine gen-
der, ending with ¢ and =, but they are inflected like
the compounds, except in the Objective case; as Ry
king of the celestial quiristers ; Objective, ge ‘ ays
"ea; all the rest like wav.

© ~*~ \

i

x

Simple words ending originally with $ and

y Bare principally of the feminine gender,

vand are thus declined: as 3}, prosperity ;
a, the earth.CHAP. 1. ] ETYMOLOGY. A}
FEMININE,

at prosperity.

 

Singular. Dual, Plural.
LN. ahs fear faa:
O. faa faa faa:
I. fear Bryr sie:
D. faz, and fa shai By ays
A. fam, and faa shai spy
P. Faa:, and faa: Paar: faut and Stayj
L. fifa, and fea; far: aiy

ae ee

, the earth.

o
Singular. Dual, Plural.

Ney” var ya

O. aa war ya:

I. yar Bey uf:

D. 4, and ¥¥ 3 wat ay:

A. as and Wars yrT ay:

P. ya . and yal: Hat: wat and yal
L. ufa, and Haz wars Wecovet Fatty erat hist State

 

Fe me PP
——
aa 3 hy

42 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

So wal, @ stringed instrument ; amt, lassitude; at,
a boat; aeM, fortune; a, fear ; El, shame, &c.

Of those cases which admit of two forms, the first
only is used when the word is masculine. ay is an ex-
ception in the Locative case singular; as, Nom. at, a
receiver; Dative, faa ; Ablative and Possessive, faa:;
Locative, faat.

eit, a woman, takes only the last form, and makes
=~ . ° ® ® : = ‘
Nom. @, feet, feat 5 Obj. fers and at, feaat, feaas,
; AG
and eit:; Inst. fa@ar, ara, alfa; Dat. fea, &c.

2, a brow, is inflected like Ys So also the compounds
a

of 3, except ==l, a serpent, and-aaty, a frog, which
aaa ee pes sv ee?

are inflected like qa.
~ ene Zi

Compound words, the last member of
which is a verbal root,ending originally with

i 10

or B; also reduplicated words, having a
single consonant before the € or G, are ge-
nerally masculine, and are thus declined:

ae ap crieronabs 2 oJ ‘4 ee Py
as Fatal, a eeneral; Wau, a sweeper.CHAP. I. |

Singular.

N. @arat:
O. aarey
I, dara
D. gary
A. aara:
P. Waiey:
L. aarat

Singular.

N. gay:
O. @aw
I]. waa
D. qaa
A. Ga:
P. qa:
L. aafe

ETYMOLOGY.

MASCULINE.

wate} a general.

Dual.

~ ~_
wary
‘ \

Balai
Balalegt
Raralagt
aaaleyi
a a Tat :
oe
Mary:

=i

@agq, a swee

Go

Dual.

a
Qa
eat
STG
waryi
a al
waa
Qa:

Plural.

Wary:
Vary:
Garathy:
Waray:
Vara:
earai

earls

eT.

Plural,

Qa
qa:
Qayyy:
Qayy:
eq ALY:
aay
a ty

So Feet, splendor ; feet, Peet, few: &e. aah, an
antelope, makes Objective ata@yqay , ara yaa E aT IATA; Lo-

cative singular, atayfea.

There are no neuters of this declension.44 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART I.

FOURTH. DECLENSION.

The fourth declension ends in 3, which
is changed to yT in the nominative case sin-
gular, when the noun is of the masculine or
feminine gender; as, fuz, a father; Ate,

a mother; ate, a particular shrub.

MASCULINE.

fad, a father.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. frat firaet frac:
O. fare frat Fira
J. tat fast fasta
D. fuz fart fan:
A. tag famat frau
Ps tua: frst frat
“L. taafe frat: eee

V. faaCHAP, I. | ETYMOLOGY. 45

NEUTER,

wiz, a particular shrub.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. ate wet arate
O. AT ars U urate
I. Stat, Beare MWeAT Se Lat
D. arse, wesw ae wt TT:
A. ate:, Atee: Usa Mie:

a

r 7 pI — ayT — ¢ BT aa 37

Ug, WEM = - ATA, ATS UT: -yTgut, ureut
- sy ra Fin
arate, BS a

V. Ale, ate

Yi

Wal, Wear: weyq

The feminine is declined like the masculine,
except in the Objective plural, as ata:.

There are very few neuters of this.declen-
sion.

Words ending in 3¢ formed from verbal
roots lengthen the penultimate as far as the
Objective ‘plural; as, AT a doer; Nom.

AN
HUT, RATLT, RATE
RIA

. 3 y
Obj. wuté, aaret,

~ ° 8 °¥ £
74, @ grandson, is declined like aw; so alse ad, @
re
sister, 4, a man, makes in the Possessive plural TU

and aut.AG SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART II.

FIFTH DECLENSION.

The fifth declension ends with final con-
sonants, and may be of the masculine, femi-
nine, or neuter gender. There is no difference
between the masculine and feminine in the
inflections, as may be seen in the examples,
atta, a hushand or master ; area, the sun ;
ae, the head ; Wane, the moon; qty, a
word ; and faz, a word.

Some of the final Consonants in the for-

mation of the Nom. case are changed thus:

a becomes Ri, as aT, a word, Nom. at,

—— KOre,— FA, a devotee; Nom.
aa. afars, a traveller ;
Nom. aft aie.

NS

= and ¥ become q — WAS, wealth; war; N.
aa, hunger; N. a.

a is dropped and the vow- | — tia, a king; Nom.

el made long; ts. wfaa, an ele-

phant ; Nom. weft.

w becomes UG ——- WAH, a point of the
x So
compass; Nom. ®&q.

q becomes : with the ] — IX a word, Nom.
vowel long; ite
q becomes & or Z, —— <q, a side; Nom.

TTa. WY or WE, a

question; Nom. Ye.CHAP. I. | HTYMOLOGY. 47

Ww becomes Z, or : with as qa, thirst; Nom: we.
& “9 € 3 ae

the vowel lone: UHG, a companion;
59 a t 3

Nom. Wai.
a q\

@ becomes: with the — atiaa, a priest ; Nom,
vowel long ; Gwar.

~ becomes ® or ¢, — §& @ milker; Nom,
Wa aura, a bee;
Nom. wafae.

The other single consonants undergo no
change.

The finala, ¢, a, a, of the Nominative
case may be doubled, or changed to @, =,

>]

e, a, at pleasure ; as, qk, ITH, or ata, &c.

In compound finals the last letter is
dropped, and the remaining one changed ac-
cording to the Rules of Permutation; but
when the first letter of the compound is @
or a, the @ or @ is dropped; as wy a
cripple, Nom. aa. Ve a baker, Nom. we,
zaK, aS, &e*. The a of tq, and that
produced from 4 or =, are not dropped; as
Tica, N. rz, a cowkeeper.

The Inst. Dat. and Abl. cases dual and
plural, also the Loc. plural, are formed from

* See Rule VII. p. 25.48 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

the Nom. singular by changing a long vowel
to a short one, : into different letters ac-
cording to the 5th and 6th Rules of Per-
mutation, and the letters a <a q to x
BAe &

~

The other cases are formed from the sim-
ple word :—this sometimes varies in the Obj.
plural, in which case the Inst. Dat. Abl.
Poss. and Loe. cases singular; the Poss. and
Loc. dual; and the Poss. plural are varied
in the same manner.

Words ending with 3a preceded by @ or
wz, change the a to sta in the Nominative
singular, and insert @ as far as the Ob-
jective plural; but the other cases formed
from the Nominative singular are regular as
though it had ended with q.

Words ending with ya change ¥ to ¥I as
far as the Objective plural, and then drop it ;
in the Locativesingular there aretwo forms.CHAP. 1.] ETYMOLOGY. 49

MASCULINE.

m O4

DPD

<7 f

eer er Oe

atiata, a hushand or master.

Singular.

wat
etary
eqrfirart
wifrs
qrfaa:
artaa:
atfafa
waifaa

Singular.

ATeTt
aT ay
ATT aT
wea

Aa eg:
areata

Dual.
aifaat
wifiat

arfaat
eqifaat
afieat
eifaat:
wifaat:

ie —
wrea@a, the sun.

Dual.

TTA
ITS
aregt
araat
areat
WTA
ATS AT:

Plural.
qifaa:
qrfara:
qifafa:
arta:
weifatey:
eifaat
qifay

Plural.
BUT
HIT:
arefE:
HUE:
ATS:
RTarat
eH50 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.
MASCULINE.
Wea, the head.
Singular. Dual. Plural.

N. Hat wgelat wae:

O, ae la FETA ag

I. wat aReat we fat:

D. 4% aeert Hea:
| A. ag! ast FSU
| P; ag BET: agi
i Le: afg, aR 4 Wat: wea
| V. aaa

—
waa, the moon.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
| N. WAT: aqeTHT Cera:
| Tare Weal =| Ware:
| I. WarET WRARIT waraifes
D. wre ant Tay:
| A. WHA: asanat Cera:
H P. SHAG! Oa TAT Crag
L. wrafe WHA WAS
i V. Wea:CHAP. I. | ETYMOLOGY. . 3d]

Compounds ending with qa. do not lengthen the
penultimate 37, and when they drop it in the Objective
plural, they change the € to ¥; as, fasea, the killer
of his friend, Nom. fare, frae at, Farge; ee iconve
fazuu, fava, faag: &c. So yaa and ALAA, the
SUN, aS = as the Objective. plural.

Words having @ or as the last letter of a compound
consonant before 374, do not drop the penultimate sj in
the Objective plural; as asqq_a priest, Nom. axa, aaaar,
sql: 5 Objective Osa, UsIal, saa.

NA, a heron, makes Nom. RS. ATIVE, Indra,
makes AWE, AU, AIRS: &e. TER time, STAT
Mercury, Us TS Indra, make Nom. SITET, Voc. 31a e:
&e. SYaE makes Voc. saz, SWaq, SYA.

ie
FEMININE,

qra, a word.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. are arat ary:
O. aTa arat qTa:
I. a@tat qt attiy:
D. gta arnyt qty:
A. aT@ aqrraut qT aay:
. ae qtat atat

Soy
A
sj
a)
2]
val52 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

FEMININE.

frE, a word.

Singular, Dual. Plural.

N. at frat faz:

O. fret fret tre:

Kk. fiver aput TTF:

D. fat mt ue D |

: A. fa: aif athe:
P. fae: frac: frat

! L. fate fret: ate

SurAe , a Shoe, makes Nom. Sutaa, &c.

Eee

Neuters ending with any letter but a—a,
insert 4 in the Nominative and Objective
plural, as, 37a, the world ; Nom. and Obj.
WAT, saat, wa.

Neuters ending with wa, drop the 4 in
the Nom. and the penultimate g in the Inst.
| case singular ; in the Loc. singular and Nom.
‘ and Obj. dual there are two forms. Those
ending with a, change the a to : in the Nom.
case singular ; and when @ is inserted in theCHAP. I. | ETYMOLOGY. . oe

plural, change a penultimate ¥, x, 3 to wr,
%, uw. As THAT, a name; Aaa, the mind.
NEUTER.

WHA, a name.

 

 

Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. aa aTaat, ATat aratis
O. aH Taat, ATAat ara fear
I. arat ATT arate:
D. are areeat wa:
A. aT: AAT alae:
P. Te: aa: arat
L. wif#, wate ara: Alay
Ve Wa, ATTA

aaa, the mind.

Singular. ‘ Dual. Plural.
N. Wa Raat aaa
O. aa: aaqat aatte
I. waat Hayat Hatta
D. aaq aanat Aa:
A. Waa: Aaa Haw
P. Aaa: aaat: amTAt
L. Aafe AaaT: ATA
V. Aa

 

sa, a day,makes Nominative 4#:; with a numeral
fa or ay, the Loc. singular is af%, aefa, or ae, on fhe
~S 5 a » 3 ;

second day.54 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

SECTION -IL

OF THE GENDER, NUMBER, AND CASES
OF THE NOUNS.

$e ——

Ist—Of Gender.

While the noun remains in its. primitive
state, itis not easy, in every instance, to
determine of what gender it is, without re-
ference to the Dictionary : it may however
in many cases be ascertained by the signif-
cation or termination of the word.

Some nouns from the nature of the ob-
jects which they express are masculine or
feminine; as ux¥, a man ; St, a woman ; fue,
a father ; watz, a mother.

The names of gods, infernals, heaven, sa-
crifices, mountains, clouds, seas, trees, sea-
sons, scimitars, arrows, poisons, snakes,
birds, wells, weights, measures, sound, fire,CHAP. 1. | ETYMOLOGY. D9

sun, moon, wind, collection, mud, prain,
chrystal, colours, chariots, enemies, mem-
bers of the body, and objects of sensation,
are generally masculine. Abstracts ending
with xq; also many wordsending with, @,
T, o, W, a, 1, U, A, a, T, F, and a, are mascu-
line. As 4%, a god; Hax, an infernal ; ait,
heaven ; a, a sacrifice ; AtX, a mountain ;
&e. ufara, lightness ; we, a teacher ; TH,
a heron ; ttm, disease ; we, cloth ; TM, war;
ata, a lord ; a, a person ; feu, an elephant,
&e.

A very considerable number of nouns are
both masculine and neuter; as wratwz, the
sky ; Sam, exertion; wae, deceit; Hara,
the skull; 4S, leprosy; M&F, asaw; KX,
a house; wra, a spoon; ACW, a foot ; AEH,
a cup; &a, anumbrella ; c¥, a pick-axe ;
ag, grief at separation; we, virtue; FE,
or aax, a finger-nail; WiaH, sin; ATA,
honour ; aa, a colour ; ate, essence, and

many others.

Words meaning lightning, night, climbing
plants, the lute, points of the compass, earth,56 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. _ [PART II.

shame, light, and brightness, are commonly
feminine : so also words ending with aT, =,
%,z, and abstracts ending with at. fa, or
sfa; as frta, lightning ; tifa, night, &c.
wat, play; wat, drowsiness; weat, good-
nNeSS ; ata, recollection.

Feminine nouns are formed from the mascu-
line by adding €, sometimes by adding = ;
the final vowel of the word is dropped;
as, A, Tat, ariver ; WN, But, a doe ; Yara,
eierat, an elephant; ava, avat, a child; aa,
eR, a sparrow. AC, aman, makes aret.

Words ending with 3 change the % to <
in the feminine ; some change a final & to
| q, anda final fa to fa; some ending with
a, as the last letter of a compound con-
sonant, drop it; and nouns of the 5th de-
| clension, varying in the Objective plural or
ah Inst. singular, do the same in the femi-
| nine gender ; as, at, Hal, an actress; FATA,
ns quart, a frog ; ufa, wat, a mistress; wal,
th Rat, a fish ; THA, TTT, a queen, &e.CHAP. I. | ETYMOLOGY. 57

Most words ending with srx, form the fe-

minine by 3, and insert = : ; as, area, atfrar,
a doer*,

fava, a thrower, and aye, @ holder, do not insert ¢:
and 3331, @ goat ; Ta, & son; Hea, a pair of bellows ;
gait, @ god; and "Wt, a charioteer, have two forms
when sm is added. As fatyat; afer and saat, &e.

There are sometimes two forms in the fe-
minine; as, <P, Tat, night; qa, aTat, a
word ; ata, atat, a border, &e.

SU Arey, a teacher ; Ray, an honorable man ; Suny,
an instructor ; ata, @ maternal uncle; aay, the sun ;
afaa, a man of the military tribe, have two for MS ; as,
araragt and Satara, &e.

 

xa, Indra ; Wa, Fs, UE, Shiva; Fara, Brahma; RE,
Ridra; aRq, Vurtma; make the feminine by ara};
as, SHIM, HATA, Feral, &c.

afy, jire; afaa, a certain sage; Rate, usury ;
WAM y, Indra; wa, the sage Munu ; andgarafa, Vishnis ;
make the feminine by S14}; as agri, aaray, &c.

 

* Verbals of this description may be considered as nouns,
when they stand alone; but as adjectives, when they quality
another word.58 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

Words signifying atmosphere, forest, leaf,
hole, dew, water, coldness, heat, flesh, blood,
face, eyes, belly, palate, riches, fruit, copper,
iron, pain, pleasure, aquatic flowers, salt,
spices, perfumes, ornaments, battle, court-
yard, name, cloth, food, wood, horn, sour
sruel, medicine, nectar, bow, ‘town, are
very frequently neuter. Verbal nouns end-
ing with x; abstracts ending with a, @;
many words ending with 4, 4, a; and Nume-
rals above a hundred (except atfe) when
used substantively, are neuter. As, #aT, the
sky; wea, a wilderness; wi, a leaf; Tex,
a hole, &c. wfta, a spade ; tra, a kingdom ;
THA, a gong; RA, a tribe; axa, fame.

Some few may be masculine or feminine,
as He or wat, acrucible 5 HW, AMT, or AUT, the
throat; af& or Tet, a stick, &c. Afew others
are feminine or neuter, a8 areat, atea, old
aLe; wat, Aa, friendship; and a few admit
of all the genders, as UTa:, UTat, UTA, a
vessel ; sO We, acup; Ue, a basket; aWe,4a
road or inclosure ; atfsA, a pomegranate ;
and Ta, a jujube.CHAP. 1. ] | BFYMOLOGY. 5O

2d—Of Number.

Nouns of multitude are frequently added
to other Nouns to express plurality of idea;
as, fafusaae:, woods ; WAU, servanis ;
quua:, blades of grass; and UFITNUe:,
shells and flutes. |

Some names of countries are used in the
plural number only ; as warau, Punchald ;
facet, Vedaiha; ax, Vunga, &c.

The following wordsare commonly used on-
ly in the plural number :—3y, water; 3g or
aia, life; wqca,a nymph; efaat and asa,
twonames of mansions in the Zodiac ; Wt, when
at means water; HAH, 2 leech; aise, rice ;
art, a wife; xu, the fringe of a garment ;
arat, parched barley; aw, name of a city ;
aar, a certain star; ATH, fried gram; qa,
the rainy season; FAX, a sort of grass;
faaat, sand; and aaaa, a flower.60) SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

3d.—Of Case.

The regular cases are often supplied by
other words or terminations.

The Instrumental case is sometimes sup-
plied by acu, weua, and va, wala; as sq
aca, * with a weapon ; afauaa, by design.
The Dative by 3u and €q, as Rrypare: +, for
purification ; safaseat:, for exaltation. The
Ablative by @, as qetwa:, from the Pi-
rand. The Locative by At, as eq=at, in the
God.

Some nouns are entirely deficient in the
. cases : as, He, enough, ornament, power,
prevention; Sf, existence; KTa, obtsacle ;
| widge, violence; €atand wert, manifest-
| | ness ; Sua, division; Sit, Hindu trinity; %,
water, head, ease, blame; aa:, salutation ;
are, non-existence ; wata, diffusion ; Wala,
fatigue; X and wat, welfare ; atae, conceal-
ment ; Qt, heaven ; Fa, negation, quarrel.
* Ending with * the word is a compound adverb, but ending
with a@ a compound adjective.

+ This may be ayy, 72, Kura, or RY.—

CHAP. I. | ETYMOLOGY. 6]

Others are redundant in some of the
cases, as HEA, Hea, n. blood; yraa, Waar,
n. a seat; SER, Sea, n. water ; EA, <a, m.
a tooth; eta, ata, m. an arm; afaat, aq,
f. a nose; fant, fan, f. night ; ure, we, m.
a foot; taal, ta, fan army; ATE, ala, m.
a month; aera, ax, n. the spleen. 8,
zr, m. broth; naa, waa, m. ordure ;
ate, ate, n. the head; za, ea, n. the
heart.

The first in each of the above two words
is regular in all the cases; the second-is sub-
stituted for the first, and is regular only from
the Objective plural fas

 

“wes, waa, blood.

Sinvular. Dual. Plural.
N. Fea Test wefte
O. 3TH Tat wets, arta

I. Feat, Tat Penuyt, gant getfia:, wats:
D. ye BT Tat wat TART, HAV:
&c. &e.

 

T Some respectable Pundits maintain, that they are both
regular throughout, but that the latter are less frequently used
in the first two cases.62 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART If.

ExT, FE, the heart.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
N, ta eae ecata
O. ext eaa ecatta, Efe

I. Beae, eat Beat, Fat Taxa: ete:
D. gxara; ee wea, wat eaeny:, Ta
«xe. &e.

i
The following Nouns are irregular :—

att, f. decrepitude, may be regular like artr, or like
a word ending with S1a , except in the Nom. nen;
and the cases formed from it; as Nom. 371, aT FTE,
Bt: Aya; Obj. ArT Aw, HT A, HT AA; Ins
STA StU UT, ATE, arita :, &c.

afa, m. a One Nom. wal, Hela, AAs s;
Obj. ware, VV, wea; (the dual and plural are re-
gular like fuft) Inst. singular aa; Dat. wa; Acc.
and Poss. ew@:; Loc. aa. So ufa, m. a lord, from the
Inst. sing. but regular when a compound.

Rrg,mM. a jackal. Nom. FIST, ABR, RST ; Obj: Rat,
Rent, Brea, and rea; Inst. great Fret, Heri,
AEM:, &c. he the ond ace Ath declensions in all the

cases formed from the Obj. plural. Feminine @T¥?-CHAP. 1. | ETYMOLOGY. 63

Re m. wealth. Nom. Tt, tat, tia; Obj. Tia, Tat, Tats
Inst. Tar, Wegi, Tifa:, &c. like the 5th declension.

— A e . \
Fr, mM. an ow, Att, Wat, Was; Obj. at, arar, ATs; Inst. xar,
Trey, afH:; Dat. Ta, TPA, maq:; Ab. Wr, Teg, Ay;
Poss, ir, wa:, tat; Loc. afa, aan, Fra. So Qt, heaven.

\ =~ \ A a oY
at, f. a boat. Nom. ati, ater, ara; Obj. ard, Atal, Aras;
Xue 2
Inst. arat, Steqt, atfa:, &c. So zat, the moon.

37, f. water. Nom. plural sqrq:, Obj. ayq:, Inst.
wig, Dat. and Abl. Sq], Poss. sqzi, Loc. RY.

HAASE, n. a bull. Nom. Haga» Kage, SAGE
Obj. Hag, HAZE, Hage: ; Inst. gaze, Tazz
sale: &e. Feminine gage} and SAH.

aA, m. a horse. Nom, aaql, Ia, Bayt! 3
Obj. staal, Haat, Hay7:; Inst. ataqAt, sre BI, Raghz,
&c. Feminine sat.

fea, f. heaven. Nom. ar:, fear, fea; Obj. fea and
at, fear, fea:; Inst. fear, atgi, afa: &c.

ufga,n.aroad. Nom. wa, Ua, qaara: ; Obj.
quia, oat, qy:; inst. war, afer, uafafy:, &c. So
afga, a churning, aa; andaufaa Indra, wat, &c.
Asa compound, ufga makes Nom. H¥EIyw:, AEWA,
weragt:, &e. a great road; like ay.

2 : :

qad, m.a male, Nom. yata, Yale, FAR: ; Obj.
Cee or @ ° e ° ‘ cll
aAid, GATE, YI Inst. Ter, Geai, GfH:, Ke.64 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART If.

fyaaaq, m. a lover of four. Nom, fyaaR:, faust,
fyasmit:; Obj. Frasery, ages’ Tyaaat:; Inst,

e

farsa, frrsaai, Praagiar, &

Adda, mM. Indra. Nom, awaTa AUT, Ryaat aq-
ara, agama: Aaa: ; Obj. Hea AWA, Awan awaral,
ayant: wala: Inst. awa Ayla, HUA Rl AT a, aaafe:
agafa:, kc. Feminine ware}, and awa.

YT y . e

qaq, m, a youth. Nom. gat, aarat, qata:; Obj. Fara,

aaa, aa:; Inst. aat, qari, qafws; &c. Feminine gat
and aqjq, aart.

sya, a dog. Nom. 3a, saat, sgiaz; Obj. sara, sara,
wai; Inst. wat, sgrat, 2gfus, &c.’ Feminine way.

are preceded by 4 or HT becomes Sir, preceded by
any other vowel becomes a, in the Obj. plural, and
the cases formed from it; as, Peeqere, , the sustainer of
the universe ; Nom. tie! faxgasy, fasqare:; Obj.
plural fasie:, &e. wale, the sustainer of the earth ;
Nom. xv, wae, Rate: ; Obj. plural zE:, &e.

sgt arg, Indra, has two forms; Nom. 3aat:, Saar,
syraie: ; Obj. Sate, Saat, Sante: and Saare: ; Inst.
SEI DITA RT, agra, ayaaifa:, &e. Voc. ara:
and sgvat.; Feminine syaret. So HIaY, SATTTY, and
Wise in the Nom. and Voc. singular.

PRESCHAPTER MII.

OF ADJECTIVES.

———> -e——-
SE C.FY OW. 1.

OF THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.

Adjectives in their inflections are analo-
gous to Substantives.

They may be divided into two sorts, the
one ending with vowels, and the other with
consonants.

Most of them vary in gender to agree with
the Noun which they qualify ; but some,
with the exception of the neuter in the first
two cases, under one termination include
all the genders; as, wa, fair; wz, mild;
Bina, prosperous ; euaq, covetous.66 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

We, fair.
SINGULAR.
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
Nee wu Wt Wey
OF wi wat wy
ce a ee —
D wae was Wl
A gat HAT WaT
l Pp. QHe waa: WI
| L wa qarat wa
Vv. wa ue Way
DUAL
N.O. watt wa wat
LD.A.ganat cavgt warat
| PJ. WHAT: WHAT: WHAT
! PLURAL.
|
| oe wa waits
| O. wate wa: warta
; I. wat: waite: wa:
| crake TH Wala WHY
A. qax way: way:
I RS warat Arat
‘ L. Was WUe wayCHAP. IIT. | ETYMOLOGY.
zz, mild.
SINGULAR,
Masculine. Feminine,
N. qs az
Cite A 15
I. HEAT aT
é si 4 .
D. aq qa
A. Hat: Fat
Pp. aat wats
Lite Bat wat
V. Fat Hat
DUAL,
N. O. 34 ee
LD. A.aart a)
P.L. wat: ipl
PLURAL.
N. Fat ant
aa
O. Het ye
I wets wate
Te
$ aU:
Bi. UPS een
A. aa me
Pp  -aaat ec
Ie. Way wSF

Neuter.

a
é 2
as
yar
usa

aa
Rt
vata

a

ay MN

aaa

weut

Foal
a

6768: SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. __[ PART II.

Btad, prosperous.

BINGULAR.
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.

N. ATT rat are

O, *tax atret ware

.. strat ATARI Strat

D. stra ahaa tad
_ A. TAA: STA STAC
i Pp. aaa: STATI Stra:
Le mata STATI stata

Ve. Stare stata aTAT

DUAL.

N.O. ‘ant sare sitet
| I.D.A.asit sTarateat staat

PL. Strat STAT STAAL:
| PLURAL.
|
| N. As tae stata
: O. WTAa: strat w=ara
L atatg: Stratis: sats:
| D wttzg ainara: slay
A. mag wtTHatey: WAS]

iP. ara arratat ahrat

| BAS ies ary atapereatas eran

= Mo
Sey

CHAP. UI. | ETYMOLOGY: 69
CMA, covetous.
SINGULAR.

Mas. & Fem. Neuter.
N. warn SUR
O. Fars CUA
Gast CUA
D. gust cust
A, arts CUT:
r, oars: Ue:
L. 8 qats cuts

DUAL.
=
N. O. GaUsit qarsit
LDA. gaat TUnat
PL. wait SUWAt
PLURAL.

N. Furst: TUH
O. wae sary
I. want: eulsy:
D. waz ZU:
A, ems: eT:
P. wast oust
L gaa cua79 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [| PART II.

Adjectives ending with 3% insert x in the
feminine. wraa, chief; ua, this; a, know-
ing; ©. two; Mf, own; have two forms in
the feminine, when a 1s affixed. Those
formed from feminine Nouns ending with yt
have three. As waa, while ; atuat; atfarat,
STaqat; wtwart, warat, warat, from aat, the
Ganges.

syau, living ; yaa, firm, certain; aa, belonging to
which; ax, belonging to this; are exceptions, and do
not insert £; as, STlaar, &c.

gira, crooked; Sait, great; Aatw, hap-
py; Taw, covetous; BW, angry; Tx, old;
Taq . faxge, terrific; Trxta, wide, great ;
“ta, red, and compounds relating to the
members of the body, have two forms in the
feminine. A few of the latter have only that
formed by 3t. Words of comparison ending
with y=g, and those ending with a passive
participle which relates either to the parts of
the body, or something diminutive, have only
thatformed by ¥. As, HitTat, HCrait; WaAAT,
qanet, lotus-faced; werwutyt, having fine
sides; arvgaemt, having a face like a tiger;
x<uat, having a tail like an arrow ; atest,
broken-skulled; waterat, a little cloud-capt.CHAP. III. | ETYMOLOGY. 71

So mTa, bought, is used in the feminine, as, wax,
bought with money.

aa, variegated ; afta, nourished ; tifea, red; auf. BR,
blood-coloured ; 337, white, have two forms; thus, wat
and wat, &c, sifea and ufan have three forms; as
sifemn, black; sifest, andafefg, middle aged; ufam,
erey ; ufagit, and ofa fx, old.

saz, and fang, undecayable, like the noun WTI,
have two forms, except in the Nom, an1 Oblique cases
formed from it: as Nom. s18t;, sTHU BATU, SAT
SHAT, &e.

Adjectives ending with 3, except such as
have’a compound consonant before the =
and we, of a harsh taste, have two forms in
the feminine; thus, Hs or Wat.

St, a thigh, being the last word ina com-
pound adjective of comparison; also ax,
tawny; Us, lame; Ate, fearful; and ad-
jectives ending with atz; change the 3 to &
in the feminine ; as watt, having thighs like
a plantain tree ; UZ, lame.

Adjectives beginning with a vowel and end-
ing with x—2, besides the regular form, may
inthe Dat. Abl. Pos. and Loc. singular, and
Poss. and Loc. dual, have the feminine and
neuter the same as the masculine ; thus Dat.72 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Ir.

saree, from waite, without beginning, may
be masculine, feminine, or neuter.

Adjectives ending in ¥ or %, change the

sto x, and the w toy, in the neuter gender;
as, at, masculine and feminine, gig, neu-
ter, happy; Aweaa:, masculine and feminine,
qivaa, neuter, handsome.

= following a, a, or 4 substituted for a, has
two forms in the Abl. and Poss. masculine
singular; as 7a: or we. from. qat. So at,
cutting; Ja: or wy, &e.

WET, wise, makes sing. dual, and plur. mas, and fem.
Nom. © a:. afar, afear, &e. like 3}. Wu, intelligent,
makes Nom. yut:, WoT, yw, &c. like darat. They
have two forms in the Inst. case neuter, ¢fuat or efuat,
J wyror vPVat.

The few compounds that end with @;
Ht, Ht, change the = to x, and the 31 and
St to 3 inthe neuter; as Hfae, very rich;
neuter, Hfatc, &c.

All adjectives ending with wa or qa are
declined like Wha.

arma, pregnant, and ufiar, governing, make femi-
nine, aaa, ulnar.

sruad, sinful, and aqay, majestic, have two forms in
the Vocative singular, as 37 4a4q_ or a7 &, &e.CHAP. I. | ETYMOLOGY. io

Those ending with a are thus declined ;
Zea, great; Nom. Vea, eeat, wea. Obj.
eed, Teal, cea, &c.

Hea, Sreat, makes N. ayia, Feat, wer, &c. like star.
but retains at in the cases where a is retained. . Thus

singular, dual, and plural, masculine, Nom. WEA, ARIA,
Fata; Obj. wera, ARTA, wens. Neuter, Nom. and Obj.

plural, aaif=y.

Adjectives formed by affixing aa, after a
vowel, @—a, or w, change the Tz to Tz in
the feminine; if compounds of the first ge-
nus, there are two forms. As, MTA, wise ;
Nom. atat, atazt, ata. qTeAalTA, very wise ;
qeetat, aeedtaet and awetar, teats.

SI aaa, horseless ; Nom. svat, sag ; but sara, when
feminine, is declined like the Ist or 5th declension;
as Obj. saat or aaa, &c. WHA, placid, quiet, makes
Nom... 4Xta; Obj. gata, &c. like TUR.

Adjectives ending with xa have three gen-
ders, andare thus declined: @fqa, happy; N.

qat, giett, qfa; Obj. yfax, qfaat, gia, &c.

Those ending with qa, or qa, have also
three genders, and are inflected in the
following manner; aa, more excellent;
Nom. ara, Beat, 4a:; Obj. gate, &e.
retaining the at like wea.74 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART 1.

Compounds ending w ith aq, to sit, are irregular ;
as, Hae, sitting well ; Nom. a3, Obj. Uae, Kc. GATS,
makes feminine Wyamst, having a-large udder : it is the
same if preceded by any Adjective.

Adjectives ending ina compound consonant, the first
jetter of which ist or @, and the last y—w, have
«xvo forms in the Nom. and .Obj. cases plur. Neuter

gender ; as Wa, Fong well ; wai or Ral.

Adjectives ending with the root 974, when they signi-
fy moving, are irregular in ‘the feminine gender, and
Obj. case plural, &c. as, SFX, gong northward ; Nom.
ses, SS, STR. Obj. plural, Seta. Tara, driv-
ing cows; Nom. Warm, Tt, wWata. Obj. plural, ‘a.
friars, going crookedly; Nom. fray, fat Sy, faze ;
Obj. plural, fat yi. WS, Gong vastenarll: Nom. 3ae,
Gaal, VaR. Obj. plural, Gia. IA, going westward ;
Nom. yrs, grat, sty Obj. plural, srs. When they
-signify ‘honoring, they are regular ; as 9a, mutually
honoring ; Nom. 9QS, gaat, WOR; Obj. yA &c.

aq, destroying ; HE, injuring ; FX, swooned 5 ; Pare,
affectionate ; WX, satisfying ; have two forms in the
Nom. ; as, aK, Az, &e. aa, and ara, fall from ;
make Nom. Qa and wy. ase, having a Jine buli,
makes Nom. Qa gq, AAS UL Wasa.

~- 7CHAP. 11: ] KTYMOLOGY. 79

SE eT ON. “I.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

The simple word or positive state becomes
the comparative by the addition of at, and
the superlative by the addition of wa; as,
RH, fair ;. Waar, fairer; Waaa, farrest.

Adjectives ending with € or w%, may have
the € and ‘ws either long or short in the com-
parative and superlative degrees ; as, qat,.
chaste; adtac, afaat; adtae, afaan.

A final # is dropped, and a final #w be-
comes @, when at and aa are affixed ; as,
qq4, young; qaat, aan. fate, wise ;

wh

treat, faqaa.

The degrees of comparison are also form-
ed by xe and €aa, each of which may be
comparative or superlative; when these ter-
minations are affixed, the final vowel of the
word, and all affixes are rejected. As, @a;
short; afas, wdtea. afana, wise; ates,
watae. Halfsa, sagacious ; AAS, HATA.76 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Ti:
The following words are irregular with xe
and ¥aa, but they are regular when a and

aaare afixed:—

sfar;, ear, afe B, aeiay.

SEK, great, airs, ailad.

fay, quick, afrs, aaa.

as; little, smal, aife s, relat.

We, important, afts, ATTAR.

ay, satisfied, aja, aula.

ay, far, q fas, zalad.

ye, excellent, as, Bad.

T94, beloved, WS, wae.

aaa, young, afas, alas, alae, aad.
qq, great, yfas, way,

qa, much, afes, agiad.

az, inereased, afas, aralad.
ag, old, afew, Bs, auyau, SATA,
araiy, respectable, afc s, qatad.

fet, firm, oe ct

Fant, swollen, GAS, Way.

we, thick, far, wias, waa.

RY; short, EUs, Eday.

qu, lean; Ze, firm; ufkas, surpassing ; ya, thick;

YT, much; and az, mild, change the ® to Y, when

si eS and £aq are affixed; as, afee, Weta.CHAP. II. | ETYMOLOGY. |

The terminations expressive of comparison
are added to other words besides Adjectives ;
as,

Ist.—To Nouns; as, 31, prosperity; Stat, ¥taA,
or Fax, faau, more prosperous, &e.

2d.—To Pronouns; as, %:, who? qat, which of the
two? ann, which of the many ?

3d.—To Participless as, ag, increased (in years),
TSN, TRAA.

Ath.—To Adverhs ; as, 33 a, high ; saat, saan
Ke.

oth.—To Prepositions ; as, SH, up; BAT, better ;
SaWA, best.

EERE SEA NOt ON eee
So Ree: TON Ee

OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.

> —
I—CARDINALS.

ZA, one. Tea, eight.

fe, two. ‘yl qaqa, nine.

fa, three. ama, den.

aqt, four. rarawa, eleven.
aqa, five. atana, twelve.
qa, six. : aarewa, thirteen.

x ; as bac
GNA, SEVEN. waa wa, fourteen15 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

quanta, fifteen.
wTSLA, sivteen.
VAL, seventeen.
werawa, eighteen.

watsafa, nineteen.

faxfa, cwenty.
Taxa, thirty.
wattowa, forty.
Tatra, fifty.
afe, sexvty.
aafa, seventy.
gatfa, exchty.
aafa, ninety.

ga, a hundred.
aaa, a thousand.

[ PART: If.

faaa, a million.

atte, fen millions.
Baz 100 millions
WEE, 1,000 m2llons.
qa, 10,000 melons.
weg, 100,000 mills.
wa, a billion.

aetaa, fen billions.
gra, a hundred billions.
zetia, 1,000 billions.
tet, 10,000 billions.
weTetet, 100,000 delds.
aa, a trzllion.

aarza. fen trelhons.
ssatteat, 100 trillons.

 

waa, aa, fen thousand. AEtarreat, | 000 trilis.
aa, 100 thousand.

The uneven Numbers are formed by pre-
fixing we, et or fe, Aa, WAX, WA, TS, AY,
Wer, and wa to the even ones; as, tafanta,
ettdafa, Aafiata, wad xfa, wattate, gete-
afta, anfaafa, wetfinfa, wafaera, tventy
one, &e. to twenty nine.

wag, Tala, and Taira, are sometimes used for Wa,
as, Warefanly, nineteen, Sc.CHAP. IT. | ETYMOLOGY. 79

Numbers united together by a copulative conjunc-
‘tion are added; without one, multiplied ; with ay af-
fixed, divided; with a fy, and aE, they mean the whole
‘number and half of it. As, aa aati wq 4, fourteen years,
a@qaayq, twenty-fve ; AULA WATS, 000, 1. e. three hun-
dred and half a hundred ; or ATW Wigs, 350; i. e.
the half of the half of fourteen hundred; & Wer,
450,

tam

Ii. ORDINALS.

sua, first. feata, second. sata, third.

wau, fourth. waa, fifth. a, sixth. an,
seventh. TEA, eighth. aaa, ninth. ZXa, tenth.

From ten to twenty the Ordinals are the
same as the Cardinals. The uneven num-
bers .are formed in the same manner as those
of the Cardinals; the even ones by adding
am to the Cardinals. Those under 50, ending
with @ or fa, sometimes drop the a or fa, and
omit aa; as, faafada, or faa, twentieth;
faaua or faa, thirtieth; waftxaa, or
wate, fortieth; uaiaa, warn, fiftieth ;
afsan, sixtieth ; wmataan, seventieth ; yxtfa-
aa, eightieth; aafaan, ninetieth; waan,
hundred ; weaaa, thousandth, &c. |20 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART i,

fe, fa, Wat, Waa, wy, and Fea, are irre-
gular in their inflections. f¢ is used only in
the dual ; the others only in the plural.

° . Ran dil
fa, two. Nom. and Obj. masculine =, feminine and
neuter &; Inst. Dat. and Abl. qty; Poss. and Loc,

ea.
fa, three.
| Masculine. Feminine, — - Neuter.
; N. aaqt fre: sifu
i O. ata: fre: afar
F, fafa: fret: fafa:
D. A. Tar: faery: fa:
P: FAIUy frau TAWi
| Ll. 7 Fg free faz
|
wat, four.
| Masculine. Feminine. Neuter,
N. rae: aes arate
On. at: aT: aralfe
H I wafe ante: aafu
: i D.A. qa ara: aan:
P. Saat SAUTE aqui ;

uo L <q BAT Y say
ih i SS ~ >CHAP. If. | ETYMOLOGY. 81

Waa, 8B, and 37y4, are alike in the three genders.
Nom. and Obj. wq; Inst. wafa:; Dat. & Abl. Ges
Poss. warat ; Loc. wu.

Nom. and Obj. az or #3; Inst. ufg:; Dat. and Abl.
Bg; Poss. wayt; Loc. wey, werd.

Nom. and Obj. sit and aygt; Inst. avefa:, serie:
Dat. and Abl. see:, svety:; Poss. sygrat; Loc.
SEU, ANT.

The following are signs used for the nume-
rical words :—

ee 2 2, 2 3, 8 4, wo, € 6, 07; «8,
E40}; 20 10,

22 11, wedZ, &c. . BO, 30:90. &c,
2221, 3334, &e, 0 100, 2x0 250, ovo
1,000, x<Ro 1820.

 

 

se

i
a i b
4; Bt t
| Wainy | r
ys
eyes ab
14m i eek
i
134
ery cv
Paes ite
aie | RBs
fige 7
Ch & 4
Het hal
ahaa
tia }
vie oo
ty. eae i
irae
yi ti
titer i
Veolia
Pia}
Ne i
( teistais
é ig
Ai! te es
ee

4 <
if
af
iy
rut
ah j
on ,

i ees
sp ‘
wei ety

R { Ty ieh
ie |
1 ;

Wh +
ae i
itt ,
ihe :

Ht

ee
ee SeCHAPTER Il.
OF THE PRONOUNS.

There are four kinds of Pronouns: the
Personal, the Relative, theInterrogative, and
the Adjective Pronouns.

Sh CO T 120.347.

OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

The Personal Pronouns are waz, I;
aug, thou ; az or Ga, he, she, and it, with
their duals and plurals. Gender has respect
only to the third person, and is distinguished
by the terminations in the word az

2 5 AS, ET,
he; at, she; az, it, &e.CHAP. III. |

Nom.
Obj.
Inst.
Dat.
Abl.
Poss.
Loc.

Nom.
Obj.
Inst.
Dat.
Abl.
Poss.

Loc.

Nom.

Obj.
Inst.
Dat.
Abl.
Poss.

Loc.

ETYMOLOGY.

WHE, L.

SINGULAR,

Te,

AT, and at,
TIT,

wa, and &,
ad,

wa, and &,
ata,

“DUAL.
Tat,

° —~
wtat, and art,
BITUT,

83

f.

me.

by me.
to me.
Srom me.

we two.
us two.
by us two.

° a
gtTaztwt, and at, to us two.

QTIAT,

From us two.

siTqzat:, and at, of us two.

WIA:

PLURAL.
qa,
WaT, and @:,
sarta:,
aw, and =:,
THA,

Sara, and %,
ware,

an us two.

we.
US.

by us.

to Us.
from us.

of us.

nm Us.

ih
}
fol
ae
dk
tee |
eg
a}
3
Wy
read
i
iv
a
ue
qty
te
fel
(nl
]
i
hy
'
+h
}
1
i
tH]Nom.
Obj.
Inst.
Dat.
Abl.
Poss.

Loc.

Nom.
Obj.
Inst.
Dat.
Abl.
Poss.

Loc.

Nom.

Obj.
Inst.
Dat.
Abl.
Poss.

Loc.

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

[ PART II.

Uma, Thou.

SINGULAR.

e

“4,
eT, and @t,
aT,
ani, and 4,
aq, and a,
ara,

DUAL.
gat,
wat, and af,
azavat,

aay, and aft,

qanat,

avat:, and af,

aaqat:,

PLURAL,
CUE
aura, and q:,
amta:,
amy, and a,
aura, and 41,
quate,

thou.

thee.

by thee.

to thee.
from thee.
of thee.

an thee.

ye two.

you two.

by you two.

to you two.
from you two.
of you two.
wn you two.

ye or You.
you. :
by you.

tO you.

from you.
of you.

mn you.CHAP. 111. | ETYMOLOGY. 85

At the beginning of a sentence or poetical verse, in
connection with ¥ und, a or, Ta indeed, & clearly, at
ah! or a verb meaning fo see, used in another sense,
and when preceded by a vocative case unconnected
with another word, the contracted forms are not used.
In clauses that are supplementary or inferential, the
contracted forms alone are employed. In all other

cases either form may be used.

ax, He, she, it, &e.

SINGULAR.

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
N. a at aT
O. a at wT
if aa aat aa
D wal aa aa
A. aata Aa: TaTT
P. ag qa ag
L. afar aut ata

DUAL.
ed ee
I.D. A. arvat avat arat

Peli... eee aat: dat:86

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

PLURAL.
Masculine. Feminine.
N.a at
O. ata aT:
l. &: * -catfar:
D. az: ana
A. ay: ary:
P. aut atat
L, Wy wy
Tita SapaeEeREI
SECTION II.

[PART II.

Neuter.

ara
arta

ay yap

OF THE RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE

PRONOUNS.

az, who, that, or which, is a Relative, and

fa, who? or what ? is an Interrogative Pro-
They are inflected like aq, except
in the first two cases; as,

noun.CHAP. 11. | ETYMOLOGY. 87

ax, who, that, or which.

 

SINGULAR,
Masculine, Feminine. Neuter.
NY <i at aT
QO. Ft at aa
he at zat aa
~ =~
D we Bay qa
A. @qeata Tae: TATA
Pp war Ia: ay
lL afaa = aart afar
DUAL.
N.0. 3 z z
I. D. A, arut aTeyt avar
P. 1s.’ |, eee Gat: Gate
PLURAL.
N. zy ie afta
O qT ati als
I. ae afar ae
D. eeu: Bays Sam:
A, Saw: Ay: IG:
P, at Tet aut
e

&
24
#)
es88 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART It.
SiNGULAR.

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
N ait “aT fa
O ai AL ta
I. Ray HAT RA

can =~ =
D. Ae HQ RG
A TATA RIT: RATT
P RR RIT: RU
L Riel Tt ata
DUAL;
Nag. “ar a x
I, D. A. anat Hat Kat
Pi. mat aT: RAT
PLURAL.
N. a AL: al fat
O. ATT AT! ata
= “ —

I. R Alla ais
D. qru: HEY Aly:
A. ay RI: ay
P. AAT AAT KUT
L. aa ATT ay~~

CHAP. III. | ETYMOLOGY. 9

SECTION III.

OF THE

ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.

Adjective Pronouns partake of the proper-
ties both of Pronouns and Adjectives, and |
may be sub-divided into five sorts: viz. the
Possessive, the Reciprocal, the Distributive,
the Demonstrative, and the Indefinite.

Ist. The Possessive are principally form-
ed from the Personal Pronouns; as, HeTy,
AAR, ATARTA, mine; wats, alaN, aiqata,
thine ; ata, his, hers, its ; Brera, Bprntata,
ours; Ata, Arawata, yours; @, wa, Vta,
own; aaata, selfs. They are inflected like
ZH; as, Hate, Hata, aatad, &c.

2nd. The Reciprocal aaa, self, is declined
like stwa; as, Nom. aaa, aqat, ara, &c.

3rd. The Distributive are waa, each ;
Tag, every ; Talay, one another ; QCQe,
each other ; which are inflected like wu.

When every means the whole collectively, rather

than the parts distributively, aaq is used.90 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

4th. The Demonstrative are Z<a, TIE;
this, and yaa, that, which are declined

thus :——
Eau, this.
SINGULAR.
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.

N. we Bz ze

O. xa zat XE

I. aay THAT Raq

D Fa way ai

A. Fa BIT Sat

2. BY BRIT Ta

L. safe. zat aay
| . DUAL.

N.O. <at ta =i
. I. D. A. aTeat Brut Brat
P. L. - seat: HAI: Waa
PLURAL.
| NH at: zatia
O. <a Zar zarfa

L. ata: ate: ute:
D. ER: BD: Uy!
A. ay: Bw: Tw
" P. Tut arat rut
. | L. wy We uyCHAP. IIL. | ETYMOLOGY. 91

 

waa, this.
SINGULAR.

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
N. Za: Tar wag
O. jx, ct = cat, Tai ray
13 Lat, LH WaT, wag Uaa, wea
Deo . tam waa Uae
A. rasa Laat: Casa
Pp cag Cag: zag
L. zataat zaat watt

DUAL.
N, rat ua ua
O. wal, Tats wa, wa ud, Ta
I. D.A. Tava Laat TAT
PL. Gaal: CaM: Vat:, Laat: Waat:, Tea
PLURAL...
N. aa war: zaita
O. CaM, Tal TAT, TAT? Waist
I. za: waite: wa:
D. Wary: wale: way:
A. wary: ware: wa:
P, zaut warat Rarai
L. waa zag zag
The last of the two forms in the Obj, and Inst. cases

 

 

is commonly used in the consecutive clauses of a sen-

tence.92 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

HAE, that.
SINGULAR.
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter:
x a
N. SAT TAT BE
O. We Be We:
ik Haat WAT erat
D gan 6 yraT sa
A. FANT WAST: THAT
?. WHY HART: THT
L. sata 8 waayt wate
DUAL,
Ne. ae Sa SA
LDA. SRat | Wa wat
PL saat | Rat waa:
PLURAL.
N. wat wa: wats
0 WR Fa orate
I. Bata: sarH: wate:
D. Wate: Wa: Sate:
A. Say: = - ayy: Wate:
P. satet = - rat satat
L.

wig wy ityCHAP. I.] ©» ETYMOLOGY: 93

 

oth.—The Indefinite are numerous : those
ending with % are declinedlike wa, all; thus,

 

 

SINGULAR,

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
N. Wed: wat aa
O. aeq wait aa
I. aaw AaaIt aaqw
D. aaa aaa Ware
A. qaqa waa: WaT
P. Tay WaT: wae
lis Gata wai wafer

DUAL.
N.O. wart Gal ae
LD. A. aaa aanut dart
O.L. wat: aaa: aaa
PLURAL.

N. wa wat: weatfar
O. weal agi! weattar
I. ai wart: aed:
D. aeaqy: Taney: Bay:
A. aa: BaqT: aay:
P. aaat Wala aarat
i, Tay wats aay94 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IT:

ara, as many; Wat, so many ; fara, how
peck or much? are declined like atae.
EE, UAE, and wee, such, are like TUT,
except in the feminine: as, ESA, sant, $55.
afa, as many as; afd, so many as; ee,
how many ? are inflected like Nouns ending
with x, but are used in the,plural number
only. So afafaa, certain persons. fafaa
or fasa, some one, 1s declined like fa, with
faq or wr added according to the Rules of
Permutation; as, afaa, arfaa, fafaa, ge.
Thus also faufa,any one; as, atfa or Atsfz,
atta, faafa, &c. Thus also qaq, who-
ever; aS, Ga, Gat, Faz; andatafya, who-
soever ; as, @afaa, araifaa, afafed, sc.

The following words are declined like aa;
some of them are Adjectives, and some Ad-
jective Pronouns of the Indefinite kind :—

fasy, 3a, fan, all; Wa, one; "4, other, different.
ww and awa, both; but the former is used only in

the dual, and the latter only in the plural number.

avy, other; QaAT, EAT, other, different, and the com-
paratives and superlatives of fa, 7, and az, except that
in the first two cases of the neuter singular they
end with 4; as H°Y:, HUN, NAA.CHAP. III. | ETYMOLOGY. 95

<

ug, eastern, before; sat, northern, after; zie,
Southern, on the right; 3xat, lower, under; STAT*,
without and within, and yt, after, other ; Rut, behind,
another; sat, after, behind ; and 9, own:—but they
have two forms in the Abl. and Loc. cases singular
masculine and neuter, and in the Nom. case plural
° 3 a eS ‘ € ; an € 5 af
oo as, TAM, Or TaqMan; ved or Geqhera; Teal

or Yeqr:. ie

am, few; ae, half; afara, how many ? =H, all, ano-
ther; 94a, first; Ata, last; Ha or fara, second; =z,
fana, third ; —but have two forms in the Nom. case of
the masculine plural; as, M& or e:, &c.

Adjectives ending with #a@ have two forms in the
Dat. Abl. and Loc. cases singular; as, fedta, thesecond;
fear or fadtaa, feaary or farted, fatiara or fai-

=~ .
wey, &e.

If any of the above words are used in a sense differ-
ent from that affixed to them, in composition with other
words, or in connection with an Instrumental case,
they must be inflected regularly like wx.

* If this word means without a house or town, it is regular
dike ya,

 

 

|
184
i!
let
NM
Wk
We t
Wa
Pay
ae
brand
tea
Ec FBR
baa
i
iain
i)
fai
it
WM
Hal
HY
Na
a
al
isan |
|
it
ay
hen
Weer
| ite
eee ih
i
way
i)
it
rats
ee;
|
i} saat
jae!)
ee a
i"
ihe
(f
Ht
{ 1
hil ee
sHR 4
1) ae
ta
10 ae
it
ul +
a
i ;far

a '

CirAr tm hs: Py,

OF THE VERBS.

 

SECTION I.

OF VERBS IN, GENERAL,

The Verbs aré simple roots, which gene-
rally consist of two‘ or three letters, and
which are never used without the addition of
some inflection. The roots have no charac-
teristic signs in themselves, but have certain
characteristic letters affixed to them, which
shew to what conjugation they belong; and
in What manner.they must be: inflected.

Verbs. are of. two..kinds, Primitive..and
Derivative.

Of the Primitive, there.are three sorts; the
Common, the Active, and the Deponent: The
first. of these 1s known by the characteristicCHAP. IY. | ETYMOLOGY. 97

letter =, the last by =, and the middle one by
the absence of both. Of the Derivatives
there are four sorts ; the Causal, the Opta-
fwe, the Frequentative, and the Nominal.
The first three. of these are formed from
primitive roots, and the last one is formed
from nouns, &c.

Every verb may also be: considered as
Transitive or Intransitive, Regular or Irre-
gular, Anomalous or Defective.

All verbs signifying to. move, may also
signify ¢e arrive at, acquire, or obtain; hence
they are sometimes Transitive and some-
times Intransitive,

we, be; x, do; and 4, be, arecused as.
Auxiliaries ;_ the former is defective; and the
latter two are irregular, in some of their parts.

To Verbs belong Conjugation, Voice;
Mood, Tense, Number, and Person.

There are ten Conjugations of verbs.
The first Conjugation is distinguished by its
having no characteristic letter; the second
by the letter #; the third by fa; the
fourth by 4; the: fifth by a; the sixth by
x; the seventh by y; theeighth by <; the

Ae
* *
o%
New! eg
ie few

Bi ; i
rH i } |
* Ae a
ime, ie { Hy
te = oe ss r + 4
Re ee ik { ‘
Wa | Beet
th ein

$

   

 

 

Se EE ee —
Se eee ee Sea
SS a ee ee
re ae ee Oe ey ee ee

ee
ag a
es are

PT
eee te et98° SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

ninth by x; and the tenth by a. fa denotes
that the root may be either of the first or
tenth conjugation. When two of the above
letters are attached to one root, they imply
that it belongs to both the’ conjugations
which they characterize.

The Conjugations differ from each other
only in the present tense of the Indicative
mood and its formatives, viz. the Imperfect
tense, and the Imperative and Potential
moods. The tenth conjugation forms ’an
exception.

The preceding characteristic letters are ap-
plied only to Primitive Verbs ; the Deriva-
tives are of the first, third, or tenthoconju-
gation.

The Voices are three; the Active, the
Middle, and the Passive.

Common verbs, verbs of the tenth conju-
gation, and Causals, are conjugated in the
Active and Middle voices: in the Active,
when the action of the verb, or the etlect
produced by it, has a more particular refer-
ence to the object which the verb governs ;
in the Middle, when it has a more particularCHAP. IV, | ETYMOLOGY. 99

reference to the agent, with which the verb
agrees. As, atafa, he asks; atad, he asks
on his own account.

Active verbs are conjugated only in the
Active voice.

Deponent verbs, with an Active significa-
tion, .are conjugated only in the Middle
voice. ii ame

Verbs of. the tenth conjugation ending
with 3, also Optative, Frequentative, and
Nominal Verbs, are not regular; some of
them being conjugated in the Active voice,
some in the Middle, and others in both.

Any. verb. may be..used in the Passive
‘voice. |

The Moods are six; the Indicative, the
Imperative, the Potential, the Precative,
the Subjunctive, and the Infinitive.
.ooThe Indicative has_six Tenses, the Present,
the Imperfect,,the. Perfect,,the first and se-
cond-Futures, and the Indefinite. - :

Phe “Present tense is: used to represent
what is now passing ;vas, arata, Ae asks or 1s
asking. 3 > toordc100 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. _ [ PART: Il

The Imperfect tense represents what trans-
pired in some part of the preceding day;:as,
watad, he asked (yesterday. ) |

The Perfect or Past alludes to what was
done at a very remote period ; as, gata, he
asked (long ago.)

The First, Future or Future Definite inti-
mates what will take place on the morrow;
as, otfaat, he will ask (to-morrow.)

The Second Future or Future Indefinite
expresses what will be, without signifying
the precise time. when; as, atfaafa, he will
ask, (sometime or other.)

The Indefinite or Aorist. represents: what
transpired between a period not very remote=
ly past and the present, but leaves it indefi-
nite when; as, watita, he has asked, or did
ask. ;

Lhe Imperfect, the Perfect, and the Indefj-

nite are very commonly used indiscriminately
the one for the other,

The Imperative, Potential, Precative, Sub-
junctive, and the Infinitive moods, are used

not so much to represent the precise time,
as the particular manner of any action.orCHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 101

event; the first two usually refer to present,
and the last three to future time.

The Numbers are three, the Singular, the.
Dual, and the Plural; as,.atafa; che aske :
arad:, they two ask; arate, they ask.

In each. number’ there are three Persons,
as, gutta, he asks; arate, thou askest ;
aratta, Lask, &e,.. The third person is al-
ways placed first, because it is the most sim-
ple in its inflections,

 

SS

The following rules are designed to exhi-
bit the changes that take place in the final
letters:of\ Verbal roots when inflected -—

RULES OF PERMUTATION.

==
RULE I,
Verbs beginning with zw, ¥, ZT, S, w, in the

list of roots, change them to 7,0, a, &, &
when they are inflected: thus,

3

= .
Go 4 Fa oo ae Sta he praises.

ZD

y + Sfa = gia, he aims.
waa, he stands like a post.

~

Cf +
os

!102 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. __ [PART II.

— ara, he will stand.

+ AT
1 fa = atfa, he bathes.

q 9

1 WR, FO § ®, collect ; and fea, spit, are exceptions.
2, a when preceded by a preposition ending with %,
and @ when preceded by one ending with £—R, are
again changed to their original form ; as, yarfa, fast.

— ii

RULE Ul.

g followed by # or = becomes gt; but fol-
lowed by = or a diphthong is dropped. Bt
followed by a vowel is dropped ; but the at
of an affix or reduplicated root, followed by a
consonant, becomes *; where goon* is not
required. As,

| | amy + fa — atatfa, L ask.

| ava + afta = arafa, they ask.

i aqjut, afa = atuha, they sell.

) RTA + a: = miata: they two sell.
HSI + F — swra, doyeabandon.

1. Simple roots ending with #1 do not drop the ST
i in the Present tense; as, al + Sfa=alfea, they measure.

) * The rules for the different conjugations and the formation
ie of the tenses, will shew in what instances goon is necessary.CHAP: IV. |]  .97,)EPYMOLOGY........ 103

RULE. I.

x-—az if penultimate, and followed by @ or
x, must be long. If finals of monosyllables

and preceded. by a ‘single “consonant; or of

words having more than one syllable and
preceded by a double consonant, they be-
come Fa, Sa, HE; but if finals of ~vords
having more than one syllable and preceded
by a single consonant, they become 4 4,
Ts; when. a vowel follows, and goon is not
required: as, ,

|

feqicr . aa ajata,, he.plays.

|

ad 4 spf faata, they shine:

:

fufa Sa  Taeterat, they served.

|

cq + wfia
feat + =
aq ‘SF NS:

mata, they are able.

3s

Pal he took.
“GTS they did.

|

1, The vowéls are not long before @-or © im the re-
duplication of the verbs ;_as, RIG, he was angry.

2 There are two. forms in. the Future, when FE Is
changed to & BIT 5 a8 Y. pass over ; aftat and aya.

3, 3, Hi, and zr, if the finals ‘of ‘roots and not of
affixes, become Sq and aT in every instance when a

vowel follows, and goon 1s wat required; as, + ya

ae104. SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

= asfa, they praise. AA + Tt =— WS, they wyured.
SR + Si = WAR, they injured,
4. If a ora follow the = of an affix, there are two
forms; as, fa + H = Wa: or Vi, we aim.
a7» SH 4 ~~
—aiiio—.
RULE IV.

A short vowel becomes long, the 3 of a
single consonant becomes fz, and of a dou-
ble one #z, when @ follows A final =,
where goon is not required, becomes Sz;
but if a labial precedes, Be. AS,

~~ aaa ae oN e °
fa +. aad = wtaa, it ts collected
XT aa = fsa it ts done.

ob

a Sa = WNT, may be spread.

+ ote = atara, may he pass over.
\ N *

oe UR. Cc geelety.

o~
]. In the Potential mood the vowel is not changed
before 4; as, fayare, he may nourish,
——e Ee
RULE V.
A final letter of the @ class becomes Ti+ Tow
a final wor x, also the finals of CIs, UTS,

f, ” e ST 2 Sa © ASST ate T° =
SHINE ; BR, worship ; ax, walk; e 3, create ;CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 105

za, cleanse; 78, cut; wa, bake; become
wz, when followed by a—ae; anda, 7, a, =,
©, X ory united with a, make &; as,

qa + fa = afm, he speaks. —

we + AT = Ber, he will interrogate.

wet + & = A, destroyed.

qa + ofa = aqafa, he will speak.

ae + fa = afa, thou tastest.

qx + fa = aha, thou desirest.

1. @& followed by S—® becomes q, when goon is
not required; as, WPA = Way, whence yayafn, he
questions.

2. @ when final becomes @ or =, and = becomes =
as He or SHS; he cleansed.

3. %q may become S after E—3U; as, HATS or
sified, ye have made haste.

> —~ ir

RULE VI.

=—a, if followed by y—e, when goon is
not admitted, are dropped. Roots with the
characteristic’ = imsert # throughout. A pe-
nultimate 2, followed by a letter which does
not require goon; also & and @ when penul-106 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

   
   
    
   
   
   
  
   
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
   
    

timate and followed by a—a or _; are
dropped. As,

|

TH 11.
tra—z 4 Sal
ay + ATR

Td, gone.
fefeat, he will injure.

|

|

ama, may he churn.

Wal + Qa = WW, he speaks.
qq + A = aa, drowned.

1. #3, meaning honour, and TA, preserve, do not
drop their penultimate letters.

2. 4 followed by 4 or 4 becomes 4; followed by a
has two forms. As, FAA + AW = HAA, gone. SAA,
+4 = STA, HIT, having come.

3. The penultimate 4 has two forms in the Perfect
tense, where goon is not admitted: as, wad, AAG:
or AAUG:, AHA or HAY, &c.

4. Verbs in the Middle voice, and reduplicated ones
in the Active, drop the penultimate 4 of the termination
#17, when # does not precede; as, faa+ Ra = Sar,
they envy; fay + far = farfa, they nourish.

o. If two a’s come together, the one in the root is
i dropped ; as, HX, with + inserted and fq added, makes
! safa, Ae manifests. In all other cases the q and q
| are made to correspond with the following letter; as,
ey, gratify, aaa ; AG, wmmerse, assifa, &c.CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 107

RULE VII.

q and q, followed by any consonant ex-
cept q, are dropped. The final a of a double
letter is also dropped, and a followed by a
or becomes a, except in the Present tense
and its formatives. = followed by w has two
forms. As,

8
MIT + AT = arat,§§ he will increase.
wa oo, aft = awinfa, he does or injures.
eq + xafa = efiafa, he will envy.

~

Te 5 Ufa = gata, he will dwell.

~

wate + fy = watt or wate, shine
thou, and yaata, he did shine.

1. @ followed by s—w becomes &, when goon is
SS
not required; as, fey +4 = Bai, spit.

== ie.

RULE VIII. Pie
= followed by e—e becomes & ;_ but 9,
if. = precedes. Lio, Sy ye precede y—x,
when followed by a, 4, or _, theybecome
aspirates. —g, UG, ¥U, 4, followed by @ or 4,
become unaspirated, and the # or w becomes

y./ As, oe108 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Il.

faz, u. fa’ = afb, he licks.
Bg ig ORS 1 burned.
1, $ , ufa= arate, he will hide.
= Sh te Meet a atta, thou milkest.
ay, + fa = wufa, he shuts up.
ae, + @ = ae, .covelad.

1. When 4 or @ comes in contact with %, it is drop-
~

ped, and the preceding vowel if short becomes long;
as, RE SG + 1 = Ws, planted. A penultimate is not
lengthened ; as, % @ + A = G, impured.

9. When three consonants of the same class come
; Oa e e SN
in contact, the middle one is dropped; as, Gq + A=

‘

Eri, he plays; ca + A = EA, he enlightens or kindles.
EEE RRR ERT 7
SECTION II.
OF THE CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
7 ae
FIRST CONJUGATION.
| The first Conjugation is formed by remov -
ing the final, and adding the different ter-
minations. The removal of . is equivalent

; to the insertion of ¥. A final ©, &, or & is
ee changed to Hq; Jor BWto wa; € or ¥ toCHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 109

az, and & to wg, previous to adding the in-
flections. X, 3, 3, if penultimate and fol-
lowed by a single consonant, require goon: as,

Singular, Dual. Plural.
fa, conquer.Present safa saa: wafer

4, Vea isan ae eee. BATA BTar Warlet
zu, move........... atta ara: arte
alc OPI... . OB: ..e. Bala Bra: Waleay
it, SOS a. = ig .. wafa wera: aaa
Tid, BOW. tn, We data waa: wate
Bet, PENCCINIe.. ... u areata aqtya: arahe

wu, move or creep. aura aqua: wate
=i
The principal tenses in the formation of
Verbs are the Present, the Perfect, and the
Ist Future.

Root qTyI—H, ask, request.

Present atafa, Perfect gata, Future atfaat.
—< >
PARADIGM OF THE ACTIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE,
He asks or is asking.

SINGULAR.

3. arata, he asks.
9. arate, thou askest.

1. waratfz, T ask.110 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART If,

DUAL.

3. araa:, — they two ask.

2. arama, ye two ask.

1. .arata:, we two ask.
PLURAL.

3. atafa, they ask.

2. arr,  yeoryouask.

l. arata:, © weask.

IMPERFECT TENSE.

He did ask, &c.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. WaTaa, TATAAT TATT
. Tara: WaATaa FATT
1 yard FIAT TATA
PERFECT TENSE,
He asked.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3 aaa TaTag: TAT:
Tart sey TaTa U: Tata
Tara aqatasy qatar

FIRST FUTURE TENSE.

He shall or will ask.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
afar aba ater aif are:
afaata aifaary: afaany

1. wftrate atqara: aifeate:CHAP. IV. ] ETYMOLOGY. . lll

SECOND FUTURE.

He shall or will ask.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

atrata attaaya: attaaia
9, azifwata aifaary: ataayry
1. Wane aifaaqra: aha aq:

. INDEFINITE,
He asked or has asked.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

3, warate safest satay:
, Sarat: Watas qwatay -

lL water waiaey wattan

 

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Let him ask.

Singular, Dual, Plural,
3. awa arant Maa
2, ara aad aaa
lL. arnt aaa Tala

POTENTIAL MOOD.
He may, can, might, could, would, or should ask.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

3 Ta araat aaa:
Ta: aad Tag

1, atae aaa aaa112 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

PRECATIVE MOOD.
May he ask.

Singular. Dual. Plural,
3. marae STIL RAT SST
2. art ATA TIA
lL ana MATT GYR

SUBJUNCTIVE’ MOOD.
Should he ask.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. wataarg wataarat waaay,
2, . garlaer: zataag Wataaa
1,- watfast waaay Zafar

INFINITIVE MOOD.
atfad, fo ask,
PARTICIPLES.

Present, atawa, asking. Nom. aaa, ata,
ataa, &c. Continuative ataaqta.

Perfect, qatqe, asked. Nom. @arata,
qareat, Tata, Se.
Second Fut. atfawae, about to ask. Nom.

ofa, afaeadt, ata.

Indefinite, atfaara, asked or having asked.
Nom. attaaata, afearat, ataara. Indecli-
nable, atfaat. Continuative, atfaarattaat.cHaP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY.

bo

INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.

He asks for himseif, &c.

Singular, Dual.
aaa aaa
aaa aay
aa TAS

iMPERFECT TENSE.

He did ask for himself.

Singular, Dual.
TATA satuat
HAITI yaraut
HAUS waar |S
| PERFECT.
He asked for himself.
Singular. Dual.
Tata TAA
awaited TITATS
yoy qafaae

FIRST FOTURE.

He shall or will ask for himself.

Singular. Dual.
aaa afaatet
qa ataqarara

mare ata €

113

PARADIGM OF THE MIDDLE VOICE.

Plural.
ATA
Tae
TATHS

QaTae
WITAATS

Plural.
Tata
qatiaes or |
qatae

Plural.
aifaarz:
aaa
arthaqares\14 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Il.

SECOND. FUTURE.

He shall or will ask for himself.

Singular. Dual. Plural..
3. afaad areata atkaertt
2. aitares ataedr abaya
1. atfaar afaana se ataeyTa eS
INDEFINITE.
He asked or did ask for himself.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. Bute wailagrat yataaa

2. sakes satfaarat Wattayw For<”
1. sattaty aotouate yatante

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Let him ask for himself.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. arwat araat araaat
Taq grav ara
~ > s
1. ata Talay S TIVAS

POTENTIAL MOOD.
Fe may, can, might, could, or should ask for

~ himself.
Singular, Dual. Plural.
3. aaa maarat MILA
2 awa aragrat aaa

1. ara araate aaaCHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY, ~~ > 115

PRECATIVE MOOD.
May he ask for himself.

Singular. Dual. Plural,
3. atfaete atatarat  atfca
2. ofeitet aaatarat attaeteq” ory
1. arfaute afaatats aifadiaty

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Should he ask for himself.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. Batwa gatfeeat «= atta
2 safer:  safeerat = warfare
1. snfy satwaut safer

INFINITIVE MOOD.
atfad, to ask for himself.
PARTICIPLES,

Present, araata, asking, §c. Nom. araare:,
Agata, aTaata, dc.

Perfect, aatata, asked, &c. declined like
the Present.

Second Future, atfwaata, about to ask,
&c. declined like the Present.

Indefinite, atfaara and utfaet, like the |
Active. Continuative, attaat qrqet.1i6 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART I.

Active and Deponent Verbs are included
under the rules for the Common ones; the
former being inflected like the Active, and
the latter like the Middle voice, according to
the Conjugations to which they belong: as,
=, drink; Present wate, Perfect ut, Fut.
atat. a—zs, nourish; Present <ad, Per-
fect <2, Future atat. aH eal ; Present wata,
Perfect aura, Fut. staat. wre—z, speak ;
Pres. aaa, Perfect ata, Future attra.
wy, grieve; Present “Tafa, Perfect grr,
Future Stfrat. zta—e, be; Present, TAs
Perfect za, Future afaat.

 

PARADIGM OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.

He is asked.

Singular. Dual. Plural,

arya Tat Tiaed
2. «ara ares are

=~ ies =
1. . aa MATS Tia S

IMPERFECT TENSE,
He was asked.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3.0 > ara Mara ai QI
2. SaryUr: WIT at HATA
1 | oase Saas WIryratreCHAP,1IV.] ETYMOLOGY. 117

PERFECT TENSE.

He was asked.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
qaqa GIA a qaiae
aatae TACT qattad or F
aaa aaa ze antag

FIRST FUTURE TENSE,

ffe shall or will be asked.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
afaat aifvaret atfaare:
aitaare aifarat F aifaated
aifaare qa? ~— afrarae

SECOND FUTURE TENSE.

He shall or will be asked.

Singular, Dual. Plural.
afaad aifaae ai faeqet
atfaare aha 7 afaard
aifaqe aifaata qian

INDEFINITE.

He has been or was asked. ~

Singular. Dual. Plural.
garta sataarat Qa aya
gatas wataarat waa, Y orgs

wortata wafaate aarants118

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Let him ask.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
areayat araat MAT
maz qrayut areay”

= =—~ =
Te qialte TAAT

POTENTIAL MOOD.

He may, can, might, could or should be asked.

to

bo

e
‘es

peed = BSD

Singular. Paar Plural.
Tag amaarat MATT
VI araarat Maa
Tiss aaaty naate

PRECATIVE MOOD.
May he be asked.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
arate ataqarat = aitwatca

attaatsr: afar:  afatha, or F
afauta afnate  aifaitate

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Should he be asked.

Singular. Dual, Plural.
yaaa aaifaat 8 waa
gnfaya wsafeat safer
saa gaffe wafaarate

INFINITIVE MOOD.
aifaa, to be asked.CHAP.. IV. } ETYMOLOGY, - 119

PARTICIPLES,
Present, ataata, heing asked. N. araata,
TIAA, AHH. Present reflective, arafaa,
asking himself, declined like the preceding.

Perfect, qarara, being asked, declined like
the Present.

First Future, atfaaa, aaa, ary, ought
to be asked: declined like the above.

Second Future, areata, about to be ask-
ed, declined like the above.

Indefinite, atfaa, asked. Nom. aitaa:,
araat, athrd.120 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART IR.

©

4
g , ter
2 fs bg ee
et irs
eS _ B o~ Ge
r iO
: 109
: au e Pet
E >
: z
: ae. | E
: oo

Precative
GUaTa

I. ACTIVE.

ata,

ive. Potential.

Imperative
Gad
DP

SYNOPSIS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.
Indicative.

. arate

yaaa
Gate
Ait aar

. ataafta
warata

Ist Fut.. hi
90 Put... .
Tamer, i. 4:

Present,
Imperf.. ..
Perfect,CHAP. IY, | ETYMOLOGY. _ 12]

Participles.
aqifaqara

Z :

3 9
= a 2 oe 4
— pacg
o re
Be ad :
= golds sty cnt ty I eae
O 2 i
Oat i.
oo a
eee ee rs. fl eee |
m1 Sioa Ke
= eh
er ae
4: i pt ae tap
S Sie th ie ee a a
2 ao
S EB Poa Oy Fs f
am
Dn s

ig Ee
= Bae ie ae

1 Fut. afar

2 Fut. ataea
yaray

Pres,
Imp.
Perf.
Ind.122 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Il. |

ATaaATw
attaa

Participles
ATYATA, Atal aa

Infinitive
aifaa
rob
Ea

7
©)
-
:
— ¢ E
= 3 fe
5 Bb lebron deri E
Oo = 2
> Yoana =
boy. diyillad p
ey eiaate lt cle Be Bud
I i
a
6) a
Se ae ee
| oe i | ee a eee a
, O Se
| D ea
| F SR aehriaal
= 3
OC .
Z :
7 tc
) o ef]
Le hy Ati dood
| ee ee ae
che a
| ms Be assim
, G ret ori ape = oe
Gt Feige On =
ti Co. a ee ee ONCHAP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 123

The Passive voice of every verb in each
conjugation is formed in the same manner
as the preceding.

The Passive voice is sometimes used in a
reflective sense; as, Tat faa, the elephant
waters himself; wafaa: awa:, the rice cooks
or borls itself.

The third person singular of the Passive
is sometimes used impersonally; as, We AAT,
at zs existed by thee, i. e. thou existest. A
Passive participle with the Auxiliary verb
expressed or understood, is frequently used
in preference tothe Passive Voice; as, watfe,
he is gone; taicfa, thou oughtest to he
killed; 3a, it is said.

The following verbsof the first conjugation
are irregular in the Present tense and its
formatives :—

SIaa, sip, makes Sraafa; wR, go, SaRit ; HA,
step, Alafia; |, smell, fagfr ; Ta, bite, Aft; Tr,
give, aain; wal, kindle, anfa; wm, drink, faafa; ar,
mind, AAA 3 aa, cease, Ria; {a—™%, colour, Tafa,
Taq; NT, move, Wrafa; at, be sad, We fa; uF, unite,
war; War—s, embrace, WHA; Br, stand, frsfa.124 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART If.

{a1 used in a reflective’ sense, makes tsaft or {3a4.
ms
° oS e.: é
In the Passive 21, UT, Bf, §—S> nourish ; a, drink ;
= ite ek ae RQ. a :
q7—w, exchange; sand %, sound ; i, sing; %, purr-
oa ° € <
fy 3 4, waste, change their finals to €; as, Tay, Hlaa, .
ala.
There are no verbs of this conjugation ending with &,
&
a ° °
q, or St; and only one, a deponent, ending with Si; as,
a—s, resolve ; Pres. saan, &e.

The primitive verbs of this conjugation
are about one thousand.

=a

Asthe Present tense and its formatives
are the parts which particularly distinguish
the verbs of one conjugation from those of
another, they alone will now be given in
full, and the rest will be supplied by the
Synopsis.

For the method of inflecting any part
of the verb found in the Synopsis, see the
Formation of the Tenses.

eeren er SS

“.cHaP. Iv. | . ETYMOLOGY. 125

SECOND CONJUGATION.

The second Conjugation has all the ter-
minations united immediately with the root
according to the rules of Permutation.

A penultimate vowel requires goon, as in
the first conjugation. —

A final vowel requires goon, excepting Ss,
which requires uvrzddhy.

It is only in the singular of the Present
and Imperfect ?.in the third singular of the
Imperative Active ; and in the first singular
dual and plural of the Imperative Active and
Middle, that goon or vriddhy is required.

3 Roots with the characteristic @imsert =
before a consonant, and have two forms in
the third singular of the Imperfect.

Verbs with a final #1, and fea—a, 5, St,
envy, have two forms in the third plural of
the Imperfect.126 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

Roots with the characteristic m-being-eon-
sidered as reduplicated, are inflected like the
third conjugation. As,

Singular. Dual. : Plural.
aI—a, preserve; Pr. atta uta: = aif
Imp. 3rd pl. guta or HT.

at, shine, §c. ata ata: faata
iol gl . 2. - a
wa, praise, atta aa: 9 aatey

faz—a, 4, taste, lick, fo ate: faeta
Mid. wate fawa fase

Se—a, SH, milk, arts ewe: euta
Mid. <7 ult Sea
RIT, HF, weep, <tfafa een: water

Imp. 3rd sing. Huta or FIteta

ATs-—at, HH, awake, aIntd sausa: wroteCHAP. IV. |

oe

ETYMOLOGY.

ACTIVE VOICE.

127

INDICATIVE. MOOD.

Singular.

ate
afa
efa

Singular.

We EZ
Hee
wey

Singular.
a2
tat

4 uita

Singular.

feara
fear
frat

PRESENT TENSE.

Dual,

IMPERFECT TENSE.

Dual.

afest
afes
aaa

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Dual.

qq

POTENTIAL MOOD.

Dual.
feutat
feud
fe aq

Plural.
featea
fas
fcr:

Plural.

afeua, aiea:
afte
afen

Plural.
ferry
fez

ama

Plural.

:
Czar:
 ]

fara
feaa128 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. _ [PART'II.

MIDDLE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. fe fauta feud
9. fea faaia faz
n. tee fea farg
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. wes afaarat wfaaa
2, Breer afearat aiteg
1. wate yfeate aieute
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
a leat featat fegat
fra feurat fs
1 rea Sate Sua
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. fata fautarat fade
.  feate feataret feuty
l. fama fattate fectatyCHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY, ' 499

qaq

Participles.
teteqa
fasaqa, feer

 

| hen
¥ Sat lets | e an
- $
‘a

Sl é
2 Bg feds of owcbactfiaan y

Ss
aoe 15
eat 3 | |
© Nes = / e iy
e N 2 | | Hy
fx © A | Mi
es y i
ea] ont i
an eel : le’
Be est Ee |
OS é 4
D sop v4
g 3 i’ i
, g cto Hi

Bee Fe i

Pres.

Imp.

Perf

Ist Fut. Set
2d Fut. =
Indef.130 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

P be
eo 0) See
Ss) tee ee
6 2 Gus 7
PoE. Y Soy eee
= _« qo oe
< Bec: ip? iy
o St) ah ie
= ‘3
oe. E a.
> |. dome tree 1
YQ fa G—~ red
= rl Be
ey Cot a
7 ® SD
eas i
So a8 BoA
Sia a | | | | | -
ma ™ < Boks
2 ge lie = Gee
Boe eed ee we 3
ee ig! ee
c -_ +»
> we ge
N S Le |
D ae. | e
S : bp aa
C4? tute bute
#4
y gt Xia eee
i <5 Snowe ee |CHAP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 131

In the 35rd person singular of the Imperfect, and in
the Ist persons of the Imperative, a final = requires
goon, and not vriddhy ; as, uv praise, saa; aafa,
aaa, aata. With the exception of the above persons,
a uyure, &® sound, and € praise, have two forms in
the active where goon is admitted ; as, aIfa aatfa, aH,
wafer.
rs—S, praise, and zq—s, rule, have € inserted,
when ¥ or ¥ follows; as, 3. zs, Esq, Feu. 2. = {su,
fsiy, efsea, &c. ra govern changes the #1 to £,
(except in the 3rd plural,) when goon is not admitted ;
as, Wife, fre, Weta, &c. 2nd singular of the Impera-
tive wife.

adt and Set, shine, and H bring forth, do not admit
of goon in the first persons of the Imperative. ete
and aat make eta and aaa, and at makes ayaa, in
the Passive.

There are about seventy Primitives of this

conjugation.

 

THIRD CONJUGATION.

The third Conjugation has the first syllable
of the root reduplicated, and the last united
with the different terminations as in the pre-
ceding conjugation. It has * for the redu-
plication of a, a short for a long vowel,:
ted %
5 ip

132 - SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR, [ PART II.

a smooth for a rough consonant, @ for #, and

= for =. A penultimate vowel requires goon,
except in the Ist pers. sing. of the Imperf.

and in the Ist persons of the Imperative. A

final vowel requires goon. In the 3d pers. “ “tt
plu. of the Imperfect, .alsothe final_vowel
requires goon, and the termination wa is
changed to s:.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
wi—fa, forsake. Pr. seifa seta: ETA
wi—tfa, fear. fafa fata: fafa
~—tfa, sacrifice. azifa sea. safe

 

u—fa, , nourish. fare faa: faufa
faq—fa, sound. faufe fefaz: fefaafa
ac—ta, make haste. aati Ta! aaqetfa
faa—tfa, know. faaafa futaaa: Pafarata
aie
ACTIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSB.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3 fautn faze: tqufa
9 faate faze: faze
LO tanta farra: fara:CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. | 133

IMPERFECT TENSE.

Singular. Dual, Plural.
3. «Aaa - afacrat afaue:
2, wafae: aise ater
l. ware ataara wtaya
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. fate tarat fara
. tayte fare faza
1. fasucifa face fanaa
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. fae fatarat fay:
.  farar farare faerare
1 fawat faatara faata
rs

MIDDLE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE,

Sing ular. Dual. Plural.
3. tata fauta faye
2. faaty faurd fais
Lo ty frre faay

IMPERFECT TENSE,

Singular, Dual. Plural.
3. sifaya atayrat uftqua

afeet an: afaura steer et

1. fate Bisa =e afauate134

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

Singular.
fatat
faq
é
SN
faac

Singular.
fauta
faztarar:
faula

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Dual.

fazutat
fazrat
feaciae

POTENTIAL MOOD.
Dual.

faetarat
fautarat
fautate

[ PART II.

Plural.
fazrat
faa

. =
fqucias

Plural.
tate,
fazter
tawtatsCHAP, IV. | ETYMOLOGY. - 135

Participles

— fava, HTCRICa
Ta
atcat_

oe

x

S

= Z | ors

a e [i ig eile? |

cS pad

<5

—_ 3

gti: ON Bie cur

at z

a a

iS fe oo

Ba Beier dig HE gaia |

ee ev

oc} | =

me te (Segoe

ETE

Fr °°

S Soi sreeatedecls mleelgoan

Se om “e9

N 5

2. : |

: a: | |

a =a Ee
ee as
[ewe ee §
: oss
Sgt me & B
oe ee RS136 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. ___[ PART II.

Participles
tauru
Fata

atcanrta

Z, 5
© : ony ;
Je dade a
22 - |
S : tc *
. gob de pilin bE Tetley
ei sa © ins
© 3 5
—*. oe ee by §
By dake 2119 =
eae 2 3 tee
= NH 8s FE
eal +. &
ayy
G Ss 3
bs Si ein doh ef oorgocl
O Shee :
MK é =
W =
= bol wd ae Pe
§
5 — be
Ie
:
ieee £8 5
oi: to oe e
eeCHAP. Iv. ] ETYMOLOGY. 137

Tas, purify ; Fi qi, separate ; and fay, surround; make
the reduplication by WT; as, aap, alam, afaafa, &e.

zi—fa, =, give, loses the 37 where a consonant
follows, and goon is not admitted ; as Present, @eifa,
eu, efi; Imperfect, ATA, AW, MTT! &e.
Imperative, TI, Tai, TTA; second sing. ee;
Potential, Fala, = aat, Tai, &c. Middle, eH, eet,
Ten. Imperf. BIA, ATTA, Meea, &c. Imperative
TU, Sarat, seal, &c. Potential, Tq. Passive stan.
= wi—fa, 3, hold; Active, eaufa, aw, zufa; Middle,
Uy, Tula, Tuy. Passive wlaw.

y—faa, fill, has two forms in the persons which do
not admit of goon; as fafa, fag: or Faust, faxfa
or fautfa, &c. at, measure, makes faalt, fama, faaa
&c. GI, move; frat, faura, Faas, &c. et, forsake,
makes in the 2d Imperative, suife a¥tfe and afefe.
Passive Man. <I, together with Wi, fear, admits of two
forms Where goon is not required; as 3d person dual

faeta: or fafa: &c. &, sacrifice, makes second

Imperative sefu.
There are about twenty verbs of this Con-

jugation.

Giants

Serre rake one

‘&

ith i
a
i }
|
ip :
}
if
1K
}
|
li i
aiata
Hast \
HE Ta
uu
a
Hoe
a
ia
We
oe
a
i (akg {
ied |
mt
18a
Fae
ia
ie
tae
1, it
aac
ae
a,
10) Bt
yee
Wa $
| tat :
#;
tf i i,t
yh
ioe
ie
4
}
i
1 te
t a
a |
i ai
vie
ioe
1h

wine ert

Saas

See apa138 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART It.

FOURTH CONJUGATION.

The fourth Conjugation has q united with
the root, after which it is inflected as a verb
of the first conjugation, except that a penul-
timate short vowel is not lengthened by goon.

Roots with a final Ht drop it in the Active
voice, and in the Passive changeit tox; those
with the characteristic #, change a penulti-

mate # to wT. AS,
Singular. Dual. Plural.

WU—Y,H, swear, curse. Pr. wafa waa: cata

fea—a, play....-.s2s-- erafa ctaa: ctafa

yaa, nourish, support. att yaa: Yat

Aria, destroy... eves afa wa afta
Pass. ata.

wa—a, a, be quiet..... wrta arn cata

 

ACTIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. wxnafla . RUT Ty a
nate Ly y: TMA

1. gait Liq LWA:CHAP. IV. |

ETYMOLOGY.

IMPERFECT TENSE.

139

 

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. Scare saurat FLIT
a yu HUAI
1. Bay FAUT FCA
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural,
cua muyat TUT
2. °° Uy way LUA
1 areata WUT UTA
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural. ue
5) rare gaat Rayy {
9: sre ind wiarg |
1 wu wag LUA it
MIDDLE VOICE. }
INDICATIVE MOOD. t
PRESENT TENSE. it
Singular. Dual. Plural. }
3. Nua wad Lua (
2 waa rae RUT -
1 Za Tyas LUAS Ne
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singuyar. Dual. Plural. i
3. Bea araat BLU a
AKA: angut FLIA ud
1. Wau gnuafe wuts140

tt XO

m1

Singular.

Wyai
TU
=

wy

Singular.

ua
IAT
Way

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Dual.
wwyat

Twat
aaa s
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Dual.
wwarat
CUgTrat
xwaty

[PART Ik:

Plural.
WUT
gt yea

CUA S

Plural.
LUCA
gua
aaateCHAP.’ IV. | ETYMOLOGY. | 14}

i : ay Be 4 c
mia rad F
a to’ ébe a
Be; E 4
a ade. oe

Subjunctive.
TUT,

Precative,

 

1

j
ik > ee
jaa Mare 2
i RY
jen Ae
246 at
ihe tae
bai) a
tileait
Mi
Wi
aaa!
Ht
i
Ha
%
ek j
tia
iat
ia
|
ed meee tt
Hai |
ci
ot
Ri
ia
My i
th
tt

Potential.
~
Rad

ee
aaa er ee.
tien BOR ES gs oe

aes

omy LY
Sere =

ass
ay

=

Imperative.
LAT

eit

~~

SYNOPSIS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION.
I.— ACTIVE.

oe

ep
ae Sl cae Ae

Indicative.
rafts
FATT

Perfect, wary
ist Fut. wat
2d Fut. rufa
Indef. suite

Pres.
Imp.142 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART I¥.

2 F Doe Mb ae E
2 oF i Ee f
ee 65d BF
ee
a : "9
= e | | | Ed | by
5 a Cc
= Ey
o ; EF
ee 2. ee ee ee
© 3 i =
ek =
Ee ON 3 &
Bye i bipny &
© (ic
a ie: eo oe
ees S
fo s B lite oh 4. oe
oO a
eis =
a S DR
© EE <
7, 3 ; Se
=
PQ
= te (
64
2 is fe 3
= Ee i a oe E
a, ae as
O S .
{oda Ss me SB
a = oie re Z
Pa pe met mtCHAP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 143

Ve be pleased, makes aata, Rams, Rafer.

There are about one hundred and _ thirty
Primitives of this Conjugation.

 

FIFTH CONJUGATION.

The fifth Conjugation has 4 united with
the root : the 3 of # admits of goon in the
same persons as verbs of the second conju-
gation, but a penultimate short vowel does

not admit of goon. AS,
Singular. Dual. ~ Plural.

q—a, 4, aim, guess. Pr. aatfa aaa: gata
g_a, 3, skreen, cover. zutfa gua: Zu
wa—a, beable... .. catia wage: waaia
au—a, boast......... sata, aya <yater
faa_=, live, move... fafa fugu toate
clea
ACTIVE VOICE.
INDICA TELLVE M O OBD.

PRESENT TENSE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. aatfa aaa: aut
20 «waite Gay: gaa
l. w@atia Bat, Ga qaa:, A:144

bo

bo

bo go

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.
IMPERFECT TENSE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
SAAT Tarai Faaq
Saat Wa ae waaa
WaAg GTW44, TAA Baan, TAA

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
Bare aaat gay
aa aaa aaa
aaata aaara aaaa

POTENTIAL MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural,
aaaeq aaarat wag:
aaa qaqa TAATA
aaat aaay qaqa

a ee
MIDDLE VOICE.
INDPOATIVG MOOD
PRESENT TENSE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
aad aaa aad
aa aay aa
aa qqre gare

IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
ward TaAaAat yaaa
Hea aT: FAAAt Waa
wats wa arate waaateCHAP. IV. |

Singular,
gaat
qa5
aaa

Singular,
aata
atarar:
wate

ETYMOLOGY. 145

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Dual. Plural,
qarat qaat
qatat aaa
aaa waaay

POTENTIAL MOOD.

Dual. Plural.
Satara aqatca
aatarat wate
aatats qztate146 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

~

Potential.
DD ~

Imperative
~
aeaTa
oD )

ony le
£12 oe Ob E,
es” ir ae Ee
S te’ 9 F
oe E ;
w 9
Zz, S hr
= ge ba
es < “ie /
S ok
‘ ¢
E : zg
cs cae. | ae ae
© = tc
-) Ke E
(
we yn «
— = z /
Se SS dee
(ae NY QO Fe
a
ad =
bens
Cry
©
2
m
. Ra
CS
4
=
'¢ 2p)

~
~

“~

{Indicative

Gq

os)
Waala

Perfect, @ata
Ist Fut. arat, afzat —
2d Fut. arate, atrata—
Indef. xardta

Pres.
ImpCHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 147

Ti TaATH

Participles.

gata
— Fiaara
aa

 

oe EY :
S a Tee B ee
po “
= s e ft Gz
= eer rrr 1) Geek ae
S a =
OQ fs) f az
mae: & ~
BG Ey Ley? poole 8 OR thine
a 7
pr é
=u ik R
Et BAe | | | | .
cre gee es ie
° A
w2 z @ eI
A z E, Pee Pe
Z, ee es
— eee eee ee
s ét = HES ieee
eo 2 Bt, e
= 2 ¢
+ + a
Phanieul er. Tite
Ey gets ERS
fee
AoE ea OS148 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. _ | PART II.

3—a, hear, makes quip, RUA, Tafa, Kc.
There are about forty Primitives of this

Conjugation.

SIXTH CONJUGATION.

The sixth Conjugation differs from the first
only in the following particulars: —

<-— final arerespectively changed to xq,
3a, XX; and goon is not admitted. In the
Middle voice 3 becomes fra.

Roots with the characteristic 7 insert a. |

A penultimate short vowel does not re-
quire goon. As,

ta—z, hold... Pr. faafa faaa: faafa

W-T, praise..... aafa sam: agta
q—a, swallow.....Ttxefa  faca: facta
Bo; S, dies... faaa fara faa

qa", y, liberate, wata fam: 6 6Fafay

q-%, 4H, pan... gefa gam actaa ae

ETYMOLOGY.

ACTIVE VOICE.

(em
a
eo)

INDICATIVE MOOD@.

Singular.
aafa
aata
aaa

~~

Singular.

Aa
Haz:
HIE

Singular.
od
qs
aartts

Singular.

aca

¢

se

My AY
Si,

6a] c

PRESENT TENSE.

Dual.

ZU

ee

4 ¢al

IMPERFECT TENSE.

Dual.
sazat
Bq
aay

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Dual.
gaat

qed
aaa

POTENTIAL MOOD.

Dual.
acat

cay Ap
a ‘a.

Plural.
aata
aqzy

wD

Plural.
FIeT
aaa
Waele

wD

Plural,
Izy
aad
aale

Plural.
au:

6a]

WY

a

cal
a
a150 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. . [PART II.

MIDDLE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. aaa aed aad
2. qaa aaa aaa
1. | ae qatqs aqatHe
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. waxed saat TAL
2. SaeaTe aq ut Waa
l. waz waate Bacrate
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. aan acat aqarit
axa qeut qa
a aaa ey aaTAe
POTENTIAL MOOD.
~ Singular. Dual. Plural.
a... eat acarat qecq
2, qe: qearat qa
l aaa acate qauteCHAP Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 151

 

 

hy
jew
’ cc E
2 ce | / ’
Ss Oe iy c a)
5 he fe
e by eS (ie
, Ie? 4
© 3 | | | tic |
poo |
=
<
= ic
2 = . | pare | 7 | eee I
A =
E :
m Sie nk,
te ay Ee’
re OS | 3c0et ayranpime |. |
CN x Oy [c?
ar
ee Ae ,
os he
= wv
S 2 fey | | | | |
wn
oh 2
4 = [o9
5 3 hy | | |
A. By
>
oD tc’
s hee. ha
2 tc oyry p- C iv
SC tp ao yc TNs, ae Se
a loo ei 16?) ie ae ie
Bie he yaa ie oS
= S o Be a oS
Pa et et162 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IT.

Participles
aan
wD
~
aaaa, &c

Infinitive
a
cea

Subjunctive.

Indefinite, Hatfe, &c.

7,

©

ae

=

<x

és

bd

7.

Oo

9g

Eo bos

fd Ltd Bion ba

2 ahs ? (ic

ca ea.

Ee _

: sii D

3 : ee ee

oN ; mes

pomexl e

TN - :

Z se de | Sheal oe
Pee es US wh

D a

Indicative
aad
HAST
qaqa

atTaea
Waa

~

Present,

Ist Fut. arat
2d Fut.
Indef.CHAP. IV. |] ETYMOLOGY. ~ 153

Zu—-Y, desire ; eR fr, ESET, FeR TAT, &ce. SAY, L fill;
IK, GR, TR, RAR, kill ; TAR, dispose in order : 3 qt,
aq, love ; Wa, Gini have two forms; thus, saufa
and saifa. TH, ask, and FY, cut, change the { to x;
as, velit, yen, wea. aafa, Tan, Fafa. Passive,
TAM, FIT.

There are about one hundred and fifty Pri-
mitives of this conjugation.

IRL SEES
SEVENTH CONJUGATION. ‘

The seventh Conjugation has 4 inserted in
the root, after which it is inflected like a
verb of the second conjugation. A penulti-
mate vowel does not admit goon, and the in-
herent ¥ of the 4 is dropped in those persons
which do not admit of goon in the 2d Con-
jugation. As,

Singular. Dual, Plural.
zyq—a, F, shut. Pr. eufe wu wat
Mid. &5, warat waa
gaa, SF, unite. gata ea sata
Mid.dw  darat dae

taq—u, &, divide. twata far fareha ey
Mid. fat  farerat fara

Peq—a, igure. .. faafa fea: feaha

way, break. .. wafa war: wale

ibe 5 a ee eS
Sa i ce a ee ee

ese

Se Sayer

iPS154 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART Ii.

ACTIVE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. wuts RA euta
2. «ute QA ey
l. wufa RAT: Ra:
IMPERFECT TENSE,
Singular. Dual, Plural.
3. Syewa seat GLUT
2. FWA, FU Tey Fey
1 Hea TRA Tew
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. TUE zut au
2. wfay ea =x
1. ews EMA eugia
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. BayTa Sarat Ray:
2. -Qaqt: Raga RAT

1. want CATT SayinCHAP. IV. | 155

ETYMOLOGY.

MIDDLE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

Singular, Dual. Plural,
3. Bad aarat cud
2 Re eurat Baz
1. wa waqe wane
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular, Dual. Plural.
3, SR seurat TSUA
2. Wear wearat Wea
1. wate watts wqeants
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural:
a . grat waurat auat
2 Te TUTat wa
SN =. ! x
1 waa AUATE QAUUIAE
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Singular. Dual: Plural.
3. wala ertarat eats,
2.  eaitarar aaflgrut wate
1. qaity aaitate waitate156

SYNOPSIS OF THE SEVENTH CONJUGATION.

I. ACTIVE.

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

Participles.

Infinitive,

Subjunctive.

Precative.

*

Potential.

Imperative.

Indicative.

xaa, THeTe

ees

eufg «zug Sata

Present,. .

EULA

Perfect,. .

r. SET

Ist Fut..
2a Fate. . S:

[ PART

ta

ZT

AIA, ST

~~

tN
FZ

Inde, . 3.

Ik.CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 157

wel

Participles.
Calg
eqs

fraata

Ver,

Infinitive.
ey »
DP
qa

Subjunctive.
~

Indefinite, s7ztfz.

z
oS
~
—
Be
Eo
=
Z
©
QO
a
a
a ’
See le ee poeple
By.) oe ce E (ic
= a
a fit
ee ee ! 8
eet wie! Fg ae
oe i 5
D2 =
a a) ee =
<
3s 2 3
5 et eee
ga 2B EY
Se Be Se OS
Rat et Ca158 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Il.

ae—u, injure, inserts # instead of 4 in the persons
that admit of goon; as3. tafe, TW, auf; 2. cafe,
xIw:, TW; 1. cafa, Ces, TUM.

There are about twenty-five Primitives of

this conjugation.

EIGHTH CONJUGATION.

The eighth Conjugation hass affixed tothe
root, after which it is inflected precisely the
same as the fifth conjugation; as, Ti——, 4;
extend. Present, aatfa, aaa, Tata, &e.CHAP. IV. ] ETYMOLOGY. 159

‘ie fe
= ai
‘ 3 BE F tc
3 ic | fe = fe’
©) ji (ow (iw
z re :
> es ec)
> ic
z 2 ic’
5 3 3
S 2 ee |
eo - ie bar
ry
Ex
bo Teal apidenfeiiah? Edlaig’od’
pecs x jad
ou | # io’
le - Se kee i
ae a f
- i
7 2
x é. é e | | | | | i
= .
A 5 fo’ fe ley :
ee eee
M om LY pal fal OY
Bae a pan ren oe
Ce ey, Oe OU160

SYNOPSIS OF THE EIGHTH CONJUGATION.

Ii.—_MIDDLE.

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

Participles.

Potential. Precative. Subjunctive. Infinitive.

Imperative.

Indicative.

AF et

ataaq

at

aaa
~J

Present,

aaa
~~

ZI

Imp.

~

agit

pay ais
Tokah

Perf.

iy
Ke
z
fe
{jo
‘(c?
——
ic
to
a
| &
fc
ie
bP
c.f
ies
ic
|
—
~~ (Ic
ae.
. i
fe
2. =
~~ OC

[PART I.

adaqa, araat

wsaras

Indef.

Ss

Indefinite, satfa.

, aaa.

Present

Il]. Passtve.CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 161

MU—Z, FF, £0; makes awnfi, RUA:, wfiq; and
Suwifi, BUA, sri, &e.

$— Fz, 4, do, requires goon before = ; it afterwards
changes the inherent s of * to S, adds 4 for = when
a vowel follows, and drops the affixed 3, when a,
4, or @ follows, in the persons which do not admit of
goon, As,

PRESENT TENSE,

Singular, Dual, Plural.
3. atifa BEA: Hea far
= ATTA RNY: HRY
1. atifa Hog: aH:

IMPERFECT TENSE,

Singular, Dual. Plural,
. Soe
3. Saga BARAT They
2.. 0 Sar: SRR RARRA
1. xaq sTheq BT

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Singular, Dual. Plural.
3. ate grat aera
2. x SEA AQA
1. aratfa aaa RT AA

Potential Mood, FU, RAL, amt, &e.

Middle Voice. Present tense, HWA, Raaly, ma HY, &e,
Impertf. or Sagi At, agri, &e. Imperative mood,
GRAAL, Regt, Saint, &c. Potential, «Sha, HE AMA,
qa ta, &e,162 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART “Tt.

we
There are about ten Primitives of this

conjugation.

NINTH CONJUGATION.

The ninth Conjugation has #t united with
the root, and does not change the penulti-
mate vowel by goon.,. Roots with the cha-

ti racteristic ft change a_final long vowel to a
ti | short one. Verbs ending with a consonant
form the second person of the Imperative

Mood by xa. As,

Singular. Dual. Plural-
sia, st, buy. Pr. xturta atata: arate

| u—fa, 5, purify... +. yatta uate: . vata

| AT, churn. ..-. aatta wate: «Tata
aT, extract. .... aatfa aaite aula
Imperative, 2d sing. Hutu.CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 163

m1

bo, ca

pod

m 19 O9

ACTIVE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
miata a tate: aiatea
atta qary: RIVA
a taa arate: mate:

IMPERFECT TENSS,.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
SATs satutat satay
SR TUT: an tata waRiata
aa tat saat Baia
{IMPERATIVE MOOD:
Singular. ‘Dial. Plural.
AIUTaA aretat RIV.
MMs a ate qirata
mata ~AtWTa AIA

POTENTIAL MOOD.
Dual. Plural.

Singular.

meray aletarat Hi Wie:
Arata ALAS ALWTaTA
aratat Hl AAT HMA164 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

MIDDLE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD,

PRESENT TENSE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

. slate IU RIVE
2. Mute AAT arate
l aw aratrs RMAs

IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular, Dual. Plural.
3. BRUT RaAraat WAWa

HARTA: TalUrat BAUS
l. walia Baitiqs  watttafe

bo

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Singular, Dual. Plural.

Riatat atarat aiwat
2. Aiwa AIUTUt atau
1. aa RIUITS MIWA

POTENTIAL MOOD.

Singular, Dual. Plural.
3. static aRimMarat RUT
2 Riera:  astwarut Riya

Rie Rivas winnieCHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 165

a

Participles,
t, ATSC

aiwe
fantre

Infinitive,
at 3)

w

= f
—

Co

2 ae aye?
|

=

GA

Precat ive
RATA

Potential.
ararata

wd
eon)
Comeramnsy
4
ETD

SYNOPSIS OF THE NINTH CONJUGATION
1—ACTIVE.
apenttive
AT

~
~
Se ee SS eS eee

aTeT

FRIUTA
War

oP Ga ee SpE

Indicative.
Raia

2d Fut. warfa

Perfect, fasta
Indef.

Ist Fut. art

Pres.
Imp.Participles
MIU
Tafaara
RAAT
atara, ARTAT

Z, ‘ °
= . :
= Se Lehi ee te,
Ee :
he, S
= os
QO z g
gga d 1 peal ates
3 | 3
6 Bo ;
| a”
= hie
a eee
S So te
ar 2
S ae ee |
O fu
« eee
or he
wn bynes
Site |
-EEEEEE
2 Flo ES
cs i
-
gg 2G eS
Bese a ae
Be =
Pi Am CQ‘CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 167

qu, extract, used in a reflective sense, makes afar or
agri. B—a, know, makes Sratla, Hala, safer, &c.
There are about sixty Primitives of this
conjugation.
aS EC
TENTH CONJUGATION.

The tenth Conjugation has = inserted in
the root, and is then inflected like a verb
ending with< of the first conjugation. Thee
is retained in the principal tenses. , 3,
and 3¢, if penultimate and followed by a sin-

gle consonant, require goon; and & requires
vriddhy. A finalvowel requires vriddhy ; and
a final yt requires the addition of W previous
to the insertion of =.

Roots with the characteristic a drop the “

final 3, and admit neither goon nor vriddhy.

As,
Singular. Dual. Plural.

qi—fa, steal. Pr. arcafa sTcaTa: UTTala
wea—ta, SH, cover... Brzafa Eraqa: Braga
qa, jfill..... coe. UTEata urcaa: qicata
SI—a, Anow....... Buafa aluaqa: Broa
Fa—a, Fi, forbear. weata wT: aaata
ay—a, a, speak..... auafa aya: ayia168 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. __[ PART II.

ACTIVE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. ‘waicafa aleaqay SCAR
2. *@rcafa UTEqU NEI
1. ‘arcatfa Chcice TTA:
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
BACT Baraat Facgy
BUCA: Wacad Varcaga
1 warcey Waa Daca
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
| Singular. Dual. Plural.
| aca arcaat UICTA
2. acy aca acaa
ey A. aTcarha PIC] ICI
Ht POTENTIAL MOOD,
Mi Singular, Dual. Plural.
Ho 3. UTR aI<aat atag:
| 2. ATE: wltaa atta
Ni 1. ‘arcade aIcaa aItaaCHAP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 169

MIDDLE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular, Dual. Plural.
3. eae (cae SIT
2. care SItag STICa
lL aa Sea? Sema?

IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular, Dual. Plural.
3. Race HATHA TACT
2. sSrcezer: warcaat Baa
1. sista warcaafe 8 8=—- Farearate

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3.  3rcaai ~aIca at arcaat
2 Beare wIcaut ITAL

rca reas ITaIA

 

ogres

POTENTIAL MOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural.

= at aga, Tene ipo en eee Le oaeneian - Saal
eg moet = Paige ge eee = ge ES
anon Abe 0 ae SESE ee Nee eninge es Sage Se ee Le Ra en Eg See ae ee a
D - fea : = re EE rere a my eae eee ene CFE EAE TES ESE ETI PETER CIES

~

Scaa Scqarat aCaTa,
Slag qltagqrat qIzaw
aca allaare a(taate

saa
Some

=<
roel

feed
°
aS170

SYNOPSIS OF THE TENTH CONJUGATION.

1— ACTIVE.

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

E
Sent to
Sy al ie
i 7. ol
E coy
in...
= OF E
2 id toad
=
a ly eee
é Ei
: P
E gh bitdcougy
ma 5
z & ‘Pr
= 2 aie el
iF
©
= [c
a ee
= (p

Ist Fut. arefaat —

Pres
Imp

Indicative
aTCata
. Faeyr
Perfect, atcatata —

[ PART II.

tierra, aTETeTaT

ad

~

~

|e
/

: |
ae]
[ 4
bese
e a
nee
Pe OF
3S .
a 3
oeCHAP: Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 171

gh | e
| Eg ee
= ~
: | E z fs
: pikeo ole
¢ ¢
ra * 9 ' (w
° $ 2 s
S SY thecal pg | 2
S :
eg 2
5 =
© ee eee p ee La
ve = ed
oon ®
etl Ba
bias Cl bcri , (
A A s | | | | ss
Ra pe a fe We
(Pp o
a Be
om 2 oe
a gf mespamomrlomal |S | OP Re
S & _ 5
D2 Se &
D et eebiee as le deh
A S aft :
© = p ' >
; Bue eS 2) pss
g by ‘e E a i 4
3 E er  ¢ ( i oie
wo: ha’ 43
Q — rs ee
Bids se a. OE
gs ee ed ee172 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART HI.

TA—, make a pleasant novse, forms atarata, ala aa:,
aiaafar, &c.

The verbs of this, together with those of
the preceding conjugations,make up the total
number of the simple roots, which are com-
puted to be one thousand seven hundred and
sixty-five. Owing to the same word’s being
often differently spelt, and its sometimes be-
longing to more than one conjugation, the
number is considered by some to amount to
about two thousand. These verbs are great-
ly increased in their number by means of
the Prepositions; they are however conju-
gated in the same manner, when the Prepo-
sitions are prefixed, as in their simple state.

SOR RRR ten
SECTION Il.

OF (PH, Ei Fo 32.M & To. 0.N

OF

THE TENSES.

—
THE PRESENT, &c.
The Present tense is formed according to
the rules laid down at the beginning of each
conjugation.CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 173

Roots with the characteristic ¢ change
to x, and g to 3 in the Present tense of the
Passive ; as, Y{—2, sacrifice; BIA, TWA,
Ew. Fe—T, speak, aa, &ec.

a Pe
CR te one ca RHP Spee: ,

The Imperfect is formed from the Present
by prefixing the augment #, and changing
the final fa to a and@ toa. When fa@and
ware preceded by a vowel,.they become @
and-a@ : when united with a consonant, in the
Active fa is dropped, and the final of the
verb changed according to the rules of Per-
mutation; in the Middle.z is changed to ¥.
As, avafa, qaraq; aad, wate. afr,
gic; fed, ufos. wuts, WIIG; TA, Te.

When fa is dropped and the final changed,
the 2d person is like the 3d; but if the fi-
nal becomes 4, there are two forms: as, 3d,
gee, Wd. wae; 3d. Wawa, 2d. FAW, and
GFuUT:.

Verbs beginning with a vowel require vrid-
dhy when the augment is prefixed; as, wate,
STATA, he covered; %3—S, be upright, :

firm, Fre.174 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. _—([ PART 1,

When Verbs are compounded with Pre-
positions, the augment is always prefixed to
the root, and not to the Preposition ; as, WH,
he supreme, rule ; Waafa, Wretaa.

 

The Imperative mood is formed from the
Present, by changing the final termination
fa to gq, and @ to at. As, atafa, araq ; aran,
araat.

If the verb ends with 3, or & after a single conso-
nant, no addition is made ;_ but if with any other vow-
el, or = after a compound consonant, fe is added; if
with Y—z, fu is added ; in the 2d person of the Impe-
rative Active; as, ahitfe, faufe; am; B=; siwife;
tafe; afr.

ara may be used in the 3rd and 2d persons singular
ina Precative sense ; as staat. may he, or mayest thou
live. So fe or @ in the Active, and @ or @ in the
Middle, may be used for all the persons in the sense of
repetition or excess. The fe is dropped, retained, or
changed according to the above rule.

The Potential mood is formed from the
Present by rejecting goon, and changing the
final termination. If a precedes the termi-
nations, they will be za and ua; if any other
letter, ata and €a. As, wae, atva; feara,
tauta, &c. ,CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 175

THE PERFECT.

The Perfect tense is characterized by the
reduplication of the first syllable, and by
the changes which take place in the Penul-
timate and final letters of the root.

Ist. Of the Reduplication. In the re-
duplication an aspirated consonant is chang-
ed into an unaspirated one, and a long vow-”
el into a short one ; but, if the first syllable
of the root is an unaspirated consonant, fol-
lowed by a short vowel, it is simply doubled ;
as, HHA, worship, FH; ATA, ATA; A,
aqata, &e.

x is the short vowel of ¥, u, ©; and 3
of &, Ht, He.

= is used for the reduplication of 3, 3, °
or a diphthong; @ for or w, and & for &,
q, or. As 4; egg FATT ; J, pass over,
WATS 5 RI Hit, RT R, do, ae: oy eat,
UIE; i, sing, HaUt; a smell, sat; G, sa-
crifice, WETS.

Verbs beginning with a double consonant
reduplicate the first one; but if the first is176 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Ir,

g—z, and the last any letter of a—xa, they
reduplicate.the last one ;.,as,t, eat, THT;
meq, dry, THR; Ke.

Verbs beginning with az; or with g  follow-
ed by a double consonant, Pree Ta for the
reduplication ; as ZU, £0, Brau ; we, move
or honor, Braz.

If the verb begins with gt or ¥ succeeded
Th by a single consonant, the at or = is dou-
bled; as, wu, obfain, HM. Ra, live, ATA.

SIM, occupy space, makes HTAay; and Sey rest,
Se and say.

| Verbs beginning with = and 3 take xq

, and wa for the reduplication; those having

| the characteristic & prefix = ands for the

reduplication of q and q. As, xa, desire,

a RUG; SB, move, SMB; AA—*, sacrifice,

| ZaT; AG—L, sow, weave, Sam 5 Z—4,.
dare, Taq, HSTA:, Tess, &fc.

Verbs with an initial vowel that is long by
} nature or position, omit the reduplication,
and are inflected like verbs of the 10th con-CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY, 177

jug hank as, EY, wncrease, TATATS, LUWTHF
or Tat Tat > SR, wet, S*QTHTaS, ay

 

2d. Of the Penultimate. A mem imate 4

followed by a single consonant requires wrid-
dhy ; £,3,and 3% in the same situation require
goon. As, LA, KAT ; tae, fea ; ae TATE;
Te, npjure, AAS.

Goon is required only in the singular, and
vriddhy only in the Ist and 3d persons sin-
gular,of the Active voice.

Verbs with a penultimate x, when they
have the letter of reduplication the same as
the first letter of the root, and end with a

single consonant, lose the reduplicated let-

ter, and change the g to = where wriddhy is

not required; as,

ACTIVE.
Singular. Dual. Plural:
3. Tey Lae Ly:
a ~ a i ~*
2. wey, why RUT: wy
~ Ses.
1, wee, wry giag eae
MIDDLE.
Singular. Dual, Piural.
f ~ =~ S
3. gate aa sige
~ -~ ~ . EN eS. >.
9, wire RUT stig
L. Som wha Rique

ee
a

ik
;178 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IT.

So aa, Wala, aaAq: Ta, &c.

3

Thus also are inflected GY see, F pass over, aq_be
ashamed, TL command, boast, ma bear fruit, We wor-
ship, and 32 Kill.

Bz give, TT jump, and verbs with an initial 4, are
exceptions to the above rule; as, ¢¢@, wey, Tefey,
&e.

Verbs with the characteristic w, and 3, be
old ; UT, meaning kill; aH, vomit, and aA,
liberate, have two forms ; as, WW&—a, do or
Move. 3rd, TAIT, URUA: AWE, GMa: MU.
2nd, qufwu, afwu, &c. ctq—4, 3, shine ;
TIT, CEH: Teas, TUTH: TH:, Kc.

Roots with a penultimate short vowel are
inflected like fey. Thus,

ACTIVE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. freq fefaaa: fete:
2. fedfau, fede  fetaua: fafau
1. faa  fefetea tefefaa
MIDDLE.
Singniar. Dual. Plural.
3. fete fafeua fefafat
2. fefatra fefana fatatay

l, fetee fefatvas sss fa fa tua?CHAP. IY. | ETYMOLOGY. 179

So qq and Ky 5 gata, qaxq?, Faz, &e.
qz; waz, adeq:, age, &c.

Those having the penultimate long by na-
ture or position are like ala; as, ata, live;
taste, fasta, Fasita:, &c. taj—g0 ; aaqST,
qaqa, FIa:, &c.

Verbs having x4 and 3a in the redupli- «
eation, change them. to &,and S when goon »
is not admitted; as,

 

 

ACTIVE.
_ Singular. Dual. Plural.
B.'s FAT aa LH
2 -xafa cae eae: ET
lL mart zat Eira star
MIDDLE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
Fo eo Zag afaz
otal 23Te sfaea
Le . zfraz tiaz

So £u; Hay, exw, fe:, &c. Sy; Vare,
Bay, BE, &e. a; Taw, Bya:,
SU}, &e.

a, sew, has two forms; as, 3rd, Sara, aq: and
waa, Hg: and my:; 2nd, safay, &c. It also makes
aat, qam:, aa:, &e,180 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART If.

“Verbs of the tenth donjugation ‘fOr the
Perfect: by affixing st to the root, and adding
to it the Perfect tense of the ve sh Hy, Hy, or
A; as,

ACTIVE and MIDDLE.

| Singular. Dual. array be Plural.
fs ITAA TA aI CaIM a a GTC GIATa:

9. ‘aTcamfan GearTeae: SITGIA a
1, waIcaTAre aTCeateag Bicaiaitaa
| ACTIVE and MIDDLE.

Smeulat Dual. Plural.
3. «aITa raata wears: = ATLAS:
Jes. BET Ca AaD ZWaaaG: | WI LaAAa
1. BIeMTAaHT,: 3 ane — ercaaataa
ACTIVE. 9% 3
__ Singular. a Dual. = Plural.
36 0 MILASMNC MCISNT OTE SA
2. STRAT, BISA oo o MITTTERDO!
l. WIAA VLIRF UILAlSHAR
MIDDLE,
Singular. Dual, E Plural...
3, UIKGSR VICaTSHia BICaTaAS
2. BILaI Ae BCAA WCTHIAyY
1 “ita Dicey DWesans

Thus also are imflected-verbs containing
more than one vowel, derivative verbs, Ba
go, and<y take.CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 18]

Sa burn, AIA and ATE shine, ¥ sacrifice, HW nourish,
and Bl be ashamed, have two forms 3 as, Say, STIG ;
SATE, FRIGIANG; SQA, SRAATY ; fayta, fara:
SEG, WAAAY.

When the Perfect of wa and Hw are added
to the Passive, they are used in the Middle
Voice ; as, UTITAMH, Vrcatrata, aieaiaifss,
&e. So aTEATT HG, &e.

With this exception the Passive is always
the same as the Middle in the Perfect tense.

 

srd.—Of the Finals. Every verb in the
Perfect tense has 3 inserted in its final letter ;
as, Ta, wata, &c.

Verbs ending with at ora diphthong are
inflected in the following manner; as, <j—=,
give.

ACTIVE VOICE.

Sing ular. Dual. Plural.
a oS. : a a a
os QaQgl Ras qq :
2. are, afey ZEY CE
Lee afea afar
MIDDLE VOICE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
J ae aad atee
2. sare, eae Zale ZatH, TG
l. Fee eter clea?182 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

=~ ° - SS ° oN ~
Soy, drink, UTS XT, Sing’, Ait; Rt, cut,
Verbs having x——2z final change them to
wa, Bra, and HIT; as, At, ¥, Y.

 

ACTIVE.
Singular. Dual. Plural,
3, taxa fataraa: fafaa:
9. frafeu, fara fatray: fataa
1. fan, faxa fatafea fatafaa
MIDDLE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. fataa fatmata fafafae
2. fafafad fataarat fatatay
1. fataa fafafaae  fafafaa?
i
ACTIVE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. yaa aya cae
2, A a ee om
1 gaa, agiaa ayia
MIDDLE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. ay aya aytae
2. waatay ayare aafag
1 gag agtae antagCHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 183

5 WA CTIVE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. Fare aya: ay:
2. aquy ere: au
1. qt, FHT ag aya

MIDDLE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. ay aad afue
2 THe aaa aug
L.. .at quae qyae

tear, fill, and & injure, have two forms in the

dual and piel as, a BRTS: Tats FER? THE,
&e.

All verbs insert => in the 2d singular of
the Perfect Active; those ending with #% are
exceptions. Those ending witha vowel, those
which drop a penultimate 4 in the Perfect,
and those. which do not insert = in the Fu-
ture, have two forms. As, aatfau, aay,
eaty, atay, Faas, fea fra.

& £0, % hear, E praise, and W ooze, do not take f.
Verbs ending with 3g; x make u noise, = heat, 8 go,
aim ; & praise; a and a skreen, take it alone.

A penultimate yt formed froma short vow-
el, may be long or short in the Ist person
singular ; as, (ata or qaa, Baty or Gae.184 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART It.

The following verbs are irregular in the
Perfect :—

wa—, dig. 3, AAA AAT, VAs 2. aalag, WAy,
-l agia aaa, vfqa, afaa. Mid. 3. qe.

fa—n, aj collect. 3. Faara faara, fea: rag, fea:
fag; 2. Pasa faaiaa faag faafau, fee: faauy,
faua fasu; 1. faura fasa faara fana, fafas fafaaa,
fafa fafoaa.

Ce ae a: ae Fama:, faq: 5 2. ery Tare

=, nourish. 3. fea, Tear, fe frat ; 2. fe frau,

2

fey aia, fefareas 1. fem, fe fad, fefuas.

A 7

(

aa—s, shine. 3. fear, Regn, feafat, &c. So ur,
enlarge 3. fag, four, falar, &c.

TH, injure. 3. TW, TUUT, TWYS 2. Thar &e.

a—s1, conceal, 3, faara, faar: faqqyay:, faq: faaas;
2, fanfau, fequ: faqay:, fag, faaga; 1. fagra fase,
fafaa faayfaa, fafa faaian.

fea, spit. 3. fea fefea fata fafea, fe feaa:
fafsan:, fefea:, Tare, &e.

wqy—ea, sleep. 3. Waly, WauT:, Vays; 9, wayay,
=~ aw) ? au 7 ~S ~~ ae
Wega Ways; t. Wal WaT, VelT, wafya,

fe—a, place. 3, Tura, faar:, faa: &c. like FB.CHAP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. ° 185

THE FUTURES.

The Future tense is formed by uniting with
the root at or fal; as, Wy, WAT; ae ataar.

Verbs-with the characteristic fT, and those

e

ending with 3yt, Ey & S--3z, or i phthong,
take

 

at; all others take Sat; those | naving
the characteristic BS, have both forms. nae
t7y—a, , ar, Envy, BET; = T, give, STAT;

at, buy, Rat; 4, hear, Srat : gy, do, RUT;
at, destroy, Brat ; aa, ask, ataar; Te
accomplish, afyat, Gat.

13, serve; S}, Sty; 4, mix; WY, 002e; &, sneeze ;
Ge, whet; and qd, serve, skreen, are exceptions to the
above rule; as , afzar, &e.

“IY, worship ; W, praise ; §. heat ; Yand %, tremble ;
fathy, extract; Ula, increase ; K, make a ae ; 4, g0,
aim, bathe : 3 and a, ‘bring forth, have two forms in the
Futures; as, ari diam, &e. HY, eat ;E4, desire ; 4,
qjpure ; 4, nourish, (1st conjugation ;) ite, Kill ; RE, be
angry ; a4, be distracted ; au, clothe ; Wa. grieve ; ay,

endure : and %. praise, have two forms, But only in the
lst Future,

   

      

al require goon, and the nip
thongs © and & become gr; St by 50% S +

xM=staat ; © os atzat; q; qatcat; 4 Ap aT; i,186 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

=, 3, and %, when penultimate and followed
by a si ‘aire consonant, require geon ; as, fz q,
SET; 2a, shine, atfaat; Fa, be, at war.
5H, plow ; a7, satisfy 3&4; be proud ; aq, advise ;
uy, moves and aH, touch, have two forms ; as, @el or
xe, wal or Aq, &e.
Verbs with the characteristic fx do not ad-
mit goon in the Future ; as, w—f a, pravse,
fix, be crooked, afeat.

 

ata qT 5 he:
ax, destroy ; 4X, lose sensation ; WE inure ; Ue,
Hut satisfy, and fue, be affectionate, are 1 regular, when Zar
is added, but have two forms with at; as, afwzal, aeT,
or Ala 5 ATfS Ar, HIE or aver.
etal and aq, shine, make etfart, afaat; Ut, bind,
makes AS15 fa, throw, and at, Aill, make aAtat; ag,
bathe, makes Het; BA—e, be distracted, Ful; ay,
bear, “aret; fas, fear, fafa; WE, bear, suffer, arent
| and €Srél; ust, create, El.
: The eds Middle, and Passive are alike
| in the Future; they differ only in the inflec-
tions, which are the same whether the Fu-
ture is formed by at or at; as, aitaat,
mifaaret, Gtaae:; FEL, SSTLT, SET.
Verbs ending with a vowel form an exception to this

rule in the Passive voice: they may always take mI, andCHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 187

have two forms; as, fx, collect, =ifaat or Sar; a, mix,
aifaat or afar; Y, wiitar or waa.
If there are two forms in the Active, they then have

three in the Passive; as g, aifaart, faa, and SIA.

 

The Precative mood takes ata for the at
or xat of the Future Active, and at® instead
of the at of the Middle. In the Active the
final of the root reverts to its original state,
and in the Middle a final x does not admit
goon, when the Future is formed by at. Goon
is not admitted in the penultimate except
when the verb takes it throughout, as in the
Ist and 10th Conjugations; thus, atfaar,
arate, afaste; aut, feata, feats; adr,
fuga, yette ; afzat or ara, gata, wate,
arte ; aretaat, atata, urefaets.

Verbs ending with at or a diphthong, if a
double consonant precedes, have two forms in
the Active voice ; as, gt, smed/, arate and
Bara. |

ZT, give; Ul, hold ; AI, mete ; ut, drink; SI, stand ;
at, abandon ; y, drink ; 2, SINE ; eT, cut; al, destroy,

change their finals to @ before arq; as, Farm, &e.

Verbs with the characteristic £ change a188 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART II,

penultimate 4 to =, and q to 3, in the Ac-
tive; as, HH, sacrifice, FATA; AW, sow,
VUlA ; F, sew, HIta; #, dare, CAM.

Qa, ang and Wa, give, make QUA, Way; Vy,
uarata. @, screen, makes alari..

 

The Infinitive mood is formed from the
utureby simply changing ytoS; as, atfeat, BF

f +

4

Fu

ai and 3:
Be . > 3
Ql 5 ASils a%.

a
)

oo

| The Second Future tense is formed from
ele the First by changing at into wfa for the
| Active, and wa for the Middle; as, ahaa,

t oof qitaata, gifama; sui, safa, Saa; war,
rata, Way.

73 a

| Verbs with a final x change it to az and
insert *; as, 4, aut, afeafa, wfrae. a mr, do;
| | aM, at cay Tea, weicer
AA, cul; Gy, vyure ; Be, play ; ua, disregard, and
| AH eiasee, have two forms; as, » Seat or aaufa, &e.
Deponent verbs with the characteristic z,
have, besides their regular form, the Active
also in this tense; they do not admit the in-
| sertion of = in the Active form. AS, 84, &,
» a, S, be, aftat, afdwa: Active qaife.CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 189

When there are two forms in the Ist Fu-
ture, there are also two in the 2d Future, and
in the Subjunctive mood; as, afzat, Arat;
atyata, areata; safeua, TAA.

 

The Subjunctive mood is formed from the
2d Futtire by prefixing the augment, and
changing fa to @and Sto a; as, atfawfa or
% Tatfyaa, watfaaa.

 

THE INDEFINITE.
The Indefinite is formed from the Ist Fu-
ture by prefixing the augment ¥, and chang-
ing the final termination.

In the Active eat is changed to Ra; and
atto ata. Inthe Middle rat is changed to
*z ; and at, preceded by a vowel, is changed
to w, but preceded by a consonant only
changes the gt of at to =. As, atfaar,
wqaata, Halas. a, sew, grat, TIT,
FataH. LAT, FATYTS, ACA.

The vowels remain the same as in the

Future, before a and xe. Every vowel
requires vriddhy before ata, and goon before190 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Il.

a, but neither goon nor vriddhy when &T is
changedtoy. As, 7x, understand ; frat,
~ EOS = = =: ~
Bata, Hales; RAT, ARAta, WAS ; TAT,
Pore
Tald, HES.
When & is inserted in the Future, the dif-
ferent inflections of the Indefinite are added,
as in ata; when it is not, they are united

?

~~,

with the root, ending with either a vowel or
consonant, in the following manner :—

1.— Ending with a vowel; as, Ht, buy.

ACTIVE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. sRta wet HAT
ai. ea Ne =
2. BHRat: HUB BAT
ot mag =\
1 BAG SAA BZA
MIDDLE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. BAT BRETat BATA
2. SRS: aaarat BRA
l. xaty aRare Wane

In the same manner is inflected Wats.

Verbs ending with 4 insert = in the Ac-
tive; as, mm, bathe. Future, “rat, wereta,
wefest, wathar:, &c. like ata. The De-CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 19

ponents are regular; as, HI——-%, measure.
Future, atat, gata, Hatatat, Bara.

WI, smell, St cut, WW sharpen, and Bi destroy, have
two forms; as, HHT, &c. like wi; and Syiq, Ayal,
SY, &c. declined like the Potential mood.

eigive, 1 cut, at hold, ut drink, and er stand, have
only the latter of the above forms; as, s1¢1q, STMT,
sei. Middle, sfea, sig erat, afeud, &c, like are.
‘a, drink, has both the above forms and also a third; as,
SqaT, WTA Rea, &c. like Saray. So wa, be
famous, makes SGM, swat, awa, &e. and | dare,
TE, We qn, s@as; Middle, sTe7 and STE:

Verbs ending with 3 substitute @ for a,
and do not admit goon inthe Middle; as,
Wat, aya, wyATat, wepra, &c. like wAxz.

Verbs ending with 3, = skreen, cover,
and a, cover, have three forms ; as, q, Waa,
wate, waete, &c. Precative mood, Fate
and afcate.

2.— Ending with a consonant ; as, &4, shut.

ACTIVE.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. Beidta wegt ACE:
a ree ao
2. Huet: BCS Fes
= e SS s SS
Le Sar AX (aa TeeSUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

   
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
    
  
  
   
  
     
      
    
  
 
  
  
  
 

MIDDLE.
Sincular. Dual, Plural.
g ae ? ae
oe) Stans SFRVTayt SRT
as mo =
2. Saat SRAT ET WLS
| l. Were FURS Teale
eee Ty oa = f — Ty :
So wy, Act. sraTyta, sutat, HaTE:. Mid.
~ we
=,
RZ epee Ep i 2" nr
BNA, Wregrat, wrya. az, Act. wa rare,

YS

Sy) ke = ee = —por. ee
Sdtat, Fait: Mid. wea, TIalal, Maa.
—) o~ ‘

Ceemseenoneesy

Verbs ce maposed of two consonants with

a penultimate #, and the last consonant a

; cae one, may fe the = long or short be-

fore <a; but if the ¥ is followed by =, @, or

q in ns Future, it must always belong. As,

wa—ws, desire; afaat, seata or Wearsta

| wax, be crooked ; wtcat, Ware Tt. Wat, bear
rut ; MPAA, SAT rata ; 8, atrat, warate.

Ts
om

ai

Ta

_—

Roots with the characteristic x, and those
with a final =, a, or ¥, do not change the ¥ to

} —— } Pt ar an Bo <* =r ‘ = B ae

| st before ga or ata. As, we—z, &, beg ;
~ ~ De

a =i wayt nT = a + . = ae ages — Becy "7 = _—

a acta. AG AAs cease; FUuaid. qa, SHTATA.

i <

GA co, and az—> speak, always change the 4
we Sf 5 5

to HT; Aa, qa, and Fa, injure, kill, never do.

K»5 iS

np Verbs with &, 4, © final, and =, ¥, %
penultimate, when they f form the Future byCHAP, IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 193

at, shorten the Penultimate and add aa and
wa in the Indefinite. As, Sei; afeaa
wfaaat, fea. Middle, afraa, afsara’,
aia, sa like the Imperfect of ata. So
fau—x, Ht, enter ; TT, giqaa. «=e
2row, mount. 3. Frc, yeaa, &c. :

haa, takes this form only when it means embrace:

 

    

and IR&, plaster, taint ; Tae, lick, and Se milk, have

two forms in the 3d person singular of the Mid lle ;
as, SPgaTG afar and afer; afaaa, site; ayaa
SIT, SIA, saa, &c.

Verbs of the 10th conjugation, in addition
to the augment, take also the reduplication,
and change faatto a anda. In the penul-
timate goon must be rejected. The final 31 of
a verb, and the 3 produced by vriddhy, must
be changed to &.

In the reduplicated syllable, for the penul-
timate vowel that is short by nature and po-
sition, its corresponding long one must be
used before a single consonant; but for a
penultimate =, = must be used before a sin-
gle, and = before a double consonant: as,
ATLITAT, T Hata, FAGTAl, AGT a, Kc. Mid-
dle, yaaTa, HAATA, gaqca, &c. like the

= ao eee
Se

=

Sgn

 

aaa194 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART I.

Imperfects of at=. Yy—*, take hold, wretaat,
gq2tyrg. at—a, know, atataat, wqita7a.

Verbs containing two or more vowels, with
a penultimate #, have two forms in the re-
duplication: as, Wa—4*, a, speak ; wafer,
yanra and zaTxw.

Verbs beginning with a vowel lengthen it
by vriddhy, insert x, and reduplicate the fi-
nal consonant ; as, we—A*, kill; wifeca.

In all other respects the reduplication in
the Indefinite is the same as in the Perfect.

Ta, serve; => W move, are all like verbs of the 10th
>
Conjugation in the Indefinite. As, aPAPH4a, ATLA,
SUAQan.

When there are two forms in the Futures,
there are two in the Indefinite ; and when
the Future is irregular, the Indefinite 1s so
also. As fqu—s,, accomplish ; arts Styqat 5s
weate and saute, fa, throw; ATA, FatTate.
aE—at, plow; wet and wet, Hatata oF
aatata ; afeat, wyeta.

¥, tremble, and 4, aim, are exceptions in the Active ;
and %, praise, in the Active and Middle; as, evqratt,CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 195

and sverg. Those which have two forms only in the
Ist Future, have only the regular form in the Indefi-

nite; as, 31m, cat; Sif Al, aret, NIA, Ke.
Ss

Roots with the characteristic @ change
«Kat or at to Fa, and with the exception of
a final az or 4€, admit neither goon nor vrid-
dhy in the penultimate; those with the cha-
racteristic EX, in addition to the above, have
also their own regular form. As, 4y—¥, ¥,
Ht, nourish ; UST, qua. FE—, F, &, be
foolish ; aifeat, WHA. A—T, EE, he old ;
afcat, waTeta and HATA.

When @ is affixed to Deponent verbs, they
take both the Active and Middle forms; as,
Gi—S, J, shine; atfaat, wattae; Act.
Tqaq, FAaat, HAA, &e. like the Imperfect
of ata.

Sa, 4, ET. throw, makes sieta_and 3_yqs; W—
a, <, &, destroy, HATA and HANA; TU—4, = AH
uyure, BATYLS Wi, move, AIA Ties, at,
govern, Si 4A; fau—T, Y, >; yr, plaster, APAaA 5
Middle, afay and sifaua. So fea, sprinkle, AfaaA,
sifam and afaaa ; fay, throw water, staat, sfaam 5
q, move, Qa, UAT and HAT; A4-—s, stop Ups
SAAN, BAA,

 

eer =
eran =

| a
ul
4
tani
i
iH
if
H
‘ i}
ty
im}
hi
4
Hy
|
ie
it
ii
hit
I
i
a
ay
15)
en |
1a)
a
HI
ft
ih

ax

eS eS

Sapa

5

eae ©
ae

Fe Sere ner a196 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART If.

Verbs of the 8th conjugation ending with 4 or w
may have two forms in the 2nd and 3rd persons sin-
gular of the Middle. As, 3. silage, 2. safaen; or 3,

WA, 2. SAAT. WA. give, for the last form, makes

i]

3 ase

ieTq, HU Als.

ty

aI, nourish; ta, shine ; az, enlarge ; Ot, fill, and
aw, know, have two forms in the 3d person singular of
the Middle. As, svarfa or siqifae, aarfastat, syaifaua,
&c. us, 3, s, makes qulfe, Huai, Sama, &e.
In the Passive verbs with a final vowel,
with the exception of the 3d sing. have two
forms: those that have two forms in the
Indefinite, inthe Future have three. As ai,
site, watfaarat yRatat, wattara saaIT. FF,
gata, gefaatat gatiaarat Fararat, watauga
satan setae. 4, garfe, serfcarat
wAUTat, Hatfeaa seaea, &e. So verbs
of the 10th Conjugation; as, we, wuafz,
yarcfaarat wsatftarat, Hatefaqa, Wat-
f<ua, &c. The others are the same as
the Middle, except in the 3rd person singu-

lar; as, gatfe, sawat, sae.
Verbs ending with si add @ in the Indef, Passive;

as, Al, measure ; Fut. art; Ind. syarfa.
Roots ending with 3H and inserting © in
the Future, do not change 3 to qt in theCHAP. IV. ] ETYMOLOGY. 197

Indefinite Passive; as, XH, appease ; Axia.
TH, vomit ; HH, desire ; Waa, sip, do; are ex-
ceptions. 3a, be sick ; qa, cease; and taza,
rest, have both forms.

wa, break, makes HuPeg and ayifs. aA, gain,
makes Safar and sift ; but with a preposition, only
the first form is used; as, yrafay. aq, Aeat, makes
ay.

Some verbs vary in the Indefinite when used in a
reflective sense. Those ending with a vowel have
two forms. As x, do ; SRT or waa. So ga, milk,
makes sf and ATT,

W4, cook, and EH, shut, are like the Middle, As
Huw, TAS.

e, throw, makes ate; 7; vomit, Be; TAI string
together, safae; HAE; adorn, Bafa; WA, bow,
SAG; Wa, free, safae; fs, serve, afyfaaa and
SAAT; WW, ooze, sary and gafay.

fe
PARTICIPLES.

The Participles are formed from the dif-
ferent tenses of the verbs.

1. The Present. The Present participles
may be formed regularly from the 3rd plural
of the verb, by changing f~ or fa to a, to

A iat
ik
q
8
a
3
|
1
i
Vi)
,
th
(ee:
i
it
at
1
|
e

i
i
i
]
‘
Hi;

Sa

Pe ST ae
a

ESS

pee eae198 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

aia, andato gta. As, avafat or a, aTat.,
avaata; faufa or a, fra, fasta, &c.

The Active participles, when inflected, change t to
a in the Masculine gender, and those of the first and
fourth conjugations insert @_in the Feminine. As,

avaz; Nom. ara; qraail, aan, &c.

Verbs ending with =t1, and those of the sixth conju-
gation, have two forms in the feminine: reduplicate
roots do not change 7 to a_in the masculine, and have
two forms in the neuter plural. As, at, look well or fair,
shine; wa. Nom, ae, rail or HT, AT, 50 TRG
az, Ae At OF aeatl, ATA. TTL makes TT, ez,
ee7; Neuter plural ee fa or Fe fa.

All the other Present participles are regularly inflect-
ed like Adjectives, except the Continuative, which are

indeclinable. As, SA, Rat, RY; AAATA:, AT, a, &e.

The Present Continuative participle is
formed by adding 3 tothe root. A penulti-
mate vowel requires goon, but a final vowel
and a penultimate = require uriddhy. As,
Sq Fa, aI ad. R, sing, Wes Wa.

The participle ending with afaa is used
in a reflective sense, and is formed by
changing aa into ufaa. As, ataa, aTatay;
fea, faafau, &c. A final vowel does notCHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 199

admit goon, HT or a diphthong is lost, and
7 becomes <. As, afan, frafaa, aafan,
afaa, from et, xT, B, 4.

2nd. The Perfect. The Perfect participles
may be formed from the 3rd person plural of
the Perfect, by changing 3: into yq and €&
into HTe. As, TITS: TATAA 5 Nom. gary,
wat, wa. awattat, warata; Nom. qarare:,
T, <7.

If a semivowel precedes s:, it reverts to
its original state, when qeis affixed; if only
one vowel precedes the consonant with which
S: is united, & is inserted between aa and the
root. As, a, aye. Nom. ayaa, Tyat,
ayaa. Ry: Ciera. Nom. kfugqra, Tet.
afar.

aia, light, makes Timqa 5 Ve, endure, rar; fae;
wet, wee: and fa q, enter, fafa 344. fafafqan.

3rd. The Futures.—The Participles of
the lst Future imply propriety or necessity.
As, atfaaa:, he should he asked, or he ought
to he asked.

A
(eo
Hy
ay
i
4
a
=
Mt
"
|
‘5
ig
i
AY
a
it
MH
ae) |
a
bes}
whey (
f
i}
ei
7
bie
%
He
all
i
Hd
iy
We
Ae
i
HF
Wi
yi
4,
i
% .
4
i
fe)! 4
Brie et
‘
i)
i"
hie :
if
ft
i
i
i
Bias
i!
i
i
,
i
e

=e

ores
Bape Ered.

eee

PS eats, x os a
saa Sa ee nore
Re ea ee ee200 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PARTI.

One of them is formed from the Future by
changing the at of at to Ha; the other by
adding stg or a to the root. The vowels
require goon as in the Future. Thus, #%r,
SUq; ayuta, 8a; ufgat and ara, afaas
and atay; aqdty, aa. Urefxar, Brefeaa;
WCUTT, Bay.

Verbs ending with at or a diphthong
change it to « when @ is affixed. As, at,
Sa: FH ita, &c.

Verbs ending with S or & have two forms, and
that with the vowel lengthened by uriddhy always im-
plies necessity. As, W, hear, HY and 3H; W, praise,

aq, aty. Those ending with m, #, have only the lat-
ter form as, q, puss over, Arey. So a, Mix, and si,

come to.

Verbs with a penultimate 3, followed by
a single consonant, require vriddhy when 4
is affixed. As, WM, go; WIT.

Roots endiig with any letter of the 4 class, except
Heat, AG blush, way bully, TI Kill, Aq speak, ay
sow, do not change 3] to sq; as, Ruy, WY, &c. BAL
ask, a%& laugh, aa endeavour, wa be able, wea kill,
and uy endure, do not. ayaa bow to, Hu speak in
the mind, W3_ worship, and ast sacrifice, have both
forms.CHAP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 201

ae speak, 3X move, ae rejoice, and 4A cease, have
the regular form only with a preposition. As, 7a,
Y AI. ae accustom, makes siaar.

Verbs with a final g or = that do not in-
sert <in the Future, and those with the cha-
racteristic ¥ or 3, change a final 4 to #, and
3 tow, when @ is affixed. As, wa, cook,
WT; FI—RT, VY, go, Ara; Ty, colour,
Su; Va, ache, Ta.

If necessity is implied, this change does not take
place. As, Ws, forsake, Ary ; WH, eat, BST,

Roots with a penultimate az do not ad-
mit goon when q is affixed; as, BY, increase,
ey, &e.

MY praise, id mnjUre, wie bo eb) the hand, and
Qaaqgsi compact, require goon ; as, sj, &c.

Se milk, and qu, rain, have both forms; as, Ta
and 1g. a dao, s honor, Y nourish, aq skreen, and €
praise, have two forms; as, Hwy and «xray, ay and @g.

a, dig, makes a ; 8; reason, AX ; aS speak, ara ;
but with the negative 31, s44q; with Ba, Sa or

FAA. HIE, govern, makes fay.

Soe

The participles of the 2d Future are re-
gularly formed from the 3d person singular
of the verb by changing fa to a, and @ to
ala; as, qifaataand a, afasra and aifaaata.

PS ee en
A DET Saar rt nO Ee

aE as

a SS eS202 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

4th. The Indefinite. The Indefinite parti-
ciples are formed from the 3rd person sing.
of the verb, by changing yt into g for the
Passive, and into s7a@ and at for the Active
and Middle. As, atfaa, afaara, aifaet,
from the Future atfwat.

Verbs ending with a vowel only add @ ; as,
at, bathe, ava; fa, conquer, faa; At, bury,
HIT; F, hear, Far; H, be, Wa; %, nourish,
Bo ey are om

Ur or ¥ drink, # barter, 3 sing’, and sar regulate,
change their finals to =; as, Wa, ata, &e.

HI measure, wr stand, SI move, 1 cut, and ‘al de-
stroy, change theirs to £; as, faa, faa.

wi cut, and wt whet, have two forms; as, fea and
wia, &c. RI give, and = nourish, make qa; Bl go,
and ut hold, make fea; at, leave, makes eta.

a, waste, makes SH, AAI, Aredl. u with a single
consonant becomes sq; as, =, cleanse, {1A. a, sew, makes

Sa; @, cover, ata; and @ call, SA, CAAT, Fal.

The penultimate vowel admits goon only
when = is inserted ; as, fae, faeaa, feyt,
from the Future et; aa, shine, atfra, &c.

Verbs of the Ist, 2nd, and 3rd conj. that have a
penultimate = and insert ¢, have two forms in the De-
Clinable participles; as, aq, move, afaq or SuPaA ;
sfqraq, aiferaq,CHAP, Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 203

Verbs that have an initial consonant, and a penulti-
mate ¥ or =, have two forms in the Indeclinable par-
ticiple when & is inserted; as, Bq flow out, Bryfrrat or
sara. Those ending with =q always take goon; RT CrY,
and 44, steal, omit it. RA dare, BN be weak, ta thirst,
and ua forbear, have also two forms: 3 aS, Ara, sf.

When there are two forms in the Future,
there are two also in the Indeclinable Dat:
ciple, but only one in the others; as, try,

accomplish, faz, tagaa, fear, ad afyat,
from the Future Sfyat and gat.

Roots with the characteristic 3 take or
omit € inthe Declinable participles; those
with ¥ always omit it: those with = omit
it, but have two forms in the Indeclinable
one. As faq—a, at, he affectionate, Rfza

faz, &c. tma—z, know, taza, taqqa.
tq, he, 24, Saaa; ae, sal

ya—ws, be bold, makes wfyt and ue; and ae;
meaning forbear, afar.

Ii in any part of the verb @ is changed to £; 4 to 3,
or ~ to 3, the same change takes place in the Indefi-
nite participles ; as, as, worship, EE, KVIA, EET. ag,
bear, ae, &e. wy, sleep, at Wy, War. So Ue,
govern, Fre, &e.

Verbs ending with 314, that insert < in the Future,

drop the x, and change the sq to st in the Declinable204 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART i.

participles, but have two forms in the other; as, RAS,
step, WIA, RIVA. Flat, aia, also irregularly aaa.
If ¢ is not inserted, thus ; an— Sit, cease, 4A, ARAN,
' qa, afer, from the Future 4-1.

Verbs of the 5th Conjugation; those with
the characteristic Hc or fr; those with a fi-
1al SE, =, =; and those ending with & after
a compound consonant, or Ht with € for the
last letter of the compound, take 4 instead of
a in the Declinable participles; as, 3; 4;
waqa; frst Ht, fear, faa, fraqa; a—tr,
cut, AA; T, pass over, atw; faz, divide, tua;
ay, fill, uw; a, fade, ata; Xt, sleep, AT,
&e.

at Sy |
sw wet, fear decay, gt smell, 4 save, ae order, faz

 

know, ®t be ashamed, have two forms; 48, Sa, a7;
fara, Nw; rw, A; aw, a; az, aw; fan, fads Ble,
> c e > e,e
RIA. SE, pain, makes alee ; with the preposition St,
9 Py. te. ° c c ¢
3H; with fa, fa, and¥, Vay, Ta, way sa, he old, sa;
: x , i. A i
J—H, fly, Sta and sfar; w, meditate, WIA; AT; be
ee as
drunk, Ha; BW, Win cold, Wa congealed, wia withered ;
ie, rejoice, Sa.
SH be diseased, SIA inhale, sagt sound, fae be
Wier essed, sy speak im ae mind, ay hae, G pur a.
Lz he pe, aH vomit, farge exhale, ge dete ae

ee be glad, may. take or omit £ before F am Wa 5 as,

; \ i 3 i STH; HQ, MPT; aT, Bell ufaa, qi, wnCHAP. IV. | _ ETYMOLOGY. 203

qe extract, Ay be hungry, fara he distressed, 74
play, as rejoice, a % & dig, do not admit goon w Han
= is inser ied. As, fasataa, fea, fara.

aa, dig, makes wy, IATA; fea, game, GA; OY mean-
ing oe to conquer, a7 3 us, cook, U® ; a enlarge,
Wis, ula; wal, bear ‘fruit. afar and HET; ne, lake ee
tion, ai and ur 3 A, cut, eM; WH, dry, WER; =a
collect, sound, a or lA Vila, Valarie, Cla or Wala.

Verbs ending with =< that do not insert €, and those
ending with a, A, that do, have two forms in the In-
declinable participle. As T=, colour, TH THAT, TH
Tq, from the Future ~a#r. So Heal, churn, afar and
afer s frag, Ail, Felon Fehr. ae, hide, and CE
deceive, have: also two forms; as, afar and afar.

In the 10th conjugation the Indeclinable
participle differs from the others by retain-
ing the x, which is inserted in the principal
tenses. As, utfca, ulfeare, Btxfaat, from
the Future Gtzcfyat.

When a Preposition is. prefixed to the
root, the Indeclinable participle changes. its
final termination to @ after a short vowel,
and to 4 after a long one or consonant; as,
dew, fata, wfana, &c.

SY, obtain, makes yIy or yay; fa, waste, sf,
wats; 4, barter, aufag, saa. fa, throw, A, Kill, have

ee = eam, oe x ae

wr
it
Het
ht
{|
|
te
vi
iy
th
i
he
if
li
ia
i
x
q
;
we
j

Tie Se ~
ca cn Ee
Tipe aie. Sr are

pea
———

ee

ive

“TE
a tae
es

= ee
Saaprala mateo $e
ae Paes205 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. { PART II.

only the latter form; as, yard. il, waste, yea, Yara;
a, weave, Fala ; aI, cover, FYla; with & or ult, wa or
wala.

When f& is affixed to a root, or it means
know, serve, desire, the Passive participle
alludes to Present time; as, xta—fs, uitfad,
at 7s meditated.

In the Passive STE, recover, makes S@qig ; a4, RE,
distressed ; BN, HX, become lean ; ala, atta, drunk; Sx;
aaq, churned; Ja, Yes, sounded ; Tey TS, fixed; faq,
fararay, quieted ; ne, Re; expanded ; ye, faze, confused ;
aa, aq, brought in contact; far, Taiz, noised ; wa,

be able, tae and afaa; ws, a, cooked.

 

SECTION IV.
OF THE CAUSAL VERBS.

The Causal verb is used to express the ef-
fect which the agent of the verb causes one
object to have upon another; as, ataafa, he
makes (them) ask.

Causals are derived from any other verbs,
and are both formed and inflected like
verbs of the 10th conjugation. The Synop-
sis of ava, ask, request, may be taken as an
example.=

CHAP. IV. ] ETYMOLOGY. 207

/ bw
P rE
: o Une
eo ‘= fe oR
a ft , rus
Seen iene Owe
: PE eo
: hy POR
: ce
| : a
eg eee ee
a
> : ie’
al : a
< gO a alae ie a,
5 3 by
ss id
ye fe’
im ca 4 |
ed te EE .. die
ae or
Cry
me) ee te?
OC =. te fy 4a
Z BTV Rr ae
z :
A,
> S sbioc.es
; eer 2G
.
ay a ee ie aos:
* Por i 8)
‘yin eae BOE
aS ee Se
Hoh w Bab BBS
et, he pe moo
~m we 4
: ee ee oe pare
PO 20 ee CR ey ae
oe eS ere
Reet mem208 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

3
: Bn use ee
je bs
” a & re to! ie
ae. f & de
2 £ ey “ r Hs
: E Ea
Ms a
Cc
Fa wante wis Pyocdge madrid drivel aay
f t IE a
ra bre ae
> : g fe
=: =
pan] >
oo ae eee eee
wn z
a lew J e
SS ;
2 Ez
62 a E bc) oMBRge ah bales, 8
bw
ao iv &
oo aa E
m F<
© 5 (3 {Pe ee
wh a o
= , Aa
= : fe (fe
7. Se | | |
> = OF | E
= E ee we.
2 iy fe is eo oS
ee Pe a a ee
ge eee ee
Se peepee Ro WT BG pO
43 oy) Wen e D
© = .
$ dec S Bo Beg
; dvCHAP. IY. | ETYMOLOGY. 209

So the others; as, aqata, arate, wroafea,
arqata, aaa, Create, ataafa, armata,
atcata, &e.

Roots having the characteristic = or a final
FF require the penultimate vowel tobe short;
those having f# and WE move, FA cease, LA
qutet, iz decay, TT AO wa bow, 74 hee, za
vomit, wit bathe, Ba YA move, have both
forms; as, qe—a7, &, seek, qcata TAA ,
<a play, caafa ; Wa—fa sound, waafa or
wiagte ; wuEfa orate; saraafe or saate.

SF goand yA sip are exceptions; as saat.
\
With a preposition the last eight have only one
form, as Ysasafa; we tear, has both forms; as,
‘\

Tae aft vitae.

Verbs ending with a diphthong are inflect-
ed like those ending with wt; as, i sing,
areata.

a sew, & cover, & dare, Sl cut, Ht whet, and By de-
stroy, take 4 instead of 4, as ataufa, &c.

Roots with the characteristic = have the
penultimate long in the Indefinite; those
with the characteristic 3¢ or a penultimate
=z have two forms; as, az U—2, A, TATA:

Se canbe aes

~ ES - SM cat NOS EEO Sera pe is a
5 ges StS ss Se eign eh ale Rie ae ae Og oe eae : =
Seat epee aera Se ra eae ae a a ae ieee
Nest aee ee Speen Page SS = = = ato ode210 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

uty—ag, shine, Bayrza or Wile, Fe
be, HaqTea Or FATT.

ray speed, = tear, we be famous, qe pound, a spread
out, BY tie, oppose, a remember, ake 31 eetead of =
in the reduplication ; as, HATTA, SRTT A, &e. aE seek,
and ae surround, have both forms; as, afer or
BaTET.

se pain, Ea throw, sa decrease, and od sound,
have two formsin the Indefinite; as, 1’ Sea or sears .
visa or watt; Saat or Sra NT sifeaar_ or
Kaaai. Fl, ned: makes sfagaa or afalgan,

The following verbs are irregular in the
Causal :—

7 dishonor, Aas desire, qa—s hide, uy burn,
Che dati praise, ada as pr aise, fe like causals in their
ieflecsions; but not in <lfiiatecnvalien Present anata ;
Indefinite sats. atman; Perfect aimarare and aq ;
Future  arafaat aad afaa, &c. araraja, aWearere or
Sara, wafaat or ara, &c. So the next three. uW, mean-
ing praise, makes also, Present qavq, Perfect 7 aa.

Ti Kill, Fi go, and Ft shame, admit goon, and add y;
as, tuafa, &c.

fa, collect, makes wuafa, qyafa, waafa, qaafaz.

fa, conquer, — wsTyafa.
3, growold, — syafa.
a, stink, — Riyafir.CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. | 211

eara, shake, makes wnraafx.

qe, deprave, — afi. and € wafn.

y quake, —  waafs and waa.

Ul, preserve, — wWeaafi,

wt,  Lve, — weafaand tiwafr.

wt, fear, — weafa, wrgad, and Wea.
TS, colour, — wtayatas hunt deer, trafa.

ws grow, ascend, —

=t, melt, —
2“ ®
al,  concewe, —
ata, enlarge, —
x’

Bait, expand, ao
7A

faq, remember, —

a. 89; ae

Ueafa and trvafa.

arate, araafa; melt butter,
aaafa, sraafe,

alata, argafa.

Hraafa.

warrvafa and aqrzafa.

Waal; surprise, Fawr.

wieala ; fall, waa.

Whatever addition is made to the root for
the Present, is retained throughout ; as, at,
migefa, aTaatara, srufsat, when. fa,
uluadfa, uTagta; «aUuaTata, VaaatTa; atr-
tgat, wtafaat; watarg, Watwag. |

Eel envy, makes eaafa; Indefinite vfaaa. "I
drink, avaain, SN Bl stand, wraafA, siaferr ; ay

slee i Ragu.
P, MIA, BAIIT

There are three forms in the Indefinite when the
verb is used in a reflectivesense; as, saifa es, Harafag,

and Saqaa7.212 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

st know, BT cover, FA tame, FA throw up, ue will,
WH appease, BM tie, obstruct, take or omit £ in the De-
clinable participles of the Indefinite; as, sfoa =a,
gen ea, efai a, Tiler ga, gia OW, Nina
Lia, Witty We.

 

 

SECTION V.
OF THE OPTATIVE VERBS.

The Optative verb is used to express the
desire or wish of the agent; as, faatfaufa,
he desires to ask.

Optatives are derived from any otherverbs,
by reduplicating the first syllable with =, in-
serting = by the rules of the Future, and
adding a. Whenthus formed they are re-
gularly inflected like verbs of the lst Con-
jugation ; and are Common, Active, or De-
ponent, according to the root from which
they are derived; as, qa—s, faatiaata
and faafara.CHAP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 213

by’
=
oo tc” & fer rae
Boba BAe ta eal singe
s ~ ce oe
Sn 2
eve Pipa rn] ae Ae
A ok — Ee, ye Se
2 bee eee
> ee ie
e ee _
os oi, tee A
ee ae
o ee
> Z e
SI = | e
> 2 chy wre | &
ey D) ce
= $ ge
Paco es CB oa ik trey yagi
Se eae alias Fi tis er he
SP Ry oR ce by
Pie, ove ay ES x
oo N Se
Eo A 42s wi | | | |
ed xn BS ,
te Ve
Oo _ (7
D 2b
a eyomrra hes ready ee |
= se fc
> a w G rf
‘= we
at eicitnicth wilt fie obs
i A Go O18 fo 2g: 1
oh) > i Be Be Gee Gea oe
eFo leche @oks &
gS ae aa Gogh ee ee ott
els ec Bho
om uy Ge ee
Spotty aun Bey
ee eno
a o “oes =
a os : DN CO «4
pe et NL214

SYNOPSIS OF THE OPTATIVE VERB.

11—MIDDLE.

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

tp”
io
Fi & Fi
BR i as
oA fe
ee. |. bt hee
5 6 E
aE
a
© (ct?
: EZ
aig] 1 we |
é © 8
- 5
a cen
- So
3 ss
z bo
me Ce
& tc =
3
ze e
oo | he
Boe
che
roe
Beaks
<3 Ge
ae i 3
Age Ek Bae
-EERES
oe
iEEEGE
on Ge
Pore ee
eho SS
SS
a oe, ho

afanitafes —

faattatyaaa

Indef.

| PART II.

Ill. Passive. faattaara, &c.CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 215

Sotheothers; as, fefeufa, faarttefa, fergre,
cafaata, aqufa, ecafa, frafaufa, fantata,
aufcata.

Verbs having a final or penultimate 3 or
S take J in the reduplication; all others
take =.

= is used for the reduplication of = and & in the
Causal Optative, when £ is inserted, if they are
preceded by a letter of the y class, or by H, 4, t, 4,4;
I—-F, =, 9, Ff, Amore, F hear, and @ ooze, have both
forms ; as, q purify, Causal qaafa, Optat, faarafaafa ;
and so arafaafa or faarafaufy, &c.

Roots beginning with a vowel take the re-
duplication inthe Middle, insert x, and admit
the substitution of a for 4; as, 3x pervade,
gfafaea; a ATanoint, afataafa; se elean,
Sfafgatfa or sfafeufa.

When the affixed @ becomes 4, = is not
changed to ¥ after the reduplication, except
in the Causal Optative; as, faa sprinkle,
tafaata, tavutaafa.

~ praise, is an exception in the Optative, and #z,

taste, fae perspire, and ae endure, are exceptions in
the Causal Optative; as, aeufa, fa wre fanfic.216 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

Verbs ending with a vowel, when they do
not insert =, require the vowel to be made
long, if it isnot so; as, al, give, featafa; =
sacrifice, Axata; w do,t ateta ; z die, TART.

When = is not inserted, goon is not ad-
mitted ; when it is, goon is required.

Roots with an initial consonant and a penultimate
x or S take or omit goon, when € is inserted; those
with < followed by @ always take it; wa kill, and Rez

‘ ~,
cry, omit it. As, Faq write, fafaufeata or faafaufr. “
rejoice, HUTT BA oF HAS Bafa.

= must always be inserted according to

the rules of the Future; as, ata, faatfaafe ;
=

fey—at, fafeata; at, famtata; fey—s,

fetetaata, feafafa, and fatrafa.

Roots with a final & do not admit the insertion of
x; those with a final S€ or after a compound conso-
nant have both forms ; so also those that end with 4, or

X
that have two forms in the 2d Future. As, Y—H, ob-
tain, ayuin ; q pass over, fanfyafa or faattafa and

Ce c
faritea; xa be crooked, feaftufa and Sanit; fga
play, feefaufa and Paula 3 vem dance, faafaefa and
frre; ai be, Active fagrefa, Middle faafaaa.

= respect, a hold, a purify, and fq smile, take es

©
as, feafefa, faufaata, fewfaun. WER anoint,
AX—KH pervade, 5 throw, T vomit, Ri heat, u praise,CHAP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 217

<

& make a noise, and ¥ aim, take =, but have not two
forms ; as, Faaftafa, eefaahi, &e. 3 mix, H nourish,
(Ist conj.) @ skreen or serve, and serve, have two
eA NRL a =
forms ; as, aqufa and faafaafi, auufa and faufrufi,
frstafa and frsafaali. dem cleanse, dfauisn.

fi aA cure, doubt, 74 despise, Tas forbear, Ty 7re-
Braaah, ae judge, qtcut, Wi sharpen, with tle meane
ing's affixed, are always inflected like Optatives: they
do not insert £. As, fafarafa, Hawa, fafa, ahaa,
aTaraa, &e. at give, ul hold, at measure, fr throw, FY
kill, ago, HH sound, Wa meaning inpere, au Lain,
and We a be apie: omit the red iplication and the inser-
tion of =, and change their vowels to =. As, ferafa,
farafa, forea, Pear, fieefa, Paws, focaria.

SIU possess, makes wri ; WU increase, Saif ae
sfefuafa; fa collect, fesafa, Pastata; fat conquer,
Taalafr ; WY cause to strike, tafa and nae
extend, Taafaufa, fatiefi,

Teepe, or i waver.

4

fasigits gar boast, wrefr,

aauin, Gael Peale oi a cail, Causal sRraf

They are all regular after the Present; as.

auta, egtata, <fgar, Eyta Kc.218 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART II.

SECTION VI.

OF

THE FREQUENTATIVE VERBS.

The Frequentative verbs are used to ex-
press the repetition or intenseness of any
action; as, atataa, he asks again and
again.

They may be formed from any other
verbs which do not begin with a vowel, or
which have not both a penultimate and final
vowel. When derived from verbs of motion,
they express only the obliquity of the act.

Frequentatives are of two kinds, Active
and Deponent; the latter are most common-
ly used.

They are formed by reduplicating the first
syllable of the root by goon or vriddhy ; af-
fixing = with the inflections, as in the Ist
conjugation, for the Deponent ; or simply
affixing the inflections, as in the 2nd or 3rd
conjugation, for the Active; as, ata, Dep.
aTaraya ; Active, atatfa.CHAP. IV. |

SYNOPSIS OF ‘THE FREQUENTATIVE VERB.

DEPONENT.

- Participles.

Imperative. . Potential. Precative. Subjunctive. Jnfinitive,

Indicative.

STITT ATA

ae

al

&

Taya Aarasat

Pres.

ETYMOLOGY.
to’
rE ee
Ga .G
5 is
= Be oe
ro
ov] owBetaby p4
pile
By
ge
a ae
by
ad
oe tee
br
By
b tolom | eovhard
boo a als
eee hes
EEE e
bob Ee
ep ob & &
ae he S
See ee pe

PASSIVE.

aaa, &c.

219

~

¢
a.
G~

ee

ata

wr

ARTA,

“~

5

atarad

=~.
aT,

“~
alga
G

“~

a 5 UIIUTS 5

~

So efeua, FetabQ
bQ
on

SYNOPSIS OF THE FREQUENTATIVE VERB.

ACTIVE.

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART If.

bb’ 3

ip ee
Eoimeak? seet eee Boys
5 E — F&F
ES B Be grostz
iF ~ Ss tie
: —
a Ww is Bs Be fe
iy Ic? ts re
é ta ie
2 | re (ke
at EY
te’ E
£ : e
pe lad A ee
S bs qe
F E
ao ae (e
© , 2 | ic
Fs By (le
Ic’ :
i= &
S BT ~~
Sie ian | Oia Agee
mu oO (
.
ie ey
See ee ae
fk iP,
i iv ic “ee
id salicol ete. a
ote te Se ee ae &
Sih Be ade cobra bee ons ci Bale
oy oF eee ee ee
Sas cs gee

2 . om [lg fe SD

Sees ere es Zz

Root Rt ON“CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 223

They admit of two forms in the singular of the
Present, the 3rd and 2nd sing. of the Imperfect,
and the 3rd sing. of the Imperative. As, araif or
aaa, ararag:, atarafa; Imperfect, sara or
HAAS ; Imperative, aarqy or qraraty, &c. So ez
or fa tfa, &c,

Roots with apenultimate ¥ and finalua——z,
insert + in the reduplication; those with a
final g, w, a have both forms ; as, aa, FIT ;
eq move, Dep. seya or arama, Act. Sxfy
atata, and q-atfa at<atfa, &c.

SY mutter, sx cohabit, ial hite, qe burn, ue bind,
We break, and ey curse, take a. aH, aA, aS move,
aed, HE, GA, fall, ay_ deceive, and er-a_leap, take
at. As, TUN; yale or Tele. eataya; Talia,
&c.

A penultimate 3 or §T requires vriddhy in
the reduplication ; any other vowel requires
goon; as, araraa, hea.

Verbs with a penultimate or final gz change
it to <t in the Deponent, but have three
forms in the reduplication of the Active ; as,
BZ, Ritga; aaa, afcafe, or attafy. Then
ata or wHOfa; afcaufd or afeazifa, &c.
So ta dance, adtzaa, vata, afcara, aA e.

Se a emo as Lp eR Sdn ect nese ee

REE GTN Sata
a it eran me (i oy

age
Pe Were

ore

Saeeyposc

DP I leer roe a
Pai

pas
Ra ater re ae

peice222 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Ik:

When # is preceded by a double consonant, it be-
comes aq instead of 1; as, @, remember, aeyarn,
aah, Bite. dew cleanse, makes Gaal aa.

Verbs with a final yt or diphthong change
it to = in the Deponent, and to ¥T or Z in
the Active; as, 41 give, eatad; <tatfa or
ajata, alata, atata, &c. So 7 sing, AUTAT 5
simtfa or atafa, &e.

The penultimate or final vowel requires
goon only in the Present Active; as, Taz
cul, Afraa, aafa or afuctfa; Perfect,
ataatata; Future, afafeat; Indef. safrata.
So ¥, areaa; areata or awatfa, tqatatea,
arufaar, sratgata, &c.

Contrary to rule HE Move, AN eat, Fa urine, ua make
known, Ya dispose in order, are used as Frequentatives ;
and X= approve, and yw shine, are not. As, SI fTaya,
a SIA; awite; aay, aTaa fa, arastfa, &e,

lL vomit, at move, act, 1a mutter, aH cohabit, Tal
bite, ~@_burn, a7 obliterate, when used as Frequenta-
tives, express the disgrace of the act.

The following words are irregular in the
formation of the Present, &e.

* sound, rae or ATLAM 5 araifa, &c.
wa dig , agra qWeqd; wefa. -CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 223

7 swallow, SfrTaa ; arta satya.

qt smell, SHiat; Safa, syafa. So wt kindle.

aX act, yaya 5 aafai aii fir.

Ta worship, Salad; safe Saez.

faa play, Rfeaa ; Safa, earfa, Veta.

Rea produce, GaeTa 3 uate Umeilfir.

a skreen, aaa; a afa, aaetta, araifa, arafi.

aM sleep, Beat 5 ararty, aredifa, arafa, wreuifa.
aA sound, Bfa Ta ; wUTa, afaat, wrap, Wagar
ul abandon, S#laa; Sreifa, Hrefa, Harfa, Tafa.

 

 

SECTION VII.
OF THE NOMINAL VERB.

Nominal verbs are used to express the
becoming, doing, declaring, imitating, or
longing for, what is meant by the simple
word. They are commonly derived from
Nouns or Adjectives in their most simple
state.

1. Those of becoming what is meant by
the simple word, are of two kinds: the one
Active, and the. other Deponent. A final 4
or q of the word is dropped. ¥tz_ is added
for the Deponent, and the vowel, or final a,994 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART Il.

a

of the word is dropped. When formed,
they are like verbs. of the lst conjugation.
As, 7 intense, wxfa or YRTIa, he becomes
intense ; ata pure, Utata or Walda; Tea
greal, vefa or TEiad; CAEL aoe. wate
or WaTaa.

RAM pity, Rul compassion, wy virtue, frst sleep,
Ha blue, were sound of jumping, Rm froth, qaqa
mail, wE good, az bad, aifea red, and eta green,
have three forms ; as, ARUIfA, RRUalA, OF ARWITT 5
apes, afeaafa, aifeatad, &c.

2. Those of doimg are of three kinds:
ist, those formed by inserting =, like verbs
of the 10th conjugation ; 2ndly, those form-
ed like Actives by affixmg a, and changing
the fmal gor =t of the word to <; a) Srdly.
those formed by adding rz, like Deponents
of the Ist conjugation. As, wa a quarrel,
aaa he quarrels, or makes a quarrel ; Te
cloth, waata; ara salutation, anata ; AWS
a scratching, weata ; LE_ sound, KEWA; HT
trouble, RETHE.

When = is inserted, the final vowel or a

of the word is dropped ;_ but words which

7 ° ~
have only one vowel, and yy meaning, @=CHAP. IV. | _ ETYMOLOGY. 225

the Vaida, and aa true, add srw. As, aat
an army, Btaewata he meets anarmy ; staa
an elephant, afreaata he passes over by an
elephant ; @ own, aravafa he does his own

/® me 8 :
work ; surgaufa he explains.

Se happiness, makes wetafn he makes happy, waraa
he enjoys happiness. So z:@ troudle.

Ta sin, makes neta he destroys sin; wey form,

wuafa he sees a form ; wa hand, eaafa he raises his

hand,

The Adjectives that are irregular in their
comparisons are also irregular when = is
inserted ;_ as, ataa near, acata ; aa lean,
RTA, &e. -

wu life, ETA envy, aS an tiching, a captivating,
and a= sin, have two forms when z is affixed; faa
surprise, HE worship, and RTwt shame, have only the
Deponental form; as, seas or REaA fadian &e.

SyYa_heat, wa smoke, Hay froth, and are steam, are
used with sa to express the ascent of what they

~ 7 °
mean; as, Sylar, the heat rises up.

3. Those of declaring are formed by in-
serting = in the same manner as the first of
the above; as, = God, ewafa he declares
one godly ;- He married, Beata he calls one226 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART Il.

married ; TH a question, WAafa he propounds
a question. Some of these are like Causals;
as, aicafa fhe asserts him to be the doer:
ayata he declares him to be bound, &c.

sqrzy amule, makés szgafa; sirgrta a hypocrite,
ae : N =~ ,
Bremait; arsitisa foolish, weisafa ; sary a white
horse, sqaafi he declares the horse white.

4. Those of imitating have two forms
like those of becoming; as, w= lame, wafa
or wytaa he imitates the lame ; aa dumb,
wate or RATA A he initates the dumb ; ax4 a
good man, exafa or axatad he attempts to
act ke a good man.

When the idea is that of personating, &
is afixed to the word; as, ate@ a servant,
aretata he personates a servant ; 94 a mas-
fer, wuata he personates a master ; Wiate
a palace, wtatatata aeyt in his hut he re-
presents himself as in a palace.

Imitative words, sya a nymph, and Sse strength,
\ \

drop the final €; all others have two forms: as, H'@vfa

~ ; . ~ =.

or AEH; TIE milk, Vafa or vaefa, Walaa wen.

Mla neuter, WH clever, and Ye a wager, are used only
in the Deponental form; as, aftqa or Alaa.CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 207

9. Those of longing for, are formed by
a q <A final gy or ic is changed to
%, % to tt, FH to W, and 3it to ata, when q
is affixed; and 4, and aq preceded by a con-
sonant, are dropped. As, 74 a son, Tatafa
he desires a son; tz a mother, Riwtafa he
longs for his mother; Ft a cow, wate ; aT @
boat, safa ; <taqa king, cstafa; ad a
descendant of Gurga, wuitafa.

at desire, may be affixed instead of a;
as, Faarate.

Words ending with a, and Indeclinable
words, take only 714; as, faa what? taawata
what does he want ? @qz hedten, Satara he
wants heaven.

To express intenseness of desire @ is add-
ed to the word previous to affixing =; as,
sry a horse, syafa he desires a here Cx-
ceeding ly; atx milk, atrcafa. xf, curds,
makes «fyufa and <wzafe.

AWA an eating, makes awgarafa he longs to. eat ;
Sqr water, sy-ain he longs to drink; wa wealth,

waraia he longs to possess wealth; or regular, 31x atafi
he desires food, &c.

All words formed by a may repeat it in the On
tive; those beginning with a vowel may repeat any228 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.
letter but the first; most may repeat any or every letter
in the word; as, mS, Opt. mag fafaain 5 araqlaft,
safes or afeslfaafa s yttafa, gyatfasta,
ufastifaefa, qalfafasfa, or yafaalfafastt-

Verbs formed by the insertion of = are
inflected like those of the 10th conjugation ;
all others like those of the Ist. As, aaafa,
ada, aafsa, Fanta; wafa, SxtAata,
lat, HUERTA.

Those of the 10th conjugation have two
forms in the Indefinite; as, wfa a deed,
aagta, Satqast or WaqAa; ata a quarrel,
and “fa a plough, have only the latter form.

Those ending with a consonant that afhx
a have two forms in the Future ; as, afay
sacrificial wood, atayfa. Future afatayat or
atateyat.

 

 

SECTION VII.
OF THE ANOMALOUS VERBS.

Some verbs, with certain prepositions or
meanings,are irregular in their voices. TheseCHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 229

are to be considered as partially and occasi-
onally Anomalous.

a do, with s1q or Wr; fay throw, with aff, afr,
or Sf; We forbear, with aft; Ta_enjoy, with ay, uff,
or fq; and @¥ carry, with 9, are used only in the Ac-
tive: as, sr atiht he imitates, ayfafaafa he throws
beyond, aftaefa he entirely forgives, srafa he reco-
vers, fatufa he stops, gaefa it flows on.

t# with Sy is used in both voices; as, SuyAfr or
surad he marries.

So sm throw, and RE examine, with any preposi-
tion, and qH_ step, without one; as, fayeqfa or fatea
hethrows out, Wyafa or a he collects, alafa or FAA.

The following are used only in the Mid-
dle :—

a do, with afa, su, su, andy; with fa when
Intransitive, or with an Objective case
meaning sound. * As, sfuaan he over-
comes, SURRA he accuses, aafanaa the
wind blows, @tta_ fanaa he varies the
notes of the tune.

% throw, with 319, when it has a quadruped or
bird for its Nom.; as, sarareata the
dog scratches.

MRA step, meaning devoted to, or enlarge, with St
meaning the rising of the heavenly
bodies, with sq andy meaning begin,

e ©
and with fa meaning step ; as, Baa230) SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IT.

e s e e :
wa or WayaTaran he is intent on virtue,

Cs - > th 6 —_ h
Way Braywy the sun rises, samRAA he
begins, faaan he steps.

al buy, with a4, oft, or fa; as, qaataia he buys
from, faxiata he sells.

ATS play, with 34, sa, si, aff, and a when it
does not mean creak; as, sags he
plays.

wW sharpen, with wi; as wena he sharpens.

q swallow, with 34 or with © meaning promise ;
as, S1afara Ae swallows hardly, <fura
he promises.

SY move, with SA_and an Obj. case, or with W and
an Inst.; as, WARS he transgresses,

~\ ® a °
S34 Wata he rides.

fs conquer, with au or fa; as, awstan he defeats.

RI Anow, with sy, 3¥f#, or d, and when Intransi-
tive; as, sasTaty he denies, ofa atata
he promises,

u praise, With a; as, say he sounds out. So also

~
We ask, sige he asks,
aw burn, with 34, 34, and fa when Intransitive
\
or Reflective; as, staat he renents,
OifwawaA he warms his own hand.
qI—fa, give, with a1 when it does not mean yawn;
and @1 with @ when it takes the 3rd
instead of the 4th case; as, s1eH he re-
cetves, STi WawA he gives to the girl.CHAP. IY. | ETYMOLOGY.

KO

ol

1@] meaning Abies ; as, aia he blesses. So Wy mean-
ing swear by or to; as, WA he swears.

mt cake, meaning be wise, worship, with SA_or Sy, and
with fg when it means pay, give, or the
object relates to some quality in the agent;
as, Tam he is skilful, or he worships ; Suaaa
he invests ; faaaa he pays, or Ra fraay he
suppresses his own anger.

43] save, meaning eat, enjoy ; as, Wa he eats,

am cease, with SU; as, SyaHT he marries or receives.

qs_unite, with =a, or a preposition ending with a
vowel, when the object is not a sacrificial
vessel ;_ as, SUR he prepares, gam he
orders.

az speak, meaning be skilful, inform, with sa when
Intransitive, with fa, withfa and y mean-
ing disagree, and with € and ¥ meaning
articulate in concert; as, azn he is skilful,
S yaa he informs or instructs, BWaaza he
speaks after, faazn he disputes, fayaza he
differs in opinion, jaz they pronounce
together.

faw enter, with fa; as, fafawa he enters,

4 hear, with ¥ when Intransitive ; as, WAH he hears.
So RR 20, 1% ask, and aq sound.

%1 stand, meaniig assert, stand to, with 34, ¥, fa, a,
with sy meaning intent upon, and with S4
meaning stand by, worship. St with su,
meaning stand by for the sake of gain,
may be used in both voices; as, aifaea he232 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

asserts, afa fare rit stands with you, sata Ba
he departs, afasa he is weil, aq manor he
as intent on liberation, wiyaufaea he
stands by or associates with the good.

=

e call, with et meaning challenge, and with su, fa,
fa, ¥; as, srg he dares or challenges,
fagay he calls.

Verbs meaning act like others are used in the Mid-
dle; those meaning move, injure, speak, laugh, are ex-
+" eee fea sates: #/ ts like the
cepuions ; as, Bjmna stalAve:, fhe moon acts like the
e e “~ ‘7
sun, 1. e. rises and sets; Ofratar they steal alike ;
c oy & y°
afiqufa they go alike; afieafar they laugh alike.
In the Causal, verbs meaning eat, tremble, and €, ¥
— ~~
f aL "~ \ , a » VY 7
§0, F& hear, qu unde stand, and aa fight, are used only
e e ~n, is
in the Active; as, ursafA he causes to eat, he feeds ;
amafa he makes to tremble ; siaala he causes to run.
Intransitive verbs with an inanimate agent; those used
in a reflective sense, except @ remember, wea and ay
c ~
meaning deceive, and =I meaning worship, or with aa
meaning overcome, are used only in the Middle; as,
Bp: fat Te = aes 2 es th rorn t lyy : Wala
ay! Viyjsa WaT the sun causes the corn to ary 5 ABTA
cn - - . @ e~
RaW he shews himself to the believers ; aa AAA or
aN . ; e ~ ze
aaa he deceives the child; seifrargan he worships
re at ° ~
with clotted hair; = wmraan he overcomes.

In the Optative =t know, when not preceded by 9 ;
hear, not preceded by sit or gf; and @q remember,
q e n ° ~
are used only in the Middle; as, faarea he wants to

\ \
know. So Wauq and Wasa,
~~ 9 ~ ACHAP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 233

The following verbs, which are irregular
in more than one of their principal tenses,
may be considered as entirely Anomalous.
They are alphabetically arranged. ‘The cha-
racteristics distinguish their conjugations.

sisi, move, throw. Present s=fa, &c. Perfect faara,
laaqy:, fag:; 2. faafae fare anfsre, fare,
faa; 1. faara faaa, fafa sufaa, fafa
sifsa. Fut. afsar aay. Indef. sy sit
sia ata. coe Part. Perf. faatad.
Fut. afsaaq, aaa, aaata, SIsy, 44. Indef.
sifamt, der, wata. Passive dtaq. Part.
Ind. afRa aq.

s3=—3, ad, eat. Pres. STF, s77:, sefa. Imperfect
SRA, STU, STA, &e. Perf. sre and
STYIG, Sieh: Her: STs HA, &c. Fut.
Stat. Indef. FIV, KIPAt, Sa Ta. Part.
Perf. Act. sijgae SIs. Pass. seta
sain. Indef. a7 sa, 33 TAA, Sql WSR.
Optative verb faramafa, &c.

au—a, be, is thus inflected: —

Se

axes oe

ACTIVE, a

PRESENT. IMPERFECT. f
as ii

Sing.» Dual. Plural. Sing, Dual. Plural, Hs
3. Sia eee ara o. HiMia, svat = Sica i
23 ww wl 2 S18 sre Sra A

Llsjfq @q @& lee sq seq iWH

934 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART I.

IMPERATIVE. POTENTIAL.

Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing, Dual. Plural.
3a WO WA 3. SA INT UW;
2. wfa a @ 2. at Qqiq  wyir
l. safe sara Wee 1. at qq 86a

So Wife and =faq.

MIDDLE.
PRESENT. IMPERFECT.

Sing, Dual. Plural. Sing, Dual. Plural.
nr aN =~ =N Pe :

oOo. GW Ra aq o Se ST svat

Q5ihe wy = 2. Tw: sltyi sws

] ~ ~\ ~ te eee! ¥ f

SUR 0 Se OS lLsife sraiq sag
IMPERATIVE. POTENTIAL.

3. Rt Wat OWA 3. Mt Wat MT,

2. a wis = 2. dar dag de

= = = = o~
1. % wae | ws li da wWafe dae

So afra.
Perfect, Act. Sra, Brea: s1e:. Middle sie, sam,
afar Act i ve of ¢:
wey. Act. Part. Pres. ne Perfect SUVA, STA.
uy, be, supplies the deficiencies of the preceding verb
and makes Present wa'q, &c. Perfect axa,
<q
SYA, THA, &e. Fut. waar. Indef.
juA, SAAT, s
SWF, SHA, Sra a.

E—s, move. Present Ufa, xa:, afar, &c. Imp. a,
Vii, SUT, &c. Imperative UA, EAL aaa, Re.
Potential: ali. Perfect xa, faq, Ea; 2.

zafaq and rau, &c. Fut. wat. Indef. SUIT,
BMA, ATs, &c,CHAP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 2395

—£—a, F,g0, with safe read. eee Ba, & satan,
salam, &c. Imperfect so} 1, Swyatat, syan,
&c. Imperative sy Wai. Potential sphata.
Perfect afusi, afusaa, sfasfnz. Future
sryat. Indefinite sete and sare. Sub-
junctive system and sper uA, Part. Pres.
sina; Perf. sfasaia; 2d Fut. svaparara.
Passive syataa, &c. Part. Pres. AwaAzala ;
Fut. SAA, ST wifaaaw ; Indef. sar.
Causal verb sj xrqafiz. Indef. 3ST Elf paar or
ssid. Optative verb 3 fufautan. Catt
sal Opi. srmifaufaaty or Sfapaaafa af.

a a, 5, cover. Pres. Active Hui iff ane awit, Mid.
Por one Active RUA, HU = aaa,
HUA; 2. sw afay awa fey YAW Cae, &e,
Mid. Huda. Fut, sai Sura nr, Indef.
Breas 3] Waa and Sra, So the Mid,
awhis, &ce. Pare au ay. Opt. verb aU-
afaufa mwafa fa and atiqaht, Frequent.
verb, Dep. BUTT 5 Act. awrelfi.

m—fa, %, £0. Pres. 2afa, La, EaTT. Imperfect Fa:,
vari, tax: Imp. Fay. Potential Ia.
Perf. S1%, SUTH, sre: Fut. sy. iifder.
surety and ATA. Prec. STANT. Pass.
saya. Indef. sate. With @ when Intran-
sitive afaaa. Causal verb syyafir ase verb
sfcitafi. Frequentative verb aqreat ; Sitfi.
GIS, H, &, explain. Pres, aaa, aa, aay. Perf,
THY, SIT, Taft. Fut, aferat x @y 1. Indef,236 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

aafay, safer, safeouy; and sae,
WJaepin, snag. Act. Fut. gegr. Inde.
sq. 2d Fut. wepyfa. Subj. saan. Part.
ée a” \
Pres. awata; Perf. SH Ta; Indef. ay
alarm = a1 STAT. Passive aan &e.
a Z
TA—ad, Sil, go. Pease TT, Tea, TR lat. Perf.
3. SUH, SAA, STA; 2. aafag say,
sway, ava; l. ANA Raa, afraa, afraa. Ist
Fut. aa. 2nd Future afRafa. Indef. saaz.
\
Part. pres. Ixe7; Perf. Act. Hfrrae aa-
\ N
waa, fem. avAuT. Pass. svata; Indef. aq,
\ a)
73 e 2 2 5 " 7
WaT, Tar. With 4 when Intran. Uy Ria.
Indet. wana, Wane. Prec. wads, Uy Ute.
Opt. verb faafaufa. Frequent. verb, Dep.
nN
ayy; Act. aH SH alfa.
ee mA ¢ = SE 1 se
1E—H, Fy hide, Pres. qeit or wW. Perf. Act. FTE,
~ Ae
SITET, HIE; 2. saftey sare, &c. Mid.
saq &c. Fut. a?eat aver. Indef. Act.
eerry os Wera : AS 3 ;
STRTT STTAA 5 Mid. swam and We,
sf Stat and HIgqAt, SafeaT and syqaya.
‘es. WEA def.
Part. Pres. WEA . Indef. 1G, AEA TgI.

Py eae 4 =
Fut. ay and atq. Opt. a svqaia, &e,
FE—T, H, take. Pres. @IfA, eli, ein. Perfect

SITE, HATTA :, SEs, &e, Fut. ata. oe
verb fF Psreer in faSo Saif be old, F3a—fx
deceive, and @y—a, St kitl, in cheefaes.
and Perf, as, faaifr; fast, fsisqi,:, Fase.
fasfas fagrs, fafaam:, fafass. -faurfa ;
faqie, fafauas, fajau:, &e,CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 237

4a—a, s, ape Hes, "By, Gala, aaa, &c. Perf.
Waal, Fs ae. Fut. Fiat and wrat Indef.
sige and sqm. With d meaning aban-
don, Wuafae. Act. Perf. ad aa. Fut,
as velorgs Indef. sareta Wywa. Prec.
grain aA, ara Wat. Passive Raa wag

sa—fa, a, produce. ee asta, Asa: Safa, &c.
Pot. ATI and 3 STATA Perf. 31a,
SINT, St: Prec, HWA STATA With
af. Pres. 3. ofassia, ofan, wfasat:
2. afisfer, aise, ofistaa; afana,
afasnsafe, Ofnsafe. Pass. wwe or
sraq. Part. Present RT 5 afaa. Perf.
sistqq. Fem. sTaet. Indef, afer.

aA—a, F, a, e, produce. Pres. 31a", aan, stan, &c.
Perf. 3a, sa, Safar, &c. Indef. sstfa or
asafae, ssfauat, safaun. Parts. Pres.
staata ; Perf. sara; Fut. sa ara. Indef.
sa, stfarat. Causal verb, waafa. Freq. verb.
Dep. Sareaga or sHTaA:; Act, seafar.

II—a, a, awake. Pres. suafas, &c. Perf. SF FAMIT and
samara. Indef. sysiaqta. Part. SDA 5
Perf. sea and ssimaa; Fut. stares.
Indef. sma. Pasaice sae. Perf. sant
Stmrare. Part. Pres, STATA, SM PaA :
Perf. sstatia ssvgia. Indef. araftz.

& ftzt—a, a, be poor. Pres. efiztfa, ehilen:, Tfreih.
Perf. afte and eftgrare. Fut. = fifear.
Ind, BRST Sziisx1et7_. Prec. Tits.238 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

Passive efrsqv. Opt. verb feaftfeufn,
fee itaretn.

Zi—s, 4, Ki, decay. Pres. dan, &c. Perf. fezia,
fe stam, feaiiat. Fut. eat. Ind. sere,
scram, stetaa. Indef. Part. eta. Opt.
verb feean or feal ua.

TU—EL Si, see. Active Pres. ayufa, ayant, wsgfa.
Perf. 3.2 e8, TEU, TEN; 2. TT ing,
eae, &c. Fut. eet Ind. yeaa, and
BRU. Parts. Pres. way; Perf. [gaye
and TT iwaa 5 Ind. Tes = at. With 3
when Tntransitive, wagwga, &c.

I—S, >, speak, Pres. 3. galfa and Srz, QT: SRT,
af, Se; 2. FaIPa Sra, 2a: SRA, FA;
t. anfa, aa, gr. Imperf, wyala, SAA
saaa. Imper. ¥ata, gat, gat. Pot. gar.
Middle aH, gain, gan, &c. Parts. Pres.
gaq; Midd. gaty. The other parts are
supplied from et, 31, speak, which
makes Pres. aff, Perf. sarg. Fut. amit.
Ind. sataa. Prec. SST It is deficient
in the 3rd pl. of the Pres. and Imper. Part.
Pres. aan; Fut. aa, ataq 3; Ind. sa, Sar
ara]. Pass Se. Perf. aq. Fut. aqit.

yq—YT, Sh, =, fry. Pres. Act. wssifa 5 Mid, yaaa 5

; Perf. Act. ays and aqss. Mid. ass,
Sassy. Fut. WI or 4B. Ind. Act. Sra A,
Salata. Mid. aye. Opt. verb fanfsiahy,
foatsrals, find, terete.CHAP. Iv. | ETYMOLOGY. 239

a—s, fx, die. Pres. feat, and regular as a Depo-
nent; but has also Perf. Act. wart; Ist
Fut. ay; 2d Fat, afraftr.
qI— a, S, cleanse. Pres. mfe, AEs, qafa or AIsifat,
&c. having two forms when a vowel fol-
lows. Perf, wars, AAA: AAS: ') AAS:
“WATS: ; 2. nafs wats &c. Fut. nite
and aret. Indef, . sarsity and saetp i.
Parts. Pres. asia and HIS; Perf. AYSAT ;
Fut. qsq andi Ay ; Indef. A®, afer, HET;
Freq. verb, mMASTA ; nate, aarst far.
qy—ai, desire. Afe, Se:, safes, &c. changing 4 to
: = where goon is not admitted, Imperf.
HAE, Sri, SYA. Perf. Sarg, ayy, HM.
Fut. afar. Indef. syasiq, SAT. Prec,
syn. Parts. Pres. SHA, Indef. = faa,
afxrar, sy. Passive sya,
fame—w, go. Present faxefa and faxaqrafa. Perf,
‘ fafase faspratarg. Fut. fafagat faxerfaar.
Indef. sfaagtt, sfasgrita. Frequent. Dep,
Sfaaqn ; Act. aafe, date, afaseiia.
faz—a, understand. Present 3. af ae, faz
faze, facto fags; 2. ate tay, faa: faery,
faq, fae; 1. dfs de, faa: faa, fag:
faq. Imperf. 3. saa, van, sfaga and
eifaz:; 2. aA and 3143; Imper. az and
faziatia . Perf. fade, faziara. Parts.
Pres. fara Perf. fa lage, faga. Ind,
fafen, fafer. With © when Intransi-
tive dfaea ; Opt, verb, fajafeufa.

ea en pa TE aoe
Se SS SESE pee Teed —

=

ar yo

SEIN a
SoU ere ETE

FS cin Woes nee .

ann:

Se ee

Sew eee

ea ater omen
= Sahert > :240 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. __|[ PART II.

W—s, =, lie down. Pres. 3. Yt, Wala, Rta; 2.
Ue, Way, Wea; l. wa, Wafe, wate. Perf.
fu, fxn, fafeyt. Fut. wfaar. Ind.
siwfag, &c. Freq. verb, Dep. xtwaqn;
Act. Raft, RAFF.

fs3—z-{, T, st, increase. Pres. sqafa. Perf. fazgra,
Pafagan:, Fe Pgass and Wars, Yay:, WTA:,
&c. Fut. syfaar. Indef. Ba, sfqiaqar,
and ST7gi. Prec. Ware. Pass. Yar. Part.
Pres, 3447; Perf. FUpqae, Was ; Fut.
feqa; Indef. yfaa. Causal, Opt. frsgrafaafa
or q=grafaufa. Frequent. Dep. y>sa7q and
waa; Act. yafa and RraufA.

Bas Sl 31, strike, kill, Pres. “fa, @a:, af; 2.
efa, &c. Imperf. BWA, ATA, Ayqa.
Imper. a=, Ea, Ga; 2. safe, &c. Perf.
Sala, HAW, HY; 2.5ufay, waa, &c.
Ist Fut. Sa; 2d Fut. wfasfa. Indef.
gauia. Prec. aqia. Pass. aq. Perf. ag.
Fut. wait and uifam. Ind. safa suerte.
Part. Pres. qt, WaAah, afar; Perf. sfg-
qu, STH ; Fem. SAU. Perf. Passive
sqia; Ind, wa, ea. Caus, verb uraafa,
Opt. verb faraiefr. Frequent. Dep, stz-
waa saaq. Act. staf, staat. With
si, when Intransitive or Reflective, it is
used in the Middle; as, sirea, he is ill;
ST saa, he smites his own breast. Ind.

SUS, SVafaeE or etafaw.CHAPTER v.

OF ADVERBS.

Adverbs, though very numerous, may be
all arranged under the following classes :—~

Ist. Of Number: as, tact, once. trr,
twice. Tra, thrice. ayq, Jour times. All other
words take AAT; as, waa, five times,
&ec. ataa aE, how many times ? TUR TA,
many times.

2ndly. Of Order : as, TIAA, Jirst; tectra:,
secondly ; and so on, by adding a: to the
ordinal numbers.

drdly. Of Distribution. These are form.
ed by aT; as, Gqat of four kinds, way of a
hundred sorts. waone, makes tarxt and Cay;
Te two, text, Far, Sy ; St three, faa, Tat,
au; WT six, FIST and Ftsyt.

4thly. Of Time: as, 3a, to-day. TAT,
zatat, cafe, aafa, now. Aw, Weatyz, Wa,
to-morrow. Rt, FE, when? acIfea, ATTA,
sometimes. al, ate, aatat, then. qet, ate, when,242 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

face, fad, Tacg, PHCCTATS, @ long time, lone
since. fzat, seta, by day. ata, Aa, <Tat, at
night. WTaz, Wi, im the morning. WU, the
day after to-morrow. Wa, last year. Geiic,
year before last. GUT, TERTA, before. Gata,
afterwards. uage, We, yesterday. Tq, Was,
hereafter. Xa, FAVA, TRUS, TITSAT, TITER,
at once, at the same time. Baz, Bute, ATMA,
at that or the present time. Gal, AAT, aqaet,
always. AAA, TATA, HAG, Had, TATA, Hlaca,
ward, Ward, ward, fre, wlrR, yA, con-
stantly, perpetually.
Some others are formed by <t and @a:; as,
saat, at another time. Baia, on another day.
5thly. Of Place: as, HA, KE, here. Fai,
xa:, hence. xawa:, hereand there. &, TA, FE;
where? Rx:, whence ? ata, somewhere. AZ;
there. a=, where. TA, BIA, NAL, Gt: oa,
WIA, TIA, before. Hae, behind. pa , FULT
Haz, within. Fra, afea, without. sa, above.
atu:, below. UXT, Sat, near. TIT, every where.
aazaa:, on all sides.

Several others are formed by 4: as, HU;

° ° &
in another place. Tea, inmany places. FaA;
in every place.CHAP. IV. | ETYMOLOGY. 243

Othly. Of Manner or Quality: as, xfa,
ea, Ta, thus. Sutx, secretly, unperceptibly.
HUA, HAA, UX, LU, as, excellently. taza, Fray,
atta, crookedly. feat, Bau, Te, gladly,
luckily. Se, 4%, aa, badly. ax, expiring ly.
aATx, only. Ata, TEER, variously. War, Weare,
qTz, ATL ATS, qe, Fe, Ha, Hate, acain,
repeatedly. wan, separately. tafa, &c. wWa:,
almost. Tat:, together. frat, at, Salsely. Hla,
art, wMtat, stlently, fat, AAT, HH, in vain.
ate, afed, yd, aw’, fad, aac, wie, afz-
atea, wfeta, sta, 7X, We, HIE, GA, quickly.
Wet, slowly. qe, IA, HAA, WaT, truly.
FHT, TTA, unexpectedly.

Adjectives in the neuter gender are fre-
quently used as adverbs of quality; as,
fafae, variously. qaqa, powerfully.

Some are formed by a: and aT; as, aaa:,
diligently. uaa, in all respects.

/thly. Of Quantity: as, afa, wats, afara,
Hye, Haars, Wa, nwo, AL, Aw, UPE, we,
waa, much, exceedingly. Exa, fatza, ware,
little. afta, fry, much, wat, Waa, aa,
enough. afue, less. arta, half.244 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART II.

Some are formed by =:; as, fax:, by twos.
gan, by few. afax:, how much? ata, so
much or many, &¢.

Sthly. Of Doubt: as, HTe, Save, Taae,
gat, but, suppose that. 44, perhaps. #a, “14a,
=

Ss
a, a, » if not, perhaps not.

9thly. Of Affirmation : as, Bay, faa,
fafea, wa, mdeed, really. BUH, WH, yes.
fama, we, truly. ata, evidently, possibly.
is an expletive.

10thly. Of Negation: as, 4, AT, aT, AS, AE,
afe, no, not. AI, At, Ata, ATH, are prohibitive ;
as do not, forbear. S, or Ha before a vowel,
signifies not, less, without ; as, TATU, with-
out cause. Fafa, emproperly.

llthly. Of Interrogation : as, Ta, wu, Far,
faaa, Tare, ate, wa, aa, how, what? a,
sa, fa, far, 3, Aa, TH, J, AT, TA, faa, = ®, are
used to denote earnestness of enquiring. 1s
an expletive.

\2thly. Of Comparison: as, £4, U4, 4,
as, like. eat, how ? TU, so. TAT, as. ATTA, as
much or long: ATaa, so much or long. TRI,
how much rather.CHAP. V. | ETYMOLOGY. 245

Any word may become an adverb of com-
parison by the addition of qd; as, WryTa,
like a clod. aeaa, like a fool. ttaqa, like a
king.

Some adjectives relating to time and place
are used adverbially, and admit of several
inflections; as, fax, fata, facra, facta,
tara, long ago. <&%, <zu, atta, er, at a
distance, &c.

CHAPTER VI.

OF PREPOSITIONS.

RE

Prepositions may be divided into two
sorts, Inseparable and Separable ; or they
may be called Prepositions and Postposi-
tions.246

I. INSEPARABLE.

gin composition.

Meanin

Simple meaning.

ata

farat great power.

afar

as, Kfardt power,

EXCESS ;

beyond,

possession ;

afqx over,

move,

~

eta

sequence ;

after,

as

SUNSCRIT
ies TS
Lath) ee

Be cle ates
oo ee
2S >
oS
ebb “
trim Pitelly
( ho &
by of ob

effect,

— wy

opposition ;

un, de,

By

~s

GRAMMAR.
2

a) ‘e
a5 c
Sse
So, eee | a5
a eae
s § 8
eee
ete
~ fF
a
SM
= Ss
ey Seo SS
Ss 5 8
Ne eae eS
ue fee Te
wr in
eg ae
a. 5 4
me
ome,
oe
Med 2 Cs
Se os
an
>
as uh
: ee
eo, 26
we tS ey
e¢ 5
im fe

repletion.

Ht

WT

yment,

e

T EnzO

os BET

extension ;

unto,
up,

Al

[ PART IT.

elevation.

bow,

~S

— UA

elevation ;

d

a@ paramour.

hell.

saat

— ufa husband,

ion ;

t

iminu

near,

SO

ra

©

aed

hy?

deterioration ; — ufa_ séate,

far,

rsCHAP. VI. | ETYMOLOGY. 247

: s
© 2
x e s * ®
Sa! ere ae PS eae
> = 2 So Sa ee oS
2 BSS > a 3 a> o~ e~ e
sS Ss o ~ © 8 = -S
oS oS Gy iS Soo. ~~ 2
tet IS
YONG eet ee fi, dae Be! pers ee
¢ = l= :
reve eee oe ee
ae Be Be Pg, Be ee, Bie Be
o
= SS SS
- = aS SSS pS SS
es Se S % =. as Ses, 6 Se) a
a ; ic E he! 5 by / a ee ic
mp ee REP Neat Ree rs be OB Ss
RG
Tar Pel ee
A, 3
rs = 5 a on 1 ex fas Sr
ee Ss @¢ 2 of
eS a SL ea Ree Ss
© N wD)
LY pad o =| of) oD = =e) ea o
s © rp) NM - fa} oe == pmers o mf
Qe fol ey 0) = eal
Foe. ee =
an fa o oo « OO Dd DB es OV
ee ar a ee a ee eee ee
2 GC a Ce ££ fs fe. oO @
a a
= rS n e
o md “a it ea ee =
s = = e 3 7 “~ “a 3 a
fs a 3 © & po ral 5 =
o “= r
"a
Pek ee oS we |
& €& bp p Pee DW w248 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART 11,

If. SEPARABLE.

The Separable prepositions are generally
taken from adjectives or adverbs ; as, way,
near, FAR: or FA, before, &c:

The following, in accommodation to the
Syntax, may be thus arranged :—

1. geyfy, in. HM:, beneath. Hart, between.

"SAE, without, except. afaa:, opposite to.

Sut, Sufe, sayute, over. sagqa:, on hoth
sides. afta, about; and aaa:, all round.
2. AE, He, Ula, aa, Waraa, with.

on SUCTaA, near. 40a, except. Wd, for. WT,
below. afea, without; and faat, besides,
except.CHAPTER VII.

OF CONJUNCTIONS.

—<>

Conjunctions are of two kinds, the Copu-
lative and the Disjunctive.

1. Copulative : a, and ; q, afd, afore, and,
also ; Ue, ate, tsa, sa, Taq, af; war, then;
wy, now, then, therefore; aq, Aa:, wherefore;
wa, at, therefore. qaqa, afaa, faz, wry,
and uty, again, moreover ; are used before
quotations. f¥ and sometimes @ and @ are
used as expletives.

2. Disjunctive : a, fay, but; xa, za, Gi, F,
as, even as; Faty, although; warta, watts,
yet; aT, Waal, Faeqr, or; az, aq, nor ; AaT, or
nol; ating, ata, afax, afax, arian, aifaz,
except; atzat, or otherwise. a4 and ‘¥ are
sometimes used as expletives.

a

me os PR SS
= See

PS

Se ger Soe

 

SS
aS ee OR

a eee SS eS SSS
a A Sgt SRE OIE Warr al <n ere eS ee ee ae et ee eee

eee eeCHAPTER VIIL

OF INTERJECTIONS.

=
Interjections are of various kinds.
BAF, Tu, Hel, Wetad, J, HT, Ht, ZT ZS *&> Bs
e my $ = ~S
are used in respectful addresses; ©, €T, €%:

~ = e ~
Stet in common ones; ute, wre, and Hf
in both.

He, , x) 7 are expressive of contempt;
We, &, of recollection; wea of affection ; =, €,
of regret; 3 and & of anger ;‘& of com-
mencement ; HARA, ATTA, TAS, of surprise ;
fete of laughter ; eee of gladness.

qye, OTHE’, Be, are used in common offer-
ings to the gods ; wre is used in offering
clarified butter ; «ar when offering to the
manes. wfa, =&, oh brave! See, wonder-
ful! sad! =, yes contemptuously ; ET yes
angrily; fra, woe! curse on it! ate:, hush!
aim, uy, usra, see! behold! awa, alas! see!
ata, health! St, surprising! lo! ea, ah!CHAPTER IX.

OF DERIVATIVE WORDS.

<< ———

Derivative words are principally of three
kinds, viz. Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs.

The Verbs have been already considered,
it remains therefore to treat only of Nouns
and Adjectives.

————
SECTION I.
OF NOUNS.

Derivative Nouns may be divided into
eight sorts; Patronymics, Gentiles, Amplifi-
catives, Diminutives, Abstracts, Verbals,
Denominatives, and Miscellaneous,

—<
PATRONYMICS.

Patronymics are formed from the original
word by lengthening the first syllable of it
by wriddhy; as, fea, ta, a descendant of She-
va; iraq, utaa, a descendant of Gotima.952 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART Il.

To some words a termination is added, and
the final letter dropped or inno The
terminations used are, w1aa, Arata, Wray
C08. ea a ee Fee eS,
BX, KE, EH, KA, GC, CT, TL, UT, Ke, aq, a.
AS, 4S, AISTHA, a cosconaene of Nuda; fax,
=
ATS fat, ae Teka ; aa, ASTI, of Kuna;
A
(TAT, alate, of aguana; <xeTy, <tixcfy, of
Dishinathe 5 <Tat, Safa, of Rawulee; Wie,
arate, of a brother > GTS, ATHTAT, of a
good mother; ata, airata, of Alry; Ae,
~ =
aext, of a courtezan; Beat, Bleuzt, of a
> ox ate
sparrow ; ae, aatata, of Vyas; aaut,
h i : ae 4 eee a
awitway, of a lappy woman; Wa, WIM, of
Gurea.
A finals is changed to s7q; as, a—area, a descend-
ant of Vudie; ae, atrefa, of Vahu. A final vowel or a
—»
is dropped, when va follows; as, Wat, nj74, an offspring
of Ginga; Usa, TiH4, of a king.
Compounds ending with wa, Re, fw, and a few
others, have the vowel lenethened} in both parts; as,
~ 7
HAT, wonifraag, of a fortunate woman, sc. In the plu-
ral number, the affixes are dropped; ai, ay, plural
mat, &e.
yy a
WR, a male, makes We; ul, a woman, WU; faautt, a
woman having three locks of hair, yaw ; % ET, a daugh-
ter, aTalas UTE, another man’s wife, ata; fayau,
Vishriwus, fax7amy and Taw.CHAP. IX. | ETYMOLOGY. 253

GENTILES.

Gentiles are formed in the same manner as
the above, by lengthening the first syllable
of the words, and sometimes adding Ra, =a
zq, Or {; as, WE, Ure, a citizen; fafau,
afwe, a man of Mithélé ; azz, minfya, of
M aS 3; Walay, araraeta, of Shitlatira ;
qt, atza, of Tudee; twa, titasay, of

Shindeka.

Some compounds have the first syllable of the last

3

part of the word lengthened; as, Wwais, Vursgra, of
Supunchala.

—=_a
AMPLIFICATIVES,

Amplificatives or Collectives are formed by
lengthening the first syllable of the word by
vriddhy. With the affixes eat, at, w, or at,
the first syllable of the word is not length-
ened; with <a, a, Ta, or gq, it is. As, ao,
ata, a number of fields. 7a, afsat, a collection
of lotuses. sa, RAAT, a multitude. We, Tite,
verbosity. st, wrat, a grass. Frau,
wraran, Pte loaves. Sara, STR, a herd of

bulls. 7xa, UTRag, man y MeN, KL, ae, much
hair.

Sp RES
a ene

i

if

i {

\

] a
4 i

het i
KG
EM t
a : @
hi iy
aj)

; ,
eich el
ibe
ae
hp
is |
Wal
15)

83)
bay! |

j
{
iy :

t
i
i 4

, 8
mye!
Wy
Ay
i
ate
ue

Ry a wertlaiec
SS SE Sp AE Sear294 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART IF.

aram is added for two cattle, and e314, for six; as,
‘~
aN ° <i e < uf
TANIA, @ par of cows ; wast, siz cows, 3a makes
afaae, a flock of sheep, and afave, the spreading of
sheep. 237, sig and Bata, many horses. Rea, HAA,
‘
~ & xc c
many days. Wt, Wt, a herd of cows. WX, Ulsg, many
5 a
ribs, ar}, 4am, and ayaa, many young women. TH,

Tqagql, many chariots.
<j
DIMINUTIVES.

Diminutives are formed by the addition of
R, AWM, AL, ATT, AW, RTT, UTM, ore; as,
va, saa, a small tree. afa, atta, a poetas-
ter. BY, Twat, a mule. ATE, aTHaET, @
small sort of weapon. fara, Treew, or
faseata, an ideol. Tara, fuaRuTH, a poor
doctor. et, Retz, a poor hut.

Compound names with za, xa, and Fa sometimes
drop one of their component parts; as, SIT T ; 2a-
eux, fan, efaa, efaa; or fas, efra, efia, Poor
Daividitta.

ee a
ABSTRACTS.

Abstracts are generally formed from Ad-
jectives by the addition of at, 4, £aq, or a.
Sometimes they are formed by simply length-CHAP. IX. | ETYMOLOGY. 299
ening the first syllable of the word; or by
adding to it 4, za, or & after it is lengthened.
As, ata, ateat, length. aaa, HASTA, man-
hood. wa, Liana, whiteness. aa, =a, a
message. Ax, atx, littleness. HAC, ATT ay,
sweetness. Sifa, aTaa, relationship. qs; qTaR,
wncrease.

When zaa is added, a final = is dropped; when the
first syllable of the word is lengthened, it is changed to
sa. As, @e, afeua, mildness. we, Wea, skilfulness.

Compounds which relate to a particular office are
formed by Fa and al; as, Atanas, the priesthood
of the Sun and Neptune. Wararegifaat, the scholarship
and teachership.

steq_ makes wlezg and SUS Ail, piety. qAm, ve and
tre, manliness, tal, aia and we, effeminacy. aa, aa
and qa, theft,

aa

VERBALS,

Verbals are such as are formed from ver-
bal roots, and signify either the simple act
of the original word, or that by which the
act may be accomplished.

The affixes used for words of this descrip-
tion are numerous.SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

[ PART II.

The following are the principal ones :—

TR as
WH
TH

STAT
Be a
WaT
Wey

NX

ce

ST o—

ATT

xt
‘\

or

RY —
~

=U

#4

I 4
ca

Gd ¢
ff

1%

7

cl op wy aA @ al

KA
X
‘a
eg
al
XN

4

ze

x:)|
a

7

4

aH

cal ci
?

7

al

RAR

gold.

a wave.
the eye.
sensation.
vertue.

an orb,

a word.

a word.

a country.
hghining.
a fan.

a cloud.
wine.

aur.

a flame.
the arm.
separation,
a bow.

a woman.
a sword.

a rod.

the ear.
understanding.
an anual.CHAP. IX. | ETYMOLOGY, 257

IT as cy aa a deed.

gy = AT HW the throat.
a ne ar ee a sleep.

AT — avy STSHT a: petition.
fa a. qT WT a gu Ip.

a — AT are the sun.

A = Ty TH war.

Wa he z THT armour.

St st aT ATT a roaming.

al

= — a fae a hole.

‘N

Verbs with the characteristic <, form nouns meaning
the simple act, by 31Y; those with the characteristic ¥
by aq. As, qu—z, aue, a trembling ; FAs, far, a
perforation.

Some nouns formed from verbal roots have the pe-
nultimate or final letter, or both of them, changed,
sometimes with _ removed, and sometimes with a ter-
mination affixed; as, fea, 94, a god, ean, a divinity.
Ry, Wa or Tue, fuel. 8, 4%, a hand, arta, a
cause. Hi, HI, a part, wir, luck.

age
DENOMINATIVES.,

Denominatives or Nouns of Agency are
formed from verbal roots by the affixes =a,
A, i, QV, Bl, B, Wa, a, and w298 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

AS, HT, WLR, a partner. AK, AA, A SON.

at, afan, a buyer. Ue, ates, a receiwer.

SU, GU, a friend. &X, FAX, a dog. Za, Za,

a dancer, WH, WAR OY HAA, A bear. WH,

S

nq, a traveller. F, Wy OY RITA, 4 doer.
Two nouns, or a noun and verbal adjective, are of-

ten used to form nouns of agency; as, 4%Ufa or

WU, YoUY, WUT, ey, Wia-4, a king.

There are many Nouns derived from other
words which cannot be classed under any
particular denomination, and which may
therefore be called Miscellaneous; as, ¥&;
wat, wat or efwat, earth, soil. rea; Tateat,
a large sheet. 3a, WA, away or road.
su, wurat, the foot of a mountain, se.

A few words lengthen their final vowel and add syrart,
to signify place ; as, SAT, Batwa, the immortal place,
heaven, yaraat, a smoky place,

e ~~ e =
To the names of animals ars is added; as, TITS, a

cow house or yard.CHAP. IX. | ETYMOLOGY. 259

SECTION II,

OF ADJECTIVES.

Derivative Adjectives are of two kinds,
viz. those formed from verbs, and those form-
ed from nouns, &c.; the former are like
English Participles ending with ng, and
the latter like Adjectives ending with y, ly,
Sull, ent, able, ate, ous, some, Oe.

The following are the principal affixes
used in their formation.

Ist—Those formed from Verbs.

TR, as = acH gong:

some ke tx THT conquering’.
ite. tam = ferara begging.
BlaR, — at waTaa = terrifying.
a0; ay aay hearing.
ae, ae 6 FRTE flattering.
wy, — at ITT sleeping.

Zz: — RR afte gwing.
xa, — ate =Rataa inebriating..
a, — qe atem bearing.

Z, ae WITT Bes praising.
3st, tee. fear cutting.
Si TW 8 ATeR awaking.,
Ce. z Rat going.@
~~

as

eA
faq
e
ata
Wz

SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

vat
tary,
CAT
faa
a
RAT
atid
ITA
ay

[ PART II.

daring.
throwing.
moving .
shining.
grieving.
moving.
swallowing.
weary ing.
decaying.

2Ind—Those formed from Nouns, &c.

Za,
‘EA,
=a,
xa,

as

§
aT
ST
AS

‘

Ta

aA

~

HAT
faq
aa
aa
ATH
ay
qa

ata

afar
staa
atoa,
aia
araa

afaz
fataa
RATA
aatAa
ATATA
THR
Tae
alga

full of holes.
wise.
hard, cruel.
last.
belonging to
a field.
apt.
poisonous.
honourable.

dirty.

hell-deserving.

rainy.
powerful.
friendly.CHAP. IX. |

LayH,
SIX,

aa,

qa,
tas,
Zt,
ate,

as

ETYMOLOGY. 261

aN ~ 2 4
wet UTR = multitudinous.

aS RSTC hard.
ata | ataa blue.
aT 8 8wHTRTT human.
TH RAS diligent.
Uy gta fortunate.
Bue UW phlegmatic.
ata afaa wrinkly.
ato406oata terrific.
uy =yWHa sinful.
qa aw like.
ata xtra cold.
eat cata compassionate.
at Htaa timid.
at away hairy.
Ty TUT rich.
as asa reedy.

ana aafea glorious.
faa Daw hawry.

‘\
am  aanta diligent.
am watttat do.
au ewe grassy.262 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

Some words only lengthen the first syllable, and
some take an affix after it islengthened; as, {u, Gry,
killing ; ©, a and 81a, repenting; Was, WAA, mari-
time ; Re A, ale” and ale fae, muddy.

Roots with the characteristic = lengthen the first
syllable; those with s add f##; as, aa, Sqlaq, or
maa, burning; a, afxu, factitious.

<9, qau, and As are added to words to signify di-
mension ; as, Sle#eg or STTRAY, Up to the knees, knee

deep; asa, a yard igh.CHAPTER X.

OF COMPOUND WORDS.

<p

There are four principal divisions of Com-
pound Words, viz. Nouns, Adjectives, Verbs,
and Adverbs.

The nouns and adjectives are the most nu-
merous: they are formed by uniting two
or more words together, and inflecting the
last, as though the whole were one simple

word.
Sete ane ae So criees

 

SECTION I.
OF NOUNS.

There are three genera of Compound
Nouns.

Ist. Those which by two nouns form a
compound dual, or by several a compound
plural, of the same gender as the last word.

Zndly. Those which by two or more
nouns form a collective one of the singular
number, neuter gender.7

964 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

drdly. Those to which all words expressive
of quality or circumstance are prefixed.

$a
FIRST GENUS.

In compounds of this genus, the shortest
words, those with the fewest or shortest vow-
els, those ending with = or 3, and those
which are first in order of time, situation,
or rank, are commonly placed first*; as,
weteenr, the woman and the man, waatiat,
the honey and the clarified butter. ufafaatet,
the moving and the staying. ae frat, the
master and the scholar. sanafafcaaat:, the
cold, the dewy, and the spring seasons. Wa
cary, the form, the taste, the smell, and
the touch.

Nouns ending with s, when they mean persons
related to each other by nature or similar professions,
change the a to 3]; as, famrgat, the father and the
son. Cla Ara STRAT, the offerer, the purifier, the
sprinkler, and the chanter. Otherwise Yrapirat, the
enjoyer and the enjoyment. .

When the names of two divinities are put together
in the Vaidas, the last vowel of the first word is made
long ; as, faara KU, the Sun and Neptune.

* After the first word the position is optional.IN

CHAP. X. | ETYMOLOGY. 65

When two words mean descendants from the same
parent, or when one is masculine and the other femi-
nine, the latter one is dropped, and the former put in
the dual num. ; as, aq and wIw1aza make WII, the son
and grandson of Girga. €9 and eet make uh, the
drake and the duck.

sufe is added to nouns to signify et cetera; as,
ailtararaarfe, cast, name, profession, &c. Sometimes
it means a definite number of things; as, safe, the
creation, preservation, and destruction of the world.

fae and are make fuats, aratfraer or Hat Paar, the fa-
ther and the mother. Sia and afa make AWaraat, SAAT,
<a, or wrariwiy, the man and the wife, sAAt and 7TH
make HUTT or TAR, the father-in-law and mother-
in-law. sq dice, 3a a myrobalan, and ag a wheel,
make sje. iRq, before another word, becomes ae
before Ufwal, the earth, aa or fea; as, at arate at or
feaufe a, the heaven and the earth.

scat
SECOND GENUS.

When unity, opposition, or diminution of
idea is conveyed; when the words mean in-
animate substances; countries, towns, or ri-
vers of different genders; parts of an army
or the body; and when the last member ends
with a letter of the = class, <, ¥, or =, the

oS ~ xX

1e second genus; as,

3
i

compound must be of t266 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

ateatiad, flesh and blood. afeane, ser-
pent and ichneumon. WATT MTL, carpenter
and blacksmith. watts, louse and nit.
saiwta, dog and clown. sItTaha, awl and
knife. wuxtuTefars, Milhura and Patily-
putra, gag, elephants and horses. mitaote,
hand and foot. wrxusx, foot and arm.
qrTatay, word and splendour. We & ATTaAS,
stool, umbrella, and shoe.

A few admit both forms; as, Waz:q or WRT,
pleasureand pain; @faai or ef qt, curdled milk and
clarified butter. SaR becomes SPT 5 as, SUUlA,
dawn and night. Sea and qfia make STaItIs, day and
night. :

~— R
THIRD GENUS.

Compounds of this genus are formed by
uniting with the noun, words of almost eve-
ry description. ‘There are seven species,
and they are formed in the following man-
ner.

Ist. By prefixing the Adjective; — as,
qwaraa, a good spirit. wanatant, a fifth
wife. yfaareg, a renowned man. ZTAXTH,CHAP. x. | ETYMOLOGY. 267

an old hare. zt#arw, a long rod, Sanwe, a
good house.

wea, prefixed to words, becomes Hel. Bea, ules,
na
tsa. Wid, and in some cases SW, SAG, SUA.
Baa, Tae, ya, aaa, wis, ase, SAA, oe ne are,
chan dace finals i 3. As, Wate, a fine sae
ABT, a hi igh-w wy. AIS, a great king . (yaeE, a
beloved friend. welae, a large kitchen. we an ald
= -
bull, arzag, a free carpenter. BaIqal, a great brah-
Vv > c 7 e © e Ving
mun. ZTATIA, a long night. Teuay, the hinder part of
the thigh.
= ie ‘ : ,
wT makes Wa, and ai aya; as, at~aNs, a good cow;
sera, a half boat. x17 hie si&@ have two forms;
~~}

*\ re) a eS
as, Welt OF WellA, a fat cat. Numerals prefixed
\ a
form collectives; as, faa, three friends. waaA or

oO > ° sf. 2s a
aan], five works. sea, signifying a definite part of
\
. c : Txth ¥ 4
time, hecomes 313; as, TAs, the forenoon. With @& it

makes Targa, one day.
N

2nd. By prefixing another noun ; as, ##a-
aa, a gold chain. quadte, a holy place.
qa, a holy hook. areaa, a tiger-lhke dog.
aiagta, wealth consisting mn grain. TPTaAls,
the horse’s grass. trxHate, the king’s son.
NEMNE, the preceptor’ s house.

The word which qualifies the other is often placed
last; as, RATA, a mild hoy. wsara, hot food. VRE-
qiy, a tiger of a man, viz. a brave man.

=208 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART if.

The principal words admitting this position are 31H,
good ; ao , happy; xsit, brown ; aa, fickle; Taq
and yz, eminent ; ufasa, learned; fya, beloved; qe
mild ; hg i SF. aay, gatus, distinguished ;
ray, Indra; 4, 34H, @ bull; ane, Tawar, Vg, @
water-lily ; FAX lq, an elephant ; a=, the moon ;
ea, a god ; ath, a serpe on: wea, ashoot; Brg, a tiger;
and fax, a lion. As, attan, @ — man; sarye,
an eminent counsellor; -arq@qruyaitw, a distinguished
brahmun ; HEA, a moon-like (or handsome) face.

eo s e e € ° = >
In a few instances the position is optional; as, TT [ay

>
a

or fayait, a white brahmun.

sitefa, wfy, and ea with wa; pe with at, fax,
(isi, and au; a4, W ith aw, ad, <a, fer; and several
vords forming proper names by afa, a4, anid faft; have
their vowel long. As, Wradies, a distiller; Bilaa,
a husbandman ; eta, an elephant ; fasgray, Vish-
wana; fasgifas, Vishwamitra; fasgitts_or fargrak,
Ged; STA, a dog’s ear ; BAIRe, his knee; Aig- or
wie el, his tooth; qyrat, the river Shuravitee. SEA
with we and WR, has two forms; as, spe or wWIGT,
adog’s foot; {ye andsgae, stall. xfaatand Te

make gfuaqa, the down of the writing reed.

Words ending with = and may be long or short;
Ss, YAUa or yiafwus, a villager’s son.
In the words faftaart, a town ona hill, and wryfaae

or witfaary, @ guiver, 41s not changed toy... SomeCHAP. X. | ETYMOLOGY. 269

words admit either form; as, Sifeawor gifeaa, a rice
field,

wu, a loan; aga, clothing; amar, a calf; ara,
a year; SX, ten; and aqua, a blankeé ; are made
long when followed by ww. As, atwiat, the loan of a
loan; “ate, the loan of a blanket. wa and afeat
make a eifeut, a complete army ; *a and ST, aay,
a prostitute ; Ware and <u, aatat, the understanding ;
SHS or Ea, and EW, STS ST oreete, the plough-
handle; wax and SY, WAY, a king’s will. na and
EY, aaywW or wa; with Ea, Was, lord of the herd;
with Sa, an eye, Tata, a window.

When qfollows 3, © is inserted; as, aaeqfit, lord of
the wood, (a species of fig-tree.)

3d. By prefixing a compound adjective or
substantive; as, HurHATaaaa, an unscason-
able word ; Calg at ac U HCY gE, a couch
variegated with rays of numerous pearls ;
aH (twyuratearayt, a spot near a sacred
wood ; water giaaraga, the son of our
chief counsellor ; aadgguuiaatata, the
receptacle of all happiness. and . wealth;
smuciqeaaine, the trunks of elephants,
the haunches of horses, and the heads of
charioteers,*

* Literally, the trunks; haunches, and heads of elephants, horses,
and charioteers,270 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART I.

4th. By prefixing a pronoun; as, 7quaa

or watquera, my book ; PRR OL HHATTATT,
our lang Uuage; Aaa, thy word ; quer,
your country; ama, that work; waza,
whose head; faxtaa, what king ? waearqza,
this man. An adjective sometimes inter-
venes; as, FHatawyraara, our chief coun-
sellor.

oth. By affixing a verbal root; as, cifaaz
or tifaaz, night-wandering, (a ghost);
taatac, night-acting, (the moon); @ararc,

pot-making, (a potter); «wat, rod-holding,
(a king) ; awxa or AaAzT , bank-destroying,
(a eee afaate, side-filling, (a glutton);

RAH dq, a workman.

When 4, @, 4, or & are preceded by :, the word has
two forms ; og Ht: and aT make HEAT or NTMI, Light-
making, (the sun.)

6th. By prefixing a preposition or ad
verb; as, AT, measure; Bata, la a
WyATA or Wazata, disgrace; afaata, pride,
self-confidence; fautm, a creating; ufcara,
ameasure; VATU, a proof; afatata, an wm-
age; ama, honor. afaat or <faat, @ bad
action ; ATTA, an insignificant man 5 Sqag,
a little water.CHAP. X. | ETYMOLOGY. 271

Before Ue bind, qa rain, zu hill, wa enlarge,
RX approve, or 8% foe the Gna vowel of. any pre-
position or noun is made long. As, sulak, a shoe ;
mae, the rainy season, ;

Fy wath mm makes gw, a large loan; with sz,
makes % Ae, clear decision; with ve or Va, Yu, ye,
Yay and Fa, aservant. A preposition ending with = or
= is long before arg; as, Yadtarw, a comparison.

7th. By doubling the word, lengthening
the last syllable of the former word, and in-
serting : in the last syllable of the latter ;

, RATA, a pulling of each other’s hair;
awilataz, a Ss with sticks; Heats or
qetqiz, boxing; averarefa or atearefa,
a scuffiing.

When the word begins with a vowel, ic is simply
doubled; as, s1fa, a scimitar; aeafa, a jighting with
scimitars.

When particular stress is laid on any word, it is not
ee hee d; as, aTargia, grief on account of the la-
dy ; OTSA TT, a speech for another's good; ereanufa,
the husband of a slave girl.

In all other cases it depends on the pleasure of the
writer, whether the nouns should be used in a simple

or compound form.2/2 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART If.

SECTION IL
OF ADJECTIVES.

There are two genera of Compound Ad-
jectives :—

Ist. Those which admit of various com-
binations.

2Qndly. Those which unite a simple or
compound noun with a verbal adjective or
passive participle.

age
FIRST GENUS.

Those which are combined invarious ways.
Of this genus, there are five species, which
are formed in the following manner.

Ist. By uniting two adjectives together;
aS, UTaytRR, very pious; FEtstadta, of an

Vs °
excellent race; aawsa, all white; CWT, one
or two ; Faust, having three before ; SEXAS,
having tender grass.

Sometimes two participles are used, and sometimes
the same word is repeated; as, aArumn, done but done
badly ; @tafay, bathed and then anoinied; strat, tra-
velling; WVAIa, 2

I

snea king.

A

ee

andering; antan, falling; aXe,CHAP. x. | ETYMOLOGY. 3

2. By uniting two substantives - ; as, ie at,
moon-crested; Sema, camel-faced; RAITT,
clothed in silk ; aauraxtz, adorned wilt,
gold; taza, har ving shoulders like a lion ;
TaAutta, having a spear in the hand.

Some adjectives of this species are equivalent to
two nouns placed in apposition; as, AAMT aaa
qT AARET RRA ABATE, (a sea of grief) the waters
of which are the words of Munthiva, the bed of which
is the giving of the promised boon, and the crocodile of
which is the fatal resolution of Koikaiyee.

A final 4 in the first part of the word is dropped,
and an initial one in the second part is not changed to
UW"; as, afar, elephant-footed ; aya, copper-colour-

nailed.

In words of comparison we generally becomes aR 5
as, B_ue, tiger-footed, &c. ej sometimes admits a
two forins; as, gue ay or gaz, bull-toothed. xfs be-
comes 38 ; as, Ursilaray, lotus-eyed. iat becomes sila,
and waa has two forms; as, qqsifa, having a young
wife ; yaquas or gaara a, having a how of flowers. az
and sia7 make daa, having the hair over the temples,

A numeral may be added: to the first noun ;. as,
aaqnaua, having the wealth of five cows. |

 

* When the two words form compound proper names, the a

is changed.O74 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART HI.

3rd. By prefixing a simple or compound
adjective to a noun, and making a final
long vowel short; as, ataaa, having a black
body ; wetaa, having great power ; TWaveaez,
wearing yellow clothes ; atarsyaaye, having
a blue shining body; THaTATa, having a
heautiful wife; sufcaraarea, having his
team quite tired; urarafaadaa, having the
mind perplexed and distracted; TAATARATA,
having the eyes stedfastly fixed on the ground ;
satananra, not knowing the shastras.

In many instances the feminine termination is re-
tained in the first part of the compound; as, wetytar,
having the sixth wife; tfaararay, having a jocose wife ;

C
Wadiyrar, having a wife with fine hair; awanitfaa,
having a pleasing wife, &c.

Compounds with several vowels in the first member
affix ER; as, RieWafan, acting in a dozen ways.

° gS
Words with & or x, add %; as, 8aaala, having ma-
° ay ° °
ny rivers. MCAT, having a thief of a brother. Some-
times three nouns are put together, and x~% is added;

as, fA iequafar, having evidence from the Vaidas and
Shastras.

STU, the breast; suytag, a shoe; fu, curds; a4,
\ \
honey; wifa, rice ; afqe, clarified butter; also St, aCHAP. x. | ETYMOLOGY. 275

boat; ase, @ bull; wae, milk ; gud, a male, and
sql, fortune, when they mean only one thing, affix
We VAS, Qwite, having a full chest ; ABzyare, having
obtained a boat; otherwise fea, having two boats.
Some have two forms; as, Sears Or aRHIAT, having
many necklaces. Compounds relating to the members
of the body do not affix 4; as, wyree, having a large
hand. If the last word ends with ga the feminine is
formed by Fa; as, aqua, fem. aqaifiarar, very elo-
quent.

The final of any word preceding aw must be long,
except HB, eight; waa, five; FB, pleased ; fea, cut ;
fwa, separated ; as, fanutam, having ears as long again
as common. BPA, eight, followed by ax, a bend ; "Iz,
a foot; aay, UNEVEN ; TT, a cow, and ayia, a tile, must
be long; as, WeaH, having eight bends; svetma, hav-
ing eight oxen. ae and qa make Wsa, six-toothed ; ay,
and ay, aqua, having many bridges.

When a numeral is added, the word frequently sig-
nifies worth or measure; as, TAI, worth five cows;
UMA, measuring five cups. YR, in the fem. has
two forms; as, fayautor faqael, of two men’s height.
ra east, and Ufsgu, west, with aw, the face, have two
forms; as, Taree or vega, eastward.

° ec »
zea with fe or fx makes fang, having two heads.
Zgfa, relating to measure, and afes, relating to the
bodi , when the last members of the compound, change
S
KF tO; as, THIFH, measuring five fingers; TUT,

    
   

RR Neo a

SS ae
a

ete

ae

. eo
=

eer

=e ae276 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IT.

long thighed. %1%% with fa and when relating to age
drops its final 37 ; as faaag, having three humps. waa
and 3 3qfa4 make vaya, standing with joined hands.
wit and sy make WITH, having a beautiful body.

4th. By prefixing a simple or compound
noun to an adjective; as, WATUARA, e€a-
pert in proofs; Karate, rolling like a
wave; wRcuaaqaca, as unsteady as wa-
fer on the leaf of a lotus; Wafaaamafa-
awe aiHatase, fickle as the lightning s play-
ing in the midst of the clouds; wagqasra-
aqagraracqutacegriage, fickle as the sha-
dow proceeding from a lamp agitated by
the wings of an infatuated fly.

To adjectives of this kind ant may be prefixed ; as
afaate ataanaanta, unsteady as water on the leaf of
the lotus ; aaleafe ara fg arag ST, unsettled as

the scattered water of the clouds driven by the wind.
oth. By prefixing an indeclinable word
to a noun, &¢. as, Fala, foolish; Bae, im-
pure; H#8, unmeaning, useless : ARALE ,
e e » . *
not having a particle of fame; afrcts, sur-
passing the king; Santa, absent from the
village; sawtwa, excelled by the cuckoo ;
BTatarate, with hands reaching to the knees;CHAR. X. | ETYMOLOGY. 277

waa, leaf-fallen; aurea or azatea, to-
gether with his mother ; axat asxathyat wet,
the city with its men and rulers,

IAA, with snt{_ or aes makes aaan, having the
hair inward. 931 and Fat, with 3, FT, or a, add q;
way adds ae SR adds 37; and yfaa has two forms.
As, Suae, 2 without subjects ; TH ue of an inferior ca-
pacity ;sx Gana, eminently hae AAA, without
four; Saw or sa iay, thighless. sa with ¥ or q
makes WX, fine-thighed ; with aE, Fez, seq, and
Seas, with the thigh upwards, aa with a_preposi-
tion adds 31; as, 3a¥, high nosed ; with fa, faaw, faq,
faq and fam, noseless. arte with Sx or fa drops the
31; with gu may have two forms ; as, SPRITE, having
a high palate. a with @ makes ew, unhappy; &
and @, aw, well, happy; and so the abstracts = feta
and afwfa. y and sqaq make yr, having a good
road. @ and naj make Gf, sweet smelling.

—
SECOND GENUS.

Those which unite a simple or compound
noun, with a verbal adjective or passive
participle. The noun is placed first, and the
case omitted. Of this genus there are tliree
species.

Ist. Those with a verbal adjective or ac-
tive participle; as, wamtfiaa, road-travers-

 

    
  
   
    

2

ee a NS ATS a en AR — aaa ~ eats are ee cian eaten Seer piney Fe th er ee = Ss oo -_
PSR ee Giga Sat oe Seen ee le neee pe ea oa a PN a EE im Se ere ae a ee a ce Sea ca a gl ere on eg SPREE

ert as

See
Sogn o

Fee SP a i Sra
eee

==

Passe ig Sg re et
(a

eee
ae
= a278 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART YL.

ing ; qarctisa, forest-adorning ; aqaeataa,
OF WTR, poy-givine’; uaa ing, sin-de-
stroying; waa, time-wastng; WAAT,
moving in water; fatrtfas, inhabiting the
top of atree; wtanamatna, eating flesh,
roots, and frutt.

In some instances the case is retained; as, HAT,
fear-inspiring ; {ga%az, speaking affectionately; sf{7EA,
enemy-subduing ; Wray, accounting himself an ox.

Sometimes an adjective is prefixed, and the noun
is understood as included in it; as, faywifaa, long-
continuing ; = qplfsia, eating hot things ; fraafea.
speaking kindly.

The compound in some instances is only equivalent
to asimple word; as, fadaalfta, destroying ; fray,
moving; Bana, versifying.

Words with a final x, =, or #, except Ula an atom,
aq beautiful, xfa relish, and etK wood, must be
long before a€ ; as, wise, carrying a master ; aIRae,
arm-carrying ; faa aq, carrying a father. arat and
afta make aranifta, wearing a necklace.

2nd. Those with a passive participle;
as, Sanera, become water; AAATA, possessed
of wealth; saaifea, infatuated through
covetousness ; TaaTEs, ascended on the fune-
ral pile ; srafaatra, respected by the good ;CHAP. X. | ETYMOLOGY. 279

qeatfiad, distracted with great grief ;
avaeaatyd, torn to pieces with distress for
their lord 5 TANG Tae, brought up with
very great pams; atwatacreatqutra, a-
dorned with precious stones, beautiful seats,
and jewels.

Some words of this kind, particularly those signi-
fying acquisition or privation, have the participle pre-
fixed; as, WTHaHa. having obtained water; WAWs,
having dismissed his grief ; CaIweal fea. deprived of
colour, voice, and sense.

Instead of the compound, the participle with the case
that it governs may be used at pleasure; as, ATH ATAA,
come to authority ; a~aafag, oppressed with trouble ;
RRMA, gained with difficulty ; falargey Taueai, de-
prived of the sun and moon ; WiAaTAyEra Taaipafasfel-
waa, adorned with a hundred golden pillars and varie-

gated gems.

d ter, 3 ‘ength
SAU_ speed, BAT water, SST strength, Tae
penance, AA darkness, and wee boldness, when used
XX
alone, always retain the 3rd case; as, BATA,
done with speed, &c.

Some adjectives are used like pass. participles; as,
qqIaa, suffused with tears; famenfafaaiags, dis-
tracted by the effects of the disease, avarice; a FIRy-
RUC WIT, made cold by the small drops of water
from the waves of the Ganges,

 

i

i
f

\

ii

yi

iit

;

i
£4)
%

VF
:
ve

i
iy?
Fait
ye
ph
tes
r i

1
i
By
oa
ii
i
mf
4
it
Ae
I
Tei:
i
val
BA
Rae
re!
be
ats
t
% i
if
i ty
a
i y

Aa eR eet aa:

a
Pesta es280 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART IT.

mis used contractedly for 4a, gone, or Wa, sung; ¥
for aA, killing; = for sta, born; 3 for =H, Anown ;
lor, TRA, giving; W for fea, placed; and eq for
sfequ, raised. As, azaqa, having gone through the
Paidas, &c. Feat and faa make gyvafan, brick-built,
3. Double compounds of both the preced-
ing species. A single compound seldom con-
sists of more than two orthree parts; but after
it is thus formed, it is frequently used again
inconnection with others; and thus a double
composition takes place. Adjectives of this
kind contain all the qualities or circumstan-
ces that relate to the noun. As, wfaaa-
yemrantysaavetae, remarkable for solv-
ing the knot of great complacency ; astitaa-
aleagataatasieetarac, adorned with a
crest, and shining with glimmering rays,
like the crescent of the heautiful moon ; wet-
TarafefaayalegUypaT ATSTATAMALTATA Te,
enjoying the pleasures and amusements of
places delightfully constructed above, and
of ponds, river-sides, and parks; Saat ca-
ajufeattafea, taken off, and placed on a
stone by the side of the rwer; maeay-
wefasaaramgiza Gecated, drawn by the
sound of the various tinkling ornaments onCHAP. X. | ETYMOLOGY. 281

their hands, girdles, and feet; tarnTaArat-
waqa tafard araaranagccsia foanaatea-
aatutfaaare, placed ina country stretched
out in length and smoothed, terrible from the
Jirst and hitherto, meted out by a line, trod-
den under foot, and nourished by rivers.

a

ee Sa eee

TEL 52D ea ne RE)

Sa ee ES

SECTION III,
OF VERBS.

Compound verbs are principally formed
by prefixing one or more prepositions to the
verbal root; as, € steal, or do hy force.

ga, steal after, imitate. Haz, steal from,
rob, atae, steal hefore, assault, rob. a7,
steal off. ate, attract, prepare, eat. Sz,
raise up, deliver. Sue, give. atz, Freese.
fae, steal out, extract. ufc, quit, abuse.
we, persecute, strike. Watt, keep watch.
faz. play, wander about. ae, kill, destroy.
YS, raise up, deliver. Byte, reason, ar-
gue. Sate, ellustrate. suede, finish. facts,
fast. wave, meditate, think abstractedly.
afae, steal mutually. wae, be customa-
ry. ate, speak. aE, fight. aATe, unele.

dh
Malt
Hi
e|
Fe}
ie!
'
Bi,
fa
tet
Hef |
ban
fe
4
7,
ay
a
hae
heat
yi
{
i
i
raat
hi
i
3\
i
WW
‘a
Hi
i
ty
he
fay |
qt
th;
ia
‘
t
Hi
4
bt)
ay)
iy
vel
a
tet:
' ;
iat)
F
a
vats
rj
fait
iy
hal
Pa}
thsi
ant
mrs
i
iit
iM f
Hale
ii
‘y

oy
iy

ne terete,
Set
Sie

cee
<a

peyton asi:
ain tig

—
SRS Be ns

ee
I af SS282 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART II.

aque, give, collect, aaatg, relate. GAlaagrTS,
speak in concert.

Verbs beginning with # preceded by a preposition
ending with s or ar require vriddhy ; those beginning
with & or St undergo no change; nominal verbs ad-
nit both forms, As, suing fre, he runs away ;
q LU yan, he trembles; ati+Srefa = wreafi, he
escapes. waa and wft form exceptions; as, star, he

a
encreases a little; safa, he knows.

@, with sy, ofr, and w, inserts w; with sy, when
it means abuse or slander, it does not insert ¥. As,
STARA, he transmutes; syaRa, he abuses.

& with 44 in the Middle voice inserts ¥ ; as, sgrafaATa,
the dog scratches.

Verbs beginning with 4 andq in the list of rootsdo not
change them, according to rule, when united with
a preposition; as aftae, dance well; afte, go round.

sa_live, Fae ) fwa—k kiss, far—x slander, AT and
Ws, expand, and wiz go, have two forms ; as, aifeafi
or aifat fa, fauartfa or ‘preach, wg be able, faa sew,
a trickle, and as embrace, admit of two forms,

when the augment 4 is prefixed ; as, @aua or Ween.

When w@ is changed to a, it is not changed again to
its original form after BU ; as, UE, clothe, Aafia, Tafa.
The preposition fa, preceded by another preposition,
may be changed to q according to Rule X. page 27;
but admi

its of two forms; as, faa know, yfasafa orCHAP. Xx. | ETYMOLOGY. 283

oS °
afasafa. With we speak, fa collect, €1 give, ee mark,
ST sleep, ax sound, Ba or UX move, Ai eat, At, at go, Al
measure ’ ar Ail Sofi eunoh JR
: €, 44 sow, aq get, ur kill, WH quiet, ea keitll, it
is always changed; with verbs beginning with ¢- or x,
or ending with ¥, tis never changed. As, fue fa ;
Wfiaaefa.

Sify anc

 

 

PSS OTS ease era
Se ee Se eS lease tere

ae

qa

| @ when used to express the excellence of

an action, fw and uft when used to signify motion,

PE
———

and af9 when used as a conjunction, do not require @
to be changed to ¥ according to Rule XI. page 28. As,
faa, excellently well praised; afaaufa, he goes ;
sifafesfa, he also waters it.

Rae

Sit aes Sees

ae

aie

i
i
|
1ED:
| ‘
ei} }
it if
iz ]
a "
4
tet

faq serve, when inflected, does not again change &
to 4 after any preposition besides fa, aft, or fa, or in
the Indefinite Causal; as, yfadafa, ret eafaaT. So aE
move, with ofa, ¥e endure, inthe Fut. when = is not in-
serted, and u in de 2d Fut.; as, sfadte fa, fader, and
faaraifa. ae with 3a meaning eat, and Zu—E with
sq or 3 meaning he strong or near, change the q to
BH; as, Gala, saaala; staeain. Perf. fareal.

Some compound verbs are formed by pre-
fixing a noun, adjective, or adverb to the
verbs Hu or 4 be, and aH do. The final g
or yt of the word becomes =; w becomes
w; and 3% becomes tt. As, qalteafa, 2 be-
comes hlack; aaxtita, he makes (it) light or
short; aretaeita, he makes (her) his mo-
ther; afeeyetfa, he extracts.284 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IT.

ATT the breast, qau the eye, Aa the mind, Taq
dust, and {Ee @ desert, drop the final @3 as, WHala-
Tift, he makes it well approved.

wm may be added to signify entirely; as, HTS
WMA aitiia, he reduces the wood entirely to ashes ;

WS HST waa, it becomes entirely water.

Words of more than one syllable, meaning inarti-
culate sounds, drop the final consonant, and change 4
to #13 as, Veuetarila, if makes the noise putut pitut.
With eff, ueefi, ufefa, or genre fefang ifr.

Numerals ending with wa or 7W are used with F
in reference to husbandry; as, feAaratifa or fanut-
Ata, he ploughs twice. So MHtartifa, he ploughs in
the seed; and waratifa, he returns on the furrows.

There are a few others used with #® which change

their final 3 to 31; as, START IPH, he afflicts ; fae at-
arifa, he takes away a part; Taras atiia, he trans-
fixes with a fledged arrow, or famaatifa, he makes
leafless; Fraratifa, he acts kindly; weratifa, he does
well; Waa fi, he cooks with a fork; aaiatifa, he
deals truly ; BRararifa, he spends his time ; aaatia,
he makes happy.

A few are formed by uniting two Impera-
tive moods together, and changing the final
x of the last to at; as, watafuaat, eat and
drink ; 1.e. continue to do so; swafarat,
go on gumping up and down.CHAP. X. | ETYMOLOGY. 285

The object is sometimes affixed to the 2nd person
sing. of the Imperative mood; as, Ssifewy, cut off
the tuft, i. e. Again and again I say, Cut off the tuft.
fate aaa, Do break the salt,

 

SECTION IV.
OF ADVERBS.

Compound adverbs are formed by prefix-
ing some indeclinable word to a noun. When
the noun ends with w, ‘is affixed; as, TAIZ,
according to seniority ; afaatad, when the
season of youth ws past; FATTY, according
fo what is right; mae or garata, fo the
utmost of one’s ability ; quasar cits, he
went after the priest.

A numeral adjective is not unfrequently prefixed,
and x added; as, fagfw, with two sticks; fauuta,
with two pestles; saisafa, with both the palms of the
hand joined. sua, with saafs, KU, an ear, FA, a
tooth, aijw or wea hand, becomes S¥I; as, SUrafa,
with both hands.

Sometimes the indeclinable word is affixed ; as,
sauft, beat at the play of dice; qasi7, fora few split
peas; Warnrafr, beat at the play of sticks. aq is thus

 

=

IT =
oe

ee
——

= ae
EGR nae

eae

if
y
i
te |
i
f

fea A
tei
4
i

a
r
a
a
ue
iat
hat

,

4

|286 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Ii.

used after Ta, fe, f&, and aT; as, Waly, beat by one.
s1q before, saat within, WIT over, and ay in, are used
before or after the word; thus armlaqay or Auraxtyt,
in Kashe.

‘These words after the preposition are often found in
the 3rd, 5th, and 7th cases; as, STRA, syanya or SRA
near the jar; ATS FAA, from as far as Patuly-puttra.

Words ending with Z—-y have two forms; as,
Suga or Syujau, near the sacrificial wood. A few
ending with a consonant have only the latter form ;
as, Suite, near autumn; Yfafaata, towards the river
Vepas.

A few ending with a vowel have two forms; as,
SOY;Y or Sy, near or about the fre; suafe or
Syae, near the river,

Neuter nouns ending with sta_have two forms ;
others only one, As, Sa¥q¥wW or SISA, by the leather ;
SYIrH, over one’s self,

Some few are irregular; as, HU, SURATH, nearly
worn out; Bfaxl, saa, Waal, WAal, evidently ; aiai,out
of sight; Ex, ai, voluntarily ; TAR, BAR, hike dust;
ea, Suya, like a dog; FAN or faya when the deer is
past ; aaa, when the barley is cut; wsrafaaa, when
the year is past.PART III.

8. ¥. NetPede X.

a

Tis part of Grammar treats of the con-
nection that exists between the different
words in a sentence. It is divided into Con-
cord and Government: the former being the
agreement which subsists among the different
words or members of the sentence ; andthe
latter, the effect which is produced on one

word or member of the sentence by the in-
fluence of another.

It is not necessary, in order to explain the
nature of the above principles, to discuss
them separately; particularly as all the
rules which relate to them, may be referred
to with much greater facility, by regularly

tracmg their operation in the different sorts
of words used in a sentence.

 

 

PES ee:

SRR eR SS at ee SSS on =
~ ae = Sa ease ee pe = =

Tihs aioe ae

¥

im)
if
x
'
ie
i (|
ial ‘
2
iia!\\)

CHAPTER I.

THE SYNTAX OF NOUNS.

——=>--~<-

RULE I.

When two connected words allude to the
same person or thing, they are put in the
same case; when they allude to a different
person or thing, one is governed by the
other in the Possessive case :—as,

acwawe: utat, God the preserver. ate
waTUfsa, Vishishta the king’s priest.
qty: us:, the son of a slave, faq: text,
a father’s promise. Bata, a master’s
word.

1. All words used to express some accompa-
niment are put in the Instrumental case; as,
serfur faa, Shevé with his ornaments. 3 Pa%
argade:, the water with the golden pitchers.
WATER T YAAZARe:, having gone a long way
with the chariots, vehicles, horses, and elephants.
faq aray aa tisqa, What have I to do with a

kingdom ?CHAP. I. | ETYMOLOGY. 98%

2. All nouns used acquisitively are generally
put in the Dative case; as, saa: feara, jor the
good of the world. wafaarara, for the explaining
of this. gra ere sam fanmiafeaa wet, the
Jrst is for amusement in old age, the second is
always honored.

3. When the cause or reason of any thing is
to be expressed by the noun, it is generally put in
the Ablative case; as BaAITAT fea, greatly trou-
bled on account of his affection. wafca US ea,
they were expeditious on account of the king's
command. aqTHAqMeaegaag, it isinvalu-
able, because it cannot be stolen, purchased, or
destroyed.

sheds:
RULE ‘IL

When the noun refers to time or place,
or has a simple relation to some other noun
used in the sentence, it is put in the Loca»
tive case; as,

yuTdaHad fare a Wax, early in the
morning and on the 13th day. Ra wetag,
he sleeps on the ground. 4 wat: vated ate,
he could not be sustained in the hattle.. area
waaitay, expertness in Sunscrit idioms.
fomaateregtaata:, pleasure in the words of
tale-bearers.

 

———— a oe SASS eS Eas ame : rigs ~ = Se = oe
SS ee ee Seg Na a ee en SS See a : “SSS = a =
SS en aera a SC BS See teh = one SS ae 7 = Sea se = a eS = ee == == a =

SSeS
Sauer

2 ee

 

Te290 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART III.

1. When duration through a certain space of
time is meant, the noun is frequently put in the
Obj. case; as, THAT BST, on the sixth night. V4
qi aaa aeqeaned, they sat through a 1000
years vow for the heavenly world. BRAIZUUA
aaa ysgan, he like a serpent fed on air alone
for a hundred years.

Sometimes the Ablative is used; as, HAlat BTS Ar
ARIA, eal after two or three days.

2. Nouns which relate to distance of place are
used with the verb to be in the Nom. case; when
they signify a certain space travelled through,
they are put in the Obj. case; in all other instan-
ces they may be used in the Abl. or Loc. case.
As, Gaara rae Ha, Crishnd is a hundred
miles from Somunatha; watpat Riv, he was at-
tended by his servants a mile. wei aIna aa
siawasaafad, he who is placed on the earth
can see the sun at the distance of 400,000 miles,
and the moon at twice that distance.

The name of the star under which any thing hap-
pens may be in the Instrumental or Locative case; as,
Tau or UPS wmANaAa aa:, Crishna was (born) un-
der the star Rohenee.

3. Sometimes the relation of one noun to ano-
ther is expressed by the Obj. case; as, q{1¥4
eeauaa, from the tre of affection to Rama.
gaemiaammas:, like Simudra for his wicked-
ness in killing a Brahmun.CHAP. II. | ETYMOLOGY. 291

4. When the noun has a relation to a whole
clause or sentence, both it and the words which
qualify * are put in the Loe. case*; as, fanaa gar
ae Galtar Aar, when the sun was clear they were
both conveyed over by me in safety. Fa TUTa
Wi Tt Taras sitaifa, since the king Diss har titha
is dead, seeing thee, O son, I live.

There are instances in which the Nominative 1S
used instead of the es as, Wade ail] AAMAAAT-
arafaaTayareat | far He PITTA aftag wafeqarl| when
the son of Sita had arrived at the her mitage of those
who inhabited the wood Noimesha, the sages there sur-

rounded him to hear his wonderful words.

SERS Rais Sada baes,

CHAPTER II.

THE SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES.

> ae —
BLE ih

Adjectives, and words used adjectively,
must agree with the nouns which they qua-
lity, in gender, number, and case; as, az:
AC, a good man. Bet act, a beautiful

 

 

 

* This, which is commonly called the case absolute, might
with much greater propriety be called the case dependant,292 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART HIE.

woman, Saw aa, an excellent family. a
ea:, what cause? Ba ea :, this cause. TA ATTU,
which reason. wat: fear, these women.

1. When two or more nouns of different gen-
ders’ occur in the sentence, the adjective must
agree with that to which it stands the nearest.
Care is not always taken to place the leading
gender nearest. As, @l carafe Haraaaatea:, a
man or woman infatuated by the power of fate.
Waal fag aa aay slfanfa wuifa ar, can sleep or any
earthly comforts be enjoyed by me? sada weary
wag Ta ayram:, both I and mine are all subject to
you. SET: RAR AW: ayaa aan, rie > guar-
rels, and the itch, increase by being ii

2. If the nouns are of different genders and
numbers, and the qualifying word is not near to
them, it takes the leading gender, and agrees with
them all collectively ; as, ae a HIATPoART Ureat vragt
was fry: BYR UYC A HT VAT Hara TI Minoo has
sad, “ Anaged father and mother, a faithful
wife, and an infant son, must he supported, even
if it is by doing a hundred wrong things.”

3. When the several nouns are of the same
gender, the adjective may agree with them all
collectively, or with each individually ; as, yat-
S fanaa TAS Way WI ATAATMIT: or Wad: Sata
Rat, the instigator, the encourager, and the perpe-
trator, will all go to heaven or hell.CHAP. II. | ETYMOLOGY. 293

4. Adjectives frequently supply the place of
substantives, the substantive which they qualify
being understood : as, art ways, the lord of all,
1. €. Wut yarat, of all creatures. Wala Pavenca far,
all reproached him. WHY aaa wei, the shastré
ts the eye of every one. atFanwWies:, one distin-
guished son is a good (thing). afe qafay wal
WATE, is impossible to dry up the waters of
the sea.

 

0. When the substantive is not expressed, the
adjectives, &c. agree with those words which sup-
ply its place; as, afya uaa fag, Is any one
SO Wise ? Heya Qa RST BTAN: uy attan, the life of us
enjoying pleasure passes away agreeably. waat-
TaN a fa raqaeaa:| fardtar a way, They who
are possessed of beauty and youth, and they who
are of honorable parentage, are still deformed if
destitute of learning.

 

6. Words qualifying a whole sentence are fre-
quently put in the singular number, neuter gen-
der; as, ay eiaN Wal, thou knowest all these (1. é.

Oo -_ wv - = J
the piranas andholy shastras before enumerated).
aN N, ciet® Ai tis ¢ S ~
VE Qa TS al a faaay | Bre fasaeyar ana a fa
Te Taw |) divulging a secret, begging, cruelty,
instability, anger, falsehood, gaming, these are

faults in a friend.294 ‘SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IIT.

RULE? IV.

Adjectives used comparatively require the
Ablative ; those used superlatively or parti-
tively require the Possessive case ; as,

ate trata@aact aatta ale aga, There is
no one in the world dearer to me than Rama.
CATH eta Daw sitiad Hcare<, Life, deprived
of one member by a weapon, is better than
death, aqarat wean:, the bravest of men.
ay aati watfa, five hundred of the boats.
wanwaimyiat qarectta, a hundred thou-
sand of the horses were mounted.

1. Adjectives in the positive state have the
same government as those in the comparative
and superlative degrees, when they have a com-
parative or superlative idea attached to them ;
as, 4ary a: ut:, and whois lower than a servant ?
~ ~ ° 2
aS? HIaeaT, who is a greater fool than a ser-
vant ? i j a 2
vant ? Fane fara eH, a fine double the value
of the thing in dispute. va: Rayterat saqt ae:

vito ’ S f / Sh 1Ge god! at = t qs
Rama was before Crishna, Guida after him.
afgatray, the chief of rivers. aifragrat:, one of
the first rate orators.

2. For the Ablative, the Instrumental is some-
times used; and instead of the Possessive, the

e = e
Locative: as, wa wa: Tryaat:, he is dearer to me
e S “~,
than life. yaras:, younger than the man. We:CHAP. II. | ETYMOLOGY. 295

wary, he is the chief of the merciful ones. RIXa-
aa, ten thousand miles. 2y WIAA: the bravest
of men.

3. at and a are frequently used to express
comparison, and supply the place of the compa-
rative degree; as, at aarw a yatfaaarfuayy, a
dwelling in the wilderness is good, but not so one
in the city of an ignorant ruler. SHIT BATA
aaa aafaH:, the unborn, the dead, and the
fool ; of these the former are better than the last.

In some instances the last noun is in the Instru-
mental case; as, ayamaat USI aa HeTarhy, one ee
son is better than a hundred foolish ones.

sifu, more, takes the Ablative, Possessive, or Loca-
tive. ds; HSAs or asa sfam: ya, a prusthu holds
more than a curuva. TeIAUPAaAa: Tay SETA,
five months and twelve nights more than those (years).

sont hh eee
MLSE OV,

Adjectives expressive of some peculiar
quality, require the Locative case; others
require the Possessive ; as,

awe ara:, black in the throat. We awa,
active at home. dqesatat, he is learned in the
Vaidé, ware ataa:, desirous of prospert-
ty. aaratataa:, worthy of happiness. TaTa-
am: or aaawam:, subject to thee. AMaAta296 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. _[ PART III.

anfuaciat, this is common to men with the
brutes. warm waaay a:, he was beloved
by all people.

1. Adjectives signifying fulness or want, and
those which are used to express some defect in
the body, require the Instrumental case; as,
aaa yw we, a jar full of good water. mee,
coveting fruit. faa @ art 4 wa utfae an, this
city is destitute of my father and mother.
steqraa:, blind of one eye. weaesy:, lame in
the foot. qwewas:, bent in the back.

2. Adjectives expressive of likeness, equality,
and a few others, admit either the Instrumental
or Possessive case: as, mar 7: or MaITH:, he
as like thee. TeIaRu:, like him. wee aza:, like
the moon. eaeaan:, he is equal to all. qaraafarga
wetafarea| respecting him who is deserving of
happiness and not of misery.

Sa anxious, and yfea attentive, take the Instru-
mental or Locative case; as, RR: or ATE ofan, atten-
tive to his hair.

AT <1, fara expert, AAR appointed, WaT produced,
and ary virtuous, take the Possessive or Locative
case; as, Hai OF Rall RUS, expert at play, &c.

3. Adjectives formed from Opt. verbs require
the Obj. case; as, fuat feea:, desirous of see-
img his father. fae faade:, anxious to give or-
ders, gue faPafssrate:, wishing to kill some qua-
druped.CHAPTER ITI.

THE SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.

=
re OU) Bere ee

Pronouns must agree with their antece-
dents, or the words for which they stand, in
gender, number, and person; as,

en HACSAT amaata, the country which
Bhurudvaga mentioned. aaturacta arta Fez,
the shastras which he knows. ftaat 3at aa
aTat q uttaa:, that father is an enemy by
whom the child ts not instructed, HA TATA,
whom does she not subdue? aafirsefer we,
thou who desirest to go. XT At Az: aafarete,
the man who desires to act thus.

I, When the relative and antecedent corre-
spond with each other in the sentence, the relative
is generally placed first, and in some instances
the antecedent is omitted : as, ai ufa atifa ¥ E2at-
aiaifa, he who believes, finds God. aifaai raft
wai areia, he who gives alms, will go to heaven.
ay Ua a oa ae te a ayia fafa: wagaray, he
who could not see Rama, and whom Raima did
not see, was despised among all the people.

Na298 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART III.

2. The Relative pronoun is sometimes used
like an Adjective pronoun of the indefinite kind;
as, aaa usta aq, placed in some new vessel. a
afeeia, whatever any one wishes.

3. When not particularly emphatic, the Per-
sonal pronouns may be omitted at the pleasure
of the writer, the terminations of the verb being
always sufficient to express the diiferent persons ;
as, avifu, Ido. avtifa, thou doest. avtifa, he does.
Regie, they do.

4. w= is frequently used as a Demonstrative
pronoun, in which case it is often equivalent to
a definite article; as, @ tis fawatara, the king
reflected. a4 zarintaita, and the aged husband
said.

In poetry it is not always particularly emphatic; as,
ase, L. awa: feat ara ye faa aa, Raima, having
crcumambulated his father, departed.

o. The Possessive case of the Personal pro-
nouns is commonly used in preference to the
Adjective pronoun of the Possessive kind, and is
governed by the noun with which it is connected ;
as, AMA or aA ala, my word. AB wa, his wealth.

6. The Reciprocal pronoun, when used as a no-
minative, is of the third person, and when used
to express great respect, isputin the plural num-
ber; as, tiaaanfeat atrauara, do thou practise cha-CHAP. Iv. | SYNTAX, 299

° 2 = Lee
rity, virtue, &c. wasp way Srfaarma:, Lam come
hither to hear of virtue from thee.

 

 

CHAPTER -IV,

THE SYNTAX OF THE VERBS.

 

Balle LB A
A verb must agree with its Nominative
case, expressed or understood, in number
and person ; as,

weruatta, £ declare. aE a, do thou
fell us. & xeaqaqaryzata, he spoke this word.
WIT Ge:, the sages said. Arat a aWata,
who has not heard? sea waa Ua afeata a
awa, he is a friend who is faithful both in
prosperity and adversity.

1. When two or more nouns are joined toge-
ther by a copulative conjunction, they must have
the verb in the plural; but when joined together
bya disjunctive conjunction, or a preposition, they
must have it in the singular: as, #2 9 ufasi a
RITA SF aN feat | a4:, Kotkaiyé, Sumitra, and the
renowned Cowshilya followed. wt qa a afi300 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART III.

ufgefa a Sia, neither woman nor man, however
wise, knows. #& Ta sual ws aaa at afar,
therefore either I, or Ramd, or the king, or
Litkshmind, shall die. sanfuer waaay grea:
de fasta, the divine Viishisthd, together with the

Pn zhbmyne 20 WMQItINnNS
Bi GNMUNS, WS WALEMNE.

2. The verb to be, and verbs passive when
used denominatively, admi¢ a nominative case
before and after them; in affirmative sentences
the verb zo be is generally omitted. As, wa sIfe

~. : fps e ss e <
wer ae, and this is the sixth month. Te: Warwaa
¢ L si ° 2 ° 7 e e
ayaun:, the preservation of his subjects (ts) the
p 2] = cA °
most important duty of aking. xaraia, Vaart

oo oe sit: ° cart Cc ° e © *
Fa AVTAINAC | AIA BAA PHA FRAIT Vat I

. 2 ; ° 2 7 ° x eye
the union of all metals (is) from their ductility ;
of beasts and birds from instinct ; of fools from
fear and avarice; of good men from experience.

~, ° .
sai faa ts, a dog is made king.

=<
ROUSE & Fah.

Transitive verbs, whether Common, ‘Ac-
tive, or Deponent, govern the Objective
case; as,

fatu aa que, cut asunder my bonds. TT
ycetu, recewe the kingdom. au Wel, theyCHAP. IV. | SYNTAX. 30]

blew the shell. & stra cadafa % a fasta wey,
whom does not prosperity elate? whom does
not death destroy? aat atae At, save me
quickly. wet agian: yraaw, he related
minutely all that happened.

Verbs meaning to be, become, be ashamed, be agree-
able, be pure, be afraid, be old, he mad, be weary, be
foolish, be angry, be proud, play, shine, stand, lie, sit,
dwell, awake, sleep, increase, decay, enter, go out, live,
die, laugh, cry, fly, flee, rise, set, run, wander, bathe,
sink, and fight, are intransitive, and do not govern
the Objective case.

1. sve, sit, with sfaor sa; a4. be angry,
with any preposition; aq, dwell, with sfa, 34, Si,
or su; fay, enter, with afa, fa, or 4; XT, sleep,
and wr, stand, with fu, govern the Objective case.
As, svare amy, he dwells in the city. fraiafa-
arnt rex:, the teacher is angry with the scholar.
araarafa, he shall dwell with me. aarafafafazata,
he briters on the practice of virtue. wegafana,
he sleeps on the bed.  afafasfa wad, he presides
over all,

2. Verbs of motion govern the Objective case :
as, waarafey vex, L went to that country. we 3,
they went home.

3. Verbs of motion with a noun in the Objec-
tive often supply the place of other verbs; as,

, A ‘ ~ BK ees
wla Ba or say, he meditated. qrarnar a afa fafRat,302 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART IIL.

the mind of the good undergoes no change. =arfa
aq: aaafd, the family arrives at honor.

4. Some verbs are accompanied with their
corresponding nouns in the Objective case; as,
faacfat daqia.e, they lamented (or made) a great
lamentation. W~a arafa, he sings a song.

5. Verbs meaning remember, pity, desire, and
abound ; those having the agent of the verb and
the verb itself formed from a root signifying
some disease, and a few others, take the Objective
or Possessive case; as, amy or ara: witfa, he re-
members his mother. uy or Gag araa, she de-
sires her son. tit eafa Bt or Verve, the disease
affects the thief. at or Sarre faeua aeafa, killing
the thief he departs. 32% or STAG UMA, he
changes the quality of the water.

6. The ellipsis of the verb is admissable in
cases where it is easily supplied; and in such cases,
being understood, it has the saine influence as
though expressed; as, fai getia fe Pom faa war
faa aa: | father gives only a limited (pleasure),
a brother only a limited (one), and a son oniy a
limited (one).

—a—_CHAP. IV. | SYNTAX. 305

Be Ta - DX,

Transitive verbs when formed into Causals,
and verbs which signify imparting to, or the
contrary, govern two Objective CaseS; as,

Hala aH ay TT, he made the worshippers
understand true endl Vay IGas rst a ate,
L made the sa ge touch his son. Trevaraaw Ta
wate, he instructed the herdsmen in play.
Hod trata, he addressed his discourse to
Bhirita, gag qate aq, and he concealed
at from his sons. nara hey, he churned
nectar from the sea. ania sé Ar, I sup-
plicate of him liberation. avéu was TAIT,
he asked of the herdsmen the news.

1. Intransitive Causals take only one Objective
case, and Transitives in some instances have on-
ly one expressed; as, Wau wife qwiaan, the sun
dries the corn. «fy BAA fawia aaa vary yasieq
HItiad waa, Ls there any so wise as to be able to
effect. the second birth of my sons ?

2. Some Causal verbs in the Active voice have
a Passive signification, and take an Instrumental
and Objective case, instead of two Objectives;
as, Tia: afaHt Raa, Rama caused the Joes to
be devoured by the monkies. sa go, bring, aea

304 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. __ | PART III.

e
weep, RE eat, wt take, CE sound, and & dare,
are used in this manner.

wu do, and @ take; also afHae_ prostrate, and sz
see in the Middle voice, have two forms; as, {ra
KUTA ATS Sa, Rama made the monkies build a bridge ;
or SAAR ATL aaeefa Traa, Rama caused a bridge to
be made by the monkies.

W take, and we desire, in the Causal take a Dative
case; as, witad Sed Wai, he holds all for the good.

3. Verbs of esteeming take two Objective
cases, or an Objective of the person and Dative of
the thing; as, am zu or cura ay sd, Ido not va-
lue thee a straw. wa food, 1% acrow, a1 a boat,
wa a parrot, Zura, a jackall, are used only in
the Objective case ; as, a mat are a aaa, he does
not value thee a crow.

4. Verbs meaning to barter may take two Ob-
jective cases, or an Obj. of the thing and Inst. of
the weight, measure, or quantity; as, fear or
fasiua alufausd, he purchases the grain by two
drons (at a time.)

Fi ages
Re Ete Hs Xe

Any verb may admit the Instrumental
case of the word, which is expressive of
the instrument by which, or of the manner
in which, the action is performed; as,CHAP. IV. | SYNTAX. 505

Sara qtia aa, he killed. him with an ar-
row. TRAATEN Ua HATE, he should do his
endeavour with vigour. SILAS as, he should
save his wife by his wealth. a€at BTA AAt-
sfagua, the time passed away with great
affection.

1. Transitive verbs may take an Objective case
with the Instrumental; as, wera sa afaaa,
he refreshed the king with water. svarnaya ara
zai aaafa uraa:, the good shew compassion to ‘all
being. s, through compar ing them with themselves.

2. Verbs meaning to fill, satisfy, or please,
take the Instrumental, sometimes the Possessive
Case ; As, Ta aa afar, thou canst be pleased with
any thing. wta or Wage Ta sf, he is full of
enjoyment. |

1g, ree, takes the Instrumental or Objective case;

as, 318 or SISTA lata, he plays at dice,

———<f>-———
RoU bh B KE

All verbs take the Dative case of the ob-
ject to which any thing is communicated ;

as,306 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART Ill.

faara cara, let him give to his friend.
araaitasa, she told him her mind. wd Ziae,
it is agreeable to me. WaT ae va He, I
related to him the fear. Tratqwra TH AT-
RTE, he promised the kingdom to FV ebeshanu.

l. Verbs of the above description generally
take two cases, the Dative, and sometimes the
Loc. of the person, with the Obj. of the thing.
As, grat ua eer, he gave wealth and jewels to
the Brahmins. am eae Ulaat Tiafawye,
thou who desirest to give the country to the prince,
thine elder brother.

2. Verbs meaning to slander, be angry with,
hate or envy, conceal or injure, take the Dative
case ; as, stain aug calf ea S fr ag, whom she
slandered, was angry with, envied, concealed, and
abused.

3. With the verb éo be, the object may be in
the Dative or Possessive case; as, 4g]: or Bat
quay, may happiness be to (or of) the good.

i

BRU LE XT.

Every verb admits the Ablative case of

the person or thing from which any thing
proceeds ; as,CHAP. Iv. ] SYNTAX. 307

aTHTR ata, he goes from the village. eRt-
argta, he looks from the palace. Stata ara:
Waitad, from covetousness springs lust. #=t-
way std, she wiped the tear from her
eyes. ea atteaated, he acquires know-
ledge from his tutor.

I. Verbs expressive of fear or subjugation
take the Ablative case; as, Sfena aur RaTaIe-

vaifea:, they dread a liar as they do a serpent.
eos me he ts overcome by distress.

2. With some verbs the Ablative case of a
noun, &c. is used instead of an adverb; as, sare
a Sars he addressed him ki ndly. HAT e al
AIS a, wheref efore are you come hither ?

Se <

RULE. XIII.

When two words of different significa-
tions are connected together, the verb re-
quires the latter or connected word to be
in the Possessive case; but when the sim-
ple relation of one to the other is expressed,
the latter must be in the Locative case. As,

HAWR TIA AAG weTaata, There is a
unity in the designs, words, and actions of3038 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART IIT.

noble minds. Fa fang frag MTT TIAA,
teachers may tell a secret to a beloved disci-
ple. xfa waa atcrvat Gaafeuafast, this
we have heard of the wise, who have declar-
ed it untous. waa TIARTAIA war, Crishne
killed the washerman for the clothes. a ata
fafgetwar FH me, don’t describe my excellen-
cies to me. Sat wat ayaa aracrsy s faw-
afta, to-day the virtuous one will maugu-
rate thee for the regency.

1. In some cases the first noun is included in
the verb, or supplied by some other word or clause
connected with it; as, eau asnfa, he makes a sa-
crifice of (or by) the wood. sex QirMRt ‘aa:, the
physician changes the quality of the water.
aE aerafa, do what you please to her. a3:
qa ATRUTAR AH TAA A | Aaa MUALA ATS | AHA ||
O! thou art able to describe to us, desirous of
hearing, him whose incarnation is for the welfare
and happiness of all beings.

2. When the connection or relation exists be-
tween the agent and object of the verb, the ob-
ject is still put in the Poss. or Loc. case; as, wHrat-
aquafa ana: fafa: ae | liberation and praise

ae
attend NG OTBIp PENS: TAT WANG WSAT STAT |
BUAAG, Ceayas FT: wa Fafwa: he who looks up-CHAP. IV. | SYNTAX. 309

on another's wife as his mother, upon another's
wealth as a clod of earth, and on all creatures
as himself, ts a wise man.

It is the opinion of many Pundits, that the Posses-
sive case may be used optionally for the Objective;

and occasionally for the Instrumental or Dative.
ae Gp tee
RU CL BV XEVe

One verb governs another that is con-
structed with it, or depends upon it, in the
Infinitive mood ; as,

Wate HAAS a, thou oughtest to shew fa-
vour,. WE aauay a, she began to enquire.
STI atisd atta, they go to play in the
evening. zat WEN, aratad, let messengers
go to bring them. faaa areeta a ae ttaa-
que, ina dangerous road, and without a
companion, I cannot endure to lave.

1. The Infinitive is frequently used in construc-
tion with adjectives and participles, the _govern-
ing verb being understood ; as, Gre, Far afa-
Ra ayia ut | some are clever in explaining, and
others in retaining the contents. ata Sarees Wed: WaT:
yufed afa, who could not be sustained in the bat-310 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART III.

tle by all the gods and infernals. fafawiat «uafad,
what is now proper to be done ?

2. Words signifying capability or fitness, in-
stead of the Infinitive mood, sometimes take a
noun in the Dative or Possessive case; as, TAATa
or Tave@ was, capable of going.

3. In some instances the Infinitive is omitted,
in others the word that governs it; but this omis-
sion takes place only where the word may be
easily supplied from what has preceded. As, aa
WiasyreEW wage, thou oughtest (to do) what is
consistent with my wishes. usa afa wertrat at
arafaansg@, the great king, who is supreme, (is
abie) to pué me in possession of the kingdom.

=i

mw, Dr ey,

Passive verbs require the Instrumental
case of the agent by which, or of the man-
ner in which, the action is performed ; as,

Touat aaa, he was hound by the enemy.
ae ca wayat, let it be sought hy him who
desires it. araa afeatfafa:, which is receiv-
ed by the twice-horn. wie fara, he is left
hy life, G.e. he is dead.) tai aat nwaTRt
Gat Gaga waa, a beneficent, compassionate,CHAP. IV. | SYNTAX. S11

and virtuous master, is with difficulty obtain-

ed.

1. In some instances the Possessive case is
used instead of the Instrumental : as, facings aay
qa fare, Lf must blame the deed which was done
by my father.

2. Some Passive verbs take two Instrumental
cases, one of the person by whom, and the other
of the thing by which, the action is performed;
as, auaieear Har, he was killed by me with an
arrow.

adits] takes either the Instrumental or Dative of the
thing ; as, Wawt or Way aig: afta Tar WT liberation
was purchased by the good with faith. 7

3. Such verbs as take two Objective cases in
the Active or Middle voice may take one of them
in the Passive; as, agar aa amg wa, Cow-
shilya must be inquired of by thee respecting
her welfare.

4. Intransitive verbs in the Active are some-
times used with a Passive signification, in which
case they have the same government as Passive
verbs; as, saaa fe feafa arate a aarce:, Works
are accomplished by exertion, and not by wishes.

0. Verbs of motion are generally used in the
Passive with an Active signification, and have
the agent in the Nom. case; as, afa @faat sfaz:,312 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. __[ PART III.

he again entered into his own hole. #4 wa: 84
ayiuanen aa, then in the morning they all went
to whatever place they pleased.

6. Impersonal verbs, being always the same
as the 3d person singular of the Passive, have
the same government as the Passive ; as, S=a #21,
it is said by me. “Wa wega, it is related by lim.

Those which signify to pity or remember, take the
Instrumental case of the person, and the Possessive of
the thing; as, HAq Taya edeya, Pity is exercised by
Daivadutta to the believer.

ei
R’Usb Ee XV.

Participles have the same agreement as
adjectives, and the same government as the
verbs from which they are formed ; as,

WM: Wat UIA, a deer wandering at his
pleasure. “rat fxd qewt, a wife speak-
ing pleasantly. Zuarary saeurzata, thus
resolving, and going near, he said. €@ tay
aaa, he was making the universe. TAT
aq Sa atgatatfa, hearing this it was en-
quired by him, Who is this that ts come?
aa nated ta: @:, he was devoted to the good

of all creatures.CHAP. Iv. | SYNTAX. 313

1. The Indeclinable and Present participles
are used instead of verbs in the former part of a
clause or sentence; as, sa aifa Sl Pau aa Et W,
having bathed here in this river, receive this oe
gold chain. xasiaq raat sfaaa auifay a fata, of
serving, sear ching in every direction, and seeing
his condition, he said.

2. Participles are frequently used instead of
verbs in the last clause, or at the end of a sen-
tence; sometimes with the addition of the auxi-
liary verb to be, but generally without it. As, aeqr-
Bevan ste aaa: why hast thou not come hither
with thine army ? faagaifa fatay at qapaeaA:,
wherefore, leaving the army at a distance, hast
thou come hither? at us Jueqraa BRIA, (we
wish to hear the account) which Voishimpayiini
related to the king.

3. Participles of the Ist Future tense govern
the Instrumental or Possessive case; as, WATATTA
FA Mag Ur fara, if is altogether necessary for me to
accompany thee. aaatfa ar asa, this ought not
to be done indeed by the mind. aafazaqaqumtafet
sat saa wrsa, this wood is inhabited by unheard
of monsters ; we must therefore leave it. arama
uqtaigal aifraagar:, the duty of servants is ex-
ceedingly difficult, and is even impracticable by

ascetics.
Pp314 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART ILI.

4, The Indefinite Passive Participles are some-
times used in the Neuter gender as nouns; 4s,
anfai, life; wifad, language; 4%, union.

 

CHAPTER V.

THE SYNTAX OF ADVERBS.
——<>—_-

RULE XVII.

Adverbs, except in a few instances, have
no government of case or tense, nor any
definite situation in the sentence ; as,

sfanxu «afta, they weep bitterly. Stfa
gra:, he sings slowly. «fara wat art, your
word must always be kept. HAHA Te qt et,
may good ever attend you. Te aatfa a oa
qava ae afata:, go thither to-morrow, stay
to-day with your counsellors. @ wafa aat
Wrarsa | eat we aata faufa a fast Hafsas,
when he falls into great distress, then he
throws all. the blame on his servants, and does
not consider his own obstinacy.

1. A few adverbs have the same government
as the adjectives from which they are formed;CHAP. V. | SYNTAX. 315

as, a fafana avige TerTstfeat, nothing can be
done by me besides thy installation.

sta in vain, and wa only, are used with the Instru-
mental case or the Indeclinable past participle. s7q,
meaning enough, requires the Dat.; ‘arat, variously,
and Yax, separately, take the Obj. Inst. or Abl.; SE,
meaning after, takes the Abl. As, HaNRaa or ae
wat, having eaten in vain. se WEVA, enough for a
strong man. faszafa THX Fa a AA aa a TAG God
is distinct from the universe, but it is not separate from
him. WATS Ae tras, after morning is mid-day.

2. Some few adverbs affect the tenses of the
verbs :—

(1.) “4 changes the present tense into the past ; U7t
and ara change it to the ale in signification, As,
afa@, he killed. Uti emnaepl, Kulkee will first be
seen. |

(2.) er and afe when ? may be used with the
Present or 2d Future to signify future time; as, x@t
a wwia or saifa, when shall I see him?

(3.) ay why? and Ha perhaps, with the Present of
the Indicative, and a particle of affirmation with the
Qd Future, signify either present, past, or future time;
as, ay a farety, why doest thou, didst thou, or wilt
thou despise him. 4 falga a fafecufa, thou certainly
doest, &c. despise him.

(4.) ar is used with the Imperative and Precative
moods, and with the Indefinite and 2d Future tenses;

A aa a, may his mind
as, Ae, dont go. ATA wa AAT YA, may his mine316 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART III.

never be fixed on virtue. waa Ziety, may he not
see him. at fatefa wd, may pleasure never cease.

(5.) req is sometimes used with the Imperfect and
Indefinite; as, areq HaEa, may trouble never be. Ae
arupa dal way, may he never act the part of the good.
In such instances as the above the augment of the
Imperfect and the Indefinite is dropped.

3. Though the adverbs have no invariable po-
sition in the sentence, it will be found in a ma-
jority of instances that they precede the words
which they qualify.

(1.) When they are placed in opposition to each
other, they generally have a corresponding situation
in the sentence; as,

FAS Ja FAY VAT ay | Beq aA a WHITH TH |
AMM OAS AQIS AT Vasyl aay rat fare aes Ufa ||
From what, and hy what, and how, and when, and
what, and how much, and where any good or bad action
exists; from that, and hy that, and so, and then, and
that, and so much, and there it springs, from the influence
of a superior power. aay Vala Aegina AW yy
feat, as long as my teeth do not fail, so long I will
gnaw your bonds, i. e. I will gnaw while my teeth last.

(2.) aay and araq are sometimes used alone; as,
Pag Ha a: US UAVs HVAT! Val ae safes Tre-
HIsia | do thou, O great prince, be our king to-day,
before some calamity befalls this our destitute kingdom.

(3.) We1, Tar, and agi are frequently reserved till the

close of the line in poetry; Taz vanifaay: aan fetCHAP. VI. | SYNTAX. 317

WRI | then desirous of seeing Rama, and full of joy,
they proceeded. fx ar: Gat fasta Ty RATT aat |
their deeds all perish, like an insignificant rivulet in the
SUMMELr SEASON.

(4.) aur is sometimes used for than after the com-
parative degree of an adjective; as, a @qat WaT Sai
fafashar aeat | ae foarte WaT AE at aaafaar ii there
cannot be a greater act of virtue than obedience to a
father, or the fulfilment of his word.

4. Two negatives are equivalent to an affirma-
tive; as, defe arawat, they say (respecting spirit)
that there is not an indivisibility, i. e. it is divi-
sible. 91m: TATSTA qanaafaaurar, he should
bathe in the morning, when the sun has not an
uncrimson-like hue.

sq is often used in composition with participles for
a3 as, UWA afar aisai aye fauwie y | not seeing
his beloved wife, he inquired, and wassad

 

CHAPTER VI.

THE SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS.
—=> —g>—— ~
BU LE. evil.

Separable Prepositions govern the Posses-
sive case; as,318 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART It.

ay Vas yet wat, then he went after him.
Gea asl AA geaatea, all of them are al-
ways praising you before me. Fe: Baty
yma ufaax, che just one entered into the

presence of his mother. Watt TEI Ret Wat
ny aaazata, then putting onadreadful frown,
he addressed him. Luger

1. Of the prepositions enumerated page 1505
the first class govern the Objective case; the
second, the Instrumental: and of the _ third,
siqia takes the Ablative.; si the Obj. or Abl.;
Zu, aa, and afee the Obj. or Poss. ; and faar the
Obj. Inst. or Abl. As, Sratayfa, in the worlds.
airevarafy, above the worlds. arity mi ae, there
is no happiness without thee. wa we ae, go with
him.

2. Those signifying far from or near to, may
take the Poss. or Abl. case; as, 4: W{HIT or
UTHAUar a age or warefara, he who is far from
God, is near to sin.

3. The prepositions are frequently compound-
ed with the noun, and the case which they govern
omitted ; as, aaa ea uARa, they went before with
the child.

They are sometimes used alone without the case
which they govern; as, Wea wag afa ae Hafa die fa
Aral ae aa ala UE qafaana {| death travels with us,CHAP. VII. | SYNTAX. 319

death resides with us, and having gone to the greatest
distance, death returns with us.

sifa beyond, sfu before, and yfa to, are sometimes
used as separable Prepositions with the Obj. case; a7
and uff meaning without, st meaning as far as, and ¥fa
meaning far, with the Ablative case; #fy meaning
under, and 34 above, with the Locative case. As, #7q
ufa ofa, she went to her husband. STINT WT ASA,
he went as fur as the wood Vrinda. wz: yay, his
immortality was for his faith. AAT waaty qHI, all
the world is under its proprietor.

6. Prepositions, when compounded with verbal
roots, produce various changes in their meaning;
and the compounds thus formed have, according
to their meaning, the same government as sim-
ple verbs. As, =r give, sve receive, nerfaaar sey,
he receives instruction from his tutor. % hear,
SIX promise, Te TIAA, he promised the king-
dom to him.

 

CHAPTER VII.

THE SYNTAX OF CONJUNCTIONS.

a

ROWE AS

Conjunctions connect the same moods
and tenses of verbs, and cases of nouns,
adjectives, pronouns, and participles; as,320 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART III.

at tet faatue af< wafs araraa, O boy,
goa begging, and if you see the cow bring
her. wate fawate a, he cried out, and la-
mented. VaR ata waaay a ay, J in-
deed swear to you by your veracity and vir-
tue. QT meut grat UW, she ws beautiful and

young. eara aafuad, let him give pleasure

ms

to me and thee. quw mutica: wifeas, he
was killed and devoured by a tiger.

I. Insimple descriptions the conjunctions are
frequently omitted at the pleasure of the writer ;
aS, SIN wae: afer WHUraaa sot, some poets
have celebrated, (and) others are now celebrating.
dig aaafaantl amaadadl | TATA a frei
Awan | he (the moon), wandering over the hea-
vens, destroying the darkness, containing ten hun-
dred rays, (and) walking in the midst of the stars.

2. In giving orders, or in instances where dis-
patch is required, the sentence is rendered em-
phatic by the omission of the conjunctions; in
minute descriptions by adding them to every
word. As, yaaa fa xa tsiaataa, arise quickly,
why sleepest thou? bring theking. AqQAWYy CIaAyY
aaa Vfaat:, and the soldiers were dancing, and
laughing, and singing.

3. Ifa different construction is used in the
two parts of the clause or sentence, the rule doesCHAP. VII. | SYNTAX. 321

not apply; sometimes also it is not attended to in
the past tenses. As, areaeq ARI Fat Safe tree,
drive on, O thou possessor of the great share, and
thou wilt see Rimi. Fy saaKiqy azait TT! S|
Jrom these (sprung) the families of Kuri, Vudu,
and Bhiruta. Wei Wy: TyafARTATiRY, they bath-
ed, drank some water, and washed their Clothes.

4. Conjunctions meaning if, do not always re-
quire the Subjunctive mood; as, 4fe stafa wwafa,
if he lives, he sees ; afe slim, afk, of he should
live, he will see. aRgerafa or grarafa serves,
if the tutor comes, or should come, then read,
aft waiafaqat ufiafe wfaafe, if you associate with
the good, you will be (good).

When asupposition is made, and an inference drawn
from it, the Subjunctive mood is commonly used; as,
aaeufsar uaa wfaean, of there had been know-
ledge, there would have been pleasure. afe may be ac-
companied with its corresponding conjunction -q7=t1;
as, Waren, ule ar TBI SUPA AW Brartaa, if a hun-
gry traveller should he seen, then he should be fed with
clarified butter.

When sifq and sitq are used with verbs expressive of
contempt in the Indicative mood, Present tense, the
verb may have a past, present, or future signification ;
as, sifu wi fazecfe, thou also doest, didst, or wilt despise

Aim.CHAPTER VIII.

THE SYNTAX OF INTERJECTIONS.

moO he ae

Interjections, whether expressed or under-
stood, require the Vocative case ; as,

SIA WA =uty, he said, Hear! O travel-
ler! st aan fe wat wa, O thou deceiver!
what hast thou done? Ba ala outa frre,
O friend! pay particular respect to him.
LG UTGAS Ae ceHaatictu, O thou false,
malicious, mean, wicked wretch!

Sw

The Interjections are more commonly ui.derstood
than expressed, and in general no obscurity arises from
this, as the termination of the Vocative case, or the
construction of the sentence, sufficiently indicates when
an exclamation is made.

1. In exclamations of grief the noun is some-
times put in the Objective case; as, sq ae

aN oN e : ~far . =
TRT Way waway, and lifting up his hands he
cried out, O this impassable sea of trouble,
Ha Tar AR, Oh! the affliction! Oh! the dis-
tress !CHAP. Vill. | SYNTAX. 323

Tua and a always require the Objective case; as,
Tagitad uifee, woe to a wicked life! ‘ar are, Alas for
the people! 1 is sometimes used with the Nomina-
tive; as, se fetaga: Wren sha, O Hertnytika !
thou art worthy of praise.

2. The Interjections used in offerings and in-
vocations require the Dative case; as, gut aaz
gay, Vushit to the sun! a flower (I offer). ver
qa yy, Swaha to fire! a flower ! aut fae ue,
Swadha to my father ! a flower !

Such expressions as UE ax:, salutation to the good!
wfaiua, health to the king! &c. together with the
above, may be referred to this place ; or, under the consi-
deration that a verb is understood, tothe 11th Rule.CHAP EX.

EXAMPLES OF PARSING.
a

Having finished the rules which relate to
the formation of words and sentences, it is
now necessary to furnish some examples to
illustrate the proper application of them.

a
zat aman ware fara & |

at

= 2 a ~~
wa ofaaedaiata efaat aa fatarat

O prince! learn of me the origin of the
world: (at first) all was as water, and
Jrom this the earth was formed.

Ramayana.

xa’, an adjective pronoun of the demonstrative kind,

fem. gen. sing. num. obj. case; agreeing with the

succeeding word according to Rule UI. of Syntax,

which says: “* Adjectives, and words used adjectively,

must agree with the nouns which they qualify in
gender, number, and case.”

SIARAUPT, a compound sub. of the 3rd genus and

2nd species, of the 2nd declension, fem. gen. sing,

=>CHAP. IX. | PARSING. 295

num. obj. case, governed by the verb fHaty, according
to Rule VOI. which says: “ Transitive verbs, whether
common, active, or deponent, govern the objective
case,”’

SITAT|, a compound of the same kind as the preced-
ing, of the Ist decl. mas, gen. sing. num. voc, case, ac-
cording to Rule XX. whichsays: “ Interjections, whether
expressed or understood, require the vocative case.”

faaiu, a verb trans, of the Ist conj, compounded
of the preposition fa and GUA, EL, understand ; Act.
and Mid, Pres. @rw‘a,i, Perf. gata, qu, Fut. aifaan.
the imp. mood, 2nd per, sing. agreeing with its nom.
case mm understood, according to Rule VII. which says:
‘ A verb must agree with its nom. case, expressed or
understood, in number and person.”

H, a personal pronoun, first person, sing. num. poss.
case, governed by the verb faara, according to Rule
XIII. which says: “ When two words of different
significations are connected together, the verb requires
the latter or connected word to be in the poss. case;
but when the simple relation of one to the other is
expressed, the latter must be in the locative case.”

aad, an adjective pronoun of the indef. kind, neuter
gen. sing. num. nom, case, agreeing with efaa accord-
ing to Rule If]. as before,

waaa, for wfad by Rule IV. of Orthography,
which says; “ °, when followed by =—¥, becomes

=—a; when followed by a vowel, a It is a com-326 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART III.

mon substantive of the lst declension, neut. gen. sing.
num.; and nom. case to the verb eta.

wa, an adverb of comparison,

Say, an anomalous defective verb*, indic. mood,
imperf. tense, 3rd person sing. agreeing with its nom.
case ufad, according to Rule VII. as befere.

ufae}, a common sub. of the 4th declension, fem,
gen. sing. num.; nom. case to the verb s11@a.

aa, an adverb of place.

fa‘aiml, a passive participle of the indef. tense,
compounded of the preposition Tat and aI—s, fa, meu-
sure. Pres. pass. Han. Perf. aa. Fut. arat or arfaar.
Indef. saifa, part, faa; the fem. gen, sing. num. nom.
case, agreeing with the sub. uf@al, according to Rule
XVI. which says: “ Participles have the same agree-
ment as adjectives, and the same government as the

verbs from which they are formed.”

i

faut Shae fcras aaraHAaed |
ewaWAAe A TAAL qAAVs |

WVhen this world was destitute of radiance
and light, and completely enveloped in dark-
ness, there existed one immense egg, (which
was) the incorruptible seed of all creatures.

Mahabharuta.CHAP. IX. | PARSING. 327

fay, a compound adjective of the Ist genus and 5th
species, neut, gen. sing. num. loc. case, agreeing
With Safa understood, according to Rule III. note 5.

sfqa (for sifa_by Rule II, Note 3*,) an adjective
pronoun of the demonstrative kind, neut. gen. sing.
num. loc. case, agreeing with saf# according to Rule
If. or used substantively according to Rule III.
Note 5.

fatiera, a compound of the same kind as the pre-
ceding, having also the same agreement.

Were, (for Wag: by Rule VI.) an adverb of place.

H#eaI, a common sub, of the 5th decl. neut. gen.
sing. num, inst. case, governed by the participle an,
according to Rule XVI.

ai, a passive participle of the indef. tense, from
d—w, skreen; the loc, case, having the same agree-
ment as Sha.

gauze, (for dea_by Rule VII.) an adjective, positive
State, neut, gen. sing. number, nom. case, agreeing
with ssa according to Rule III.

STIS, (for siz by Rule IV.) a common sub. of the
Ist declension, neut. gen. sing. num. nom, case to the
verb Sy.

BAT, (for SHA by Rule VIII.) an anomalous verb

active of the Ist conjugation, from Ww be; Pres.

 

* The rules referred to in parentheses at the beginning of the
sentence may be found in the Orthography, and those referred
to at the end of the sentence in the Syntax.328 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART ITI.

wafa, perf. aya, fut. ufaat, indef. ST 5 the indic. mood,
indef. tense, third person sing. agreeing with its nom.
case sus, according to Rule VII.

wa, a numeral adj. neut. gen. sing. num. nom.
case, agreeing with sz by Rule III.

Vsial, a common sub. of the Ist declension, fem.
gen. plur. num. poss, case, governed by at according
to Rule I,

etst4, (for asi by Rule IV.) a common sub. of the

Ist declen. neut. gen. sing. num. nom. case, corres-

aw

ponding with qaug, according to Rule I.
sTqa is a compound adjective of the Ist genus, and

oth species, agreeing with a\s according to Rule III.
ae
aia tea fear at aifsaratsarteg |
q UCU Agata uitats area |)

In my worship the distinction of sex, caste,
name, profession, &c. avails nothing ; hut
faith as all prevalent. Bhagaviita.

nr

«lq, a common sub. of the Ist declen. neut. gen.
sing. num. loc. case, according to Rule IL. weg is the
ws 5° eo 6 & NL, accore 1k Ss O vu e e aed iS 1e€
same.

Ce NN Pe Es r

jager, (for fage: by Rule V.) a common sub. of
the Ist dec. the mas. gen. sing. num. nom. case to the
verb sf understood,

a7, a disjunctive conjunction. See Rule XIX.CHAP. Ix. | PARSING, 329

fon!

 

sifaararaatee, a compound sub. of the Ist genus

and species, the second decl. mas. gen. plu. num. loc,
case, according to Rule II.

a, an adverb of negation.

AITW, a common sub. of the Ist decl. neut. gen.
sing. num. nom. case, according to Rule VII. note 2.

a_ As, a compound sub. of the 3rd genus and 4th
species, the Ist decl. neut. gen. sing. num. loc. case,
according to Rule II.

wim, (for afH: by Rule V.) a common sub, of the
2d dec. fem. gen. sing. num. and the nom. case to
syiq understood.

wa, a disjunctive conjunction.

f¥, an expletive conjunction.

aitw, the same as before.
ee

fata ag fafactau: aut aaifsaat a ger:
aarata |

Lhe words of which king the learned re-
lished more than nectar*. Norshudha.,

facta, an indeclinable participle, from fa and @ drink,
agreeing with aut: according to Rule XVI.

4@, a relative pronoun, agreeing with the next
word by Rule VI.

 

* Hom. Iliad. b.j.1, 249.
Rr330 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART Ill:

faifarferw:, a compound adjective of the 2nd genus
and Ist species, used substantively ; the mas. gen, sing.
num. poss. case, governed by «wi according to Rule I.

a qi, acommon sub. of the Ist dec. fem. gen. sing.
num, obj. case, governed by fasta, according to Rule
XVI.

~ . 2B d =N

qaifead, (format + sifeaat by Rule I.) aq, an ad-
verb of comparison. 31g 44, aregular trans. deponent
verb of the 6th conjugation, from sq and =, FM, favor ;

os A . EMR i ES ras

pres. silffgan, perf. sires, fut. aes. The ind. mood,

“ese F +a S£ )-. y os } i > 36 90° ‘ee ] o rit —1 J :
present tense, 3rd person plural, agreeing with @ur,
according to Rule VII.

a. an adverb of negation.

qul:, an adjec. pos. state, used substantively; the

a : e

r~,

mas, gen, plu. num, and nom, case to sifeam.

aumig, (for ul + sfa by Rule IV.) aut is a com.
sub. of the Ist dec. fem. gen. sing. num, obj, case,
governed by sIfs-a-j, according to Rule VIII. aq is

a copulative conjunction.

I
frat aysiat fetes frat goad

taal ceTqyiaat utes featiaete: owe |
Learning is a friend in travelling to afor-
eign country®, it is an excellent fortune, vt ts
highly respected by kings, it is pure wealth,
and he who is without it is a brute. Bhitrtry hairy,

* Cicer. pro Archia, p. 16,{
Hii

}
af
sri}

}
{
a)
Hal!
iti
t
| i
i

CHAP. IX. | PARSING. 331

far, a.com. sub. of the Ist decl. fem. gen. sing.
num, nom. case to the verb sjfe understood.

ays, (for ayaa: by Rule V.) a compound sub.
of the 3rd genus and 2nd species, the Ist decl. mas.
gen. sing. num. nom. case, according to Rule VII.
Note 2,

fae wana, a compound like the preceding. but of
the neut. gen. and loc. case, according to Rule II.

fazar, as before,

atau, (Gor Gt + Sai by Rule IV.) a¥ an adjective,
positive state, agreeing with Sad by Rule III. ead,
a com. sub, of the Ist decl. neut. gen. sing, num, nom,
case, according to Rule VII. Note 2,

Tis Syrstar, a compound adjective of the 2nd genus
and species, fem. gen. sing, num. nom. case, agreeing
with the noun fe according to Rule III.

wfaua, a comp. sub, of the 3rd genus and Ist spe-
cies, or it may be considered as two words like
Ute ae.

faafadia:, a compound adjective like Uae asa, but
mas, gen., agreeing with aq: understood,

UM:, a com. sub. of the 2nd decl. mas. gen. sing.

‘ . eet Nie y n )
num, nom, case, according to Rule VI, Note =.

+e —

“ Tr!

agai HA aaa flea ured Il
A fool, whilst he holdeth his peace, 2s

counted wise. Chanukya.dod SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. __ [ PART III.

area, (for araa + by Rule IX.) an adverb of
comparison, corresponding with aaq. See Rule XVI.
Note 3,

Wud, a regular intrans. deponent verb of the Ist
con}. from Wu —S, &, shine ; pres. wan, perf. TH, fut.
wifat; the indic. mood, pres. tense, 3rd person sing.
agreeing with its nom. case aa, according to Rule Vil.

aI, (for HR by Rule V.) an adjective used substan-
tively, of the mas. gen. sing, num. and is the nom.
case to the verb WA.

fafaga, (for fafa + a by Rule VIII.) fafa an
adjective pronoun of the indef. kind, neut. gen. sing.
num. obj. case. governed by the verb wad, according
to Rule VIII. 4, an adverb of negation.

wraq, a regular transitive deponent verb of the Ist
conj. from HTa— 5, R, speak ; pres. wre, perf. aware, fut.
uraar; the indic. mood, pres. tense, 3rd person sing.
agreeing with its nom, case ¥: understood, according

to Rule VII.
——_=g>—-——_
afcagnat faa wratad fares
a SS ~ aN

fey AAW Araya sfqmaqe: i

Therefore sacrifice should he constantly
made for our purification, since they whose
sims are not cleansed, are horn distinguished

by some odious def ormily. Prayiishchitts-titwd.

i)CHAP. IX. | PARSING. Jao

aftr, (by Rule IV.) a pass. participle of the Ist
fut. tense, from ST, move, act ; pres. qaqy, perf. at,
fut. afta, agreeing with yrafyq according to Rule XVI.

sat (for sya: by Rule V.) a copulative conjunction,

faa, an adverb of time.

raf a,acommon sub. of the Ist dec, neut. gen. sing,
num. nom. case to sfe understood.

faye, a common sub. of the 2nd dec, fem. gen
sing, num, dative case, according to Rule I. Note 2,

faze, (for fare: Ly by Rule VI.) an adjec. pos.
state, agreeing with SIW:, according to Rule I, @ is
a copulative conjunction.

aw, (for srw: by Rule V.) acommon sub. of the
Ist dec. neut. gen. sing, num. inst. case, governed by
amt, according to Rule XVI.
- aml, (for aw: by Rute V. Note 2.) a pass, participle
of the indef, tense from qsI—¥, ri, Si, EY, unite; Act.
and Mid, pres, aaf a aia, perf. wala, aa, fut. Gra,
agreeing with sfrenae, according to Rule XVI. or
Rule III. note 5.

sta, an anomalous verb*, the indic. mood, pres.
tense, Srd person plu. agreeing with its nom. case
Siam ay: :+; according to Rule VII,

sa sae, (for afasa ae: by Rule ILI. Note 3.)
a pepound adjective of ie Ist genus and 3rd species,
used substantively, the mas. gen, plu. num. and nom,
case to the verb s1a.

 

mee De ayme

 

3304 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART III.

gaara eat Hatta sa Ga stratia stata

From whom (God) all these things have

sprung, and by whom they subsist.
Faida.

aal, (for aa: by Rule V.) a relative pronoun, the
mas. or neut. gen. sing. num. abl. case for Tera",
governed by the verb 31 ai, according to Rule XII.

a1, an expletive.

guia, an adjective pronoun of the demonstrative
kind, agreeing with warfa, according to Rule III.

wns, a common sub. of the Ist decl. neut, gen.
plu. num. and nom. case to saa.

staai, an anomalous verb, the indic. mood, pres.
tense, ord person plu. agreeing with its nom. case
wate, according to Rule VII.

aa, a relative pronoun, sing, num. mas, or neut. gen.
inst. case, governed by the verb sttafaq, according to
Rule X.

simmfa, a passive participle of the indef. tense, from
the preceding verb; the neut. gen. plu. num. nom.
case, agreeing with yaria, according to Rule XVI.

staf, a regular intran, verb active of the Ist con-
jugation, from sta — 2, live; pres. stafa, perf. fasta,
fut. staat; the indic. mood, pres. tense, 3rd person
plu. agreeing with its nom. case watts, according to

Rule VII.

* See page 60.CHAP. Ix. | PARSING. 30

Siaaartenayag rs: gay WEA: as
svtaaganéa 4 aaafa ceulcaag cqetent
sa frat Sfa Upercatanece: RIiawTE |

The most important duty of an inaugurat-
ed king (is) the preservation of his subjects :
this cannot he done without discountenancing
the wicked, and an intimate. knowled ge of
the wicked cannot he gained without the study

of the law : hence it is said, that the study of
the law should be attended to daily.
Met akshura,

The first word is a compound adj. of the 2nd genus
and species, the mas, gen, sing. num, poss. case, agree-
ing with {rg:, according to Rule III,

tix, a common sub. of the 5th dec. mas. gen. sing.
num. poss, case, governed by war, according to Rule I.

qaqa, a compound sub. of the 3rd genus and 2nd
species, the Ist dec. neut. gen. sing. num. nom. case,
according to Rule VII. Note 3.

aTar, (for aH: by Rule V.) an adj. pos. state, agree-
ing with wa, according to Rule III,

Uar:, a common substantive of the Ist dec. mas. gen.
sing. num. and nom. case to the verb sif@q under-
stood.

A, (for na + “ by Rule IX.) 7 a personal pronoun,
3rd pers. sing’, num, neut. gen, ita nom, case to the

verb aayafy, wis a copulative conj. see Rule XVIII.336 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. __ [ PART III.

Telaa aa, (by Rule IV.) acompound sub. of the dard
genus and 2nd species, the Ist declension, neut. gen,
sing, num. obj. case, governed by sata, according to
Rule XVIII. Note 1.

simitm, a separable preposition.

a is an adverb of negation,

wajafa, an anomalous verb active of the Ist conjuga-
tion, from € and y be, (see page 234.) the indic. mood,
pres. tense, 3rd person sing, agreeing with its nom,
case 47, according to Rule VIL.

eeuiraiag, (by Rule IV.) a compound of the same
species as Fufage, nom, case to Ataf understood.
is a copulative conjunction.

Waa TWA, a compound of the same species as the
last, the instrumental case governed by faat, according
to Rule XVIII. Note 1.

faar is a separable preposition,

afa, (for 4 +. fa by Rule III.) a an adverb of nega-
tion, and xfa an adverb of quality.

Waatyz UAH, a compound sub, as before, but in the
nom. Case.

SETTER, a compound adverb, formed by doubling
=.%:, according to Rule V. of Orthography.

a Ta, (by Rule IV.) a passive participle of the
Ist fut. tense from %—F{, do; pass. pres. faan, perf.
aa, fut. Al, prec. WuUle, inf, aa, parts. aay ATUL
arr; the neut. gen. sing. num. nom. case, agreeing
with the preceding noun according to Rule XVI.CHAP. IX. | PARSING. 3337

Eas’, (for efi + say by Rule III.) efa, an adverb of
quality. =, a pass. participle of the indef. tense from
the anomalous verb q4—a, Sr, speak, (see page 238;)
the sing. num, neut. gen. nom. case, agreeing with
444 understood, according to Rule XVI.

<j

Vasa Si WeEARTsE: WATERS: |

(The relief to he acquired from sensible
objects) is disregarded hy those who are ac-
quainted with the nature of human misery ,
because these ohjects cannot afford relief im
every case, and because, even ‘where ihey do,
they cannot do it constantly*. Sankhya.

aq RAUAIA, a compound sub. of the 3rd genus Ist
species, the Ist decl, mas, gen, sing. num. abl. case,
according to Rule I, Note 2.

waa, a com, sub, of the Ist decl, mas. gen. sing.
num, loc, case, according to Rule II,

sfq, (for afy by Rule HI. Note 3.) a copulative con-
junction,

Warauaie, the same as the first word,

az:, (for wai by Rule VIIL) a pass. participle.of the
Ist fut. tense, from xt, quit, agreeing with yalali:

understood, according to Rule XVI.

 

* On comparing this with the ethical and philosophical writ-
ings of Aristotle, it will be observed how much they agree in
style, particularly in the quality of precision.

Ss339 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART ILI.

~ ° wid, : cigs 3 }
VAWAT:, a compound adjec. of the Ist genus, 4th

see 4 ‘ hac nee Te dS Beebe
species, used substantively, the inst. ca

°
e
9
tM
oD

ee
Pal

lu. govern-

“_~ e
ed -by 34:, according to Rule XVI,
See OTE
Be ee oe ee rte Pees erat
AN Geaqnt(a Ali gaa TARal ala BTHAR WAIUT
= CG~ = ~ 2D
CN S pen as ee a cect See eee ¢ ——
(AMaaitiaamataqnanieaiaeragt ataurgr

e
lio oral rachel So Tere Wass }
uy G ay HTS MAL Lej et ial ee |

My inquiry is: ‘Is there any one so learn-

i
ed, as to be able, hy moral instruction, to effect

y

the second birth of my sons, who are now

continually going astray, and ignorant of
the shastras ? Het

‘0 pudar sha.

HH, a personal pronoun of the Ist person sing, num,

e

poss. case, governed by aya, according to Rule VI.
Note 5.

—

PP eens. Base ea Al eee eS 1 oe
qaqa, (for aaa by Rule IV.) a com. sub, of the Ist

Jonl NAVIES aN “In or Fi } and 2 a 27 73

aec:, neut. Sen, Sing. num. and nom, case to Sea

S]@q, an anomalous defective verb, indic. mood, pres,

tance aaa) VORA ‘a OF mC Ets
vClise, OG person Sillg, ag

ane with + Rp AY
isreeing with aqaq, accord-

. D,; WUT
moe to hHuile \ ‘
s ~
GH) wa > ar » YAY 7% f } te qt C . 3 . ~
ke » an adjec. pronoun of the indef, age 12".

? = f 2 ( cy 1. ee — € s ® 1
Senus and species, agreeing with afya, according to
>. TE AA ae ee
Rule III, Note 5.CHAP? TX. | PARSING. SM,

fara, a perfect participle from faz, agreeing with
uPA, like the preceding word,

41, (for a; by Rule V.) a relative pronoun, agreeing
with its antecedent alr, according to Rule VI. and

10m, case to af understood,

Vie oto ws ERE PRI. © cise eaeek 1 Tay °

aa, like the first word, governed by Tara, according
to | R u! VI, Not ie 5.

gata, a common sub, of the Ist decl, mas. gen.

2088. Case, Foverned by Tasi-q, according to
Rule I,

“~~ q7 . °

tarqu, (for fay by Rule IV.) an adverb of time.

{1 WD Tt
v

Sama, (by Rule IV.) a compound adjec. of
ye SLL . ‘ de te Nene S ce ee —
the 2nd genus, Ist species; agreeing with gaat, ac-
cording to Rule III,

Sfala trea, (by Rule IV.) a compound adjec

D
)

ie Ist genus and 3rd species, agreeing with uaiat.

DH
po
*
om
pam

Egat}, an adverb of time,
22 " - 9
ata qieqiaega, a compound noun of the 3rd genus

and species, the Ist decl. mas. Bes sing, num, inst,

—< ex! = . £ o> eae <
yasi-q, acom. sub, of the 3rd genus, 6:
q 2

oth dec. neut. gen. sing, num, obj. case,

aitfand, a causal verb from rn iw hada La
c

= , x ° io = ; d rf PENT: - >»
overned by way:, according to Rule XIV. Note 1.

oe ¥
» ¢
Pe re es Ay + -oens and oti
way:, a compound acjec, of the Ist genus and Sth
. ° °.3 r mes He oye A oa > } it
species, agreeing with {=y7, according to Rule HI.

Note 5JAD SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART III.

saa: fai fafa cid eC lcutcoetatad | ate
ufcue: Ra nate awwil aa at aa wala ata
aa cif) cima: aa uaaifa sataarara |
gfaara: aa vrata watadaral alata: aa aa-
aif Gaara | Hat GT Hadifa Ba a aaiiy
vadifa Haranaafarar ae |

What is the cause of the soul’s misery ?
Its having taken a body. How came tt to
take a body? Through works. How came
works to exist? Should this (he asked, the
answer is), From passion, &c. How came
passion Sc. 2 From pride. How came pride ?
From the want of discrimination. How
came the want of discrimination? From ig-
norance. How came ignorance 2? It can he
traced to no cause: it 1s underived and inex-
plicable *. Stnkuracharya.

As the above is only a number of simple questions
and answers, containing little more than a nom. case,
and the verb to be followed by an inst. or abl. case, it is

left as an easy specimen for the exercise of the learner.

 

 

* Thus is human reason baftled in tracing the origin of evil !PART: IV.

PROSODY.

<a

PROSODY treats principally of versifica-
tion, though as a general term it includes
whatever belongs to poetry.

There are two classes of Sunscrit poetry,
the one measured bythe number of syllables,
the other by the time occupied in their pro-
nunciation.

In both these classes two lines constitute
the verse; the different metres make the lines
long or short, quick or slow, but never af-
fect their number.

Rhyme is nearly as little used in Sunscrit
as it is in Latin, Greek, or Hebrew ; it some-
times occurs where it is not designed, and
where consequently it is not regarded as
essential to the verse.342 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART IV.

PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS.

Quantity, feet, and pauses are constituent
parts of verse, and must be well understood
before any one can pronounce and scan with
accuracy any poetical composition: hence
it becomes necessary to explain these, pre-
vious to furnishing examples of the different
Kinds of versi

.

ification.

ag

1. Of Quantity.

A BE Tay x og ex tans

Cd. as ions oO DOr
Wrhan rrraat A7Or > ess a rch Wet ih ta Ȣ] a th > NnANAc 2
vWnen great exactness 1s ooserved in the measure-

. C >} -} ee 6 i > "i
ment of time, a short vow vel, before a sins gie final con-
} - Ty
sonant, is accounted equal t o only half a short vowel;
but with a grave accent, equal to thi

vowels in the lan-

jot

guage, and on this account, the rules ne-
Bo ia enc 5 4. ar 7
to distinguish the ae ntity of the
a s) 1. ao n,n ry wey £ vie 7 X7
syllables are very few; the following will al-

“Oo
4

. 4

e found sufficient.

aPART Iv. | PROSODY. dA

1.3; easy aes oi are short, and gat, ¥,
SG, 3, F, U, B, FH, sit, are long by nature.

2. A vowel short by nature, is long by

co

7 be

position, when it comes bef
sonant.

ore a double con-

It is of no consequence whether the compound con-

sonant follows the vowel in the same word, or in two

distinct words, because the whole verse is regarded as

a >

one continued sound,

3. A short vowel before two consonants,
the last of whichis the liquid =, may be long
or short.

4. A short vowel followed by ~ or: is
always long.

0. The last syllable of every line is ac-
ounted common.

pn me ~<a
2. Of Poetical Feet.

three kinds of feet commonly

By compou ma ili the next are formed.344 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART IV.

2nd. Dissyllabic. Of these there are four:

A Spondee (--) aa, a word or discourse.
A Trochee (-») ug, © @ water-lily.
An Iambus (--) we, on the shore.

A Pyrrhic € v) 3 Fir, the Faida.

ord. Trisyllabic. Of these. there are eight :
A Molossus (---)  agifa:, with the woman.
A Bacchie (v - -) SRM, great.
A Cretic* (i occa! | Satnabats by the eye.
An Anapest (s+-) afad, to take.

An Antibacchice (- -») STARA, very astonishing.

An Amphibrach (---). yar, may he purify.

A Dactyl (-v-) ‘qu, fickle.
A Tribrach (6¢.) anat, a flower.
aay 2 e v

 

* Or Amphimacer.

t The feet are all so arranged, that reckoning from the first
and last to the middle, they are opposite to each other in quan-
tity.PART IV. | PROSODY. 145

In addition to the preceding there is also
one Quadrasyllabic foot, a Proceleusmatic
(....)3 as, Shida, very great.

The feet most commonly used are the Tri-
syllabic. The Monosyllabic and Dissylla-
bic are generally used at the end of a line or
half line, or for verses too short to admit of
Trisyllabic feet.

ec

3. OF PAUSE, &c.

Pauses are of two kinds, the senfential and
the harmonic: the former is a short suspen-
sion of the voice, and is used at the end of a
line or verse; the latter is a variation in the
tone of the voice, and is used in different
parts of the verse.

\ is the sign used for the sentential pause ;
the harmonic has no characteristic mark, and
will therefore be distinctly specified where-
ver it occurs.

The Tones used by the Natives in repeat-
ing verse are so peculiar, that it is impossi-

~ ble to form a correct idea of them without
hearing them, and almost equally impossible
T t346 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IV,

after hearing them exactly to imitate them.
They combine within them a mixture of the
tones both of reading and of singing.

Accents and Emphasisform no distinguish-
ing part of Sunscrit prosody. The great
variety of sound arising from long and short
vowels, aspirated and unaspirated conso-
nants, seems to supply their place both in
Poetry and Prose.

 

 

CHAPTER I.

OF THE

FIRST CLASS OF POETRY,

MEASURED

BY THE NUMBER OF SYLLABLES.

Of this class there are three orders, and
the verses in each order consist of four com-
ponent parts. Inthe first order, all the four
parts of the verse are alike ; in the second,
every two parts are alike ; and in the third,
the four parts differ from each other.

In treating of each order, with a view of conveying
a correct idea of Hindoo versification, a whole verse

will be given of the first species under every genus.CHAP. I. | PROSODY. o47

Afterwards, when there are several other species as in
the first Order, or several genera as in the second; for
the first order, in which the four parts of the verse
are alike, one part will be given; for the second, in
which every two parts are alike, two will be given;
and for the third, in which the four parts are different,
the whole verse will be regularly given.

This arrangement will considerably abridge the first
order, which will still be much larger than the re-
maining two, and will not in the least degree obscure
the subject, beeause one example of every species of
verse, will shew its nature just as well as four, or any
other number.

 

SECTION I.

oF THE
BA HS TOR Di i.
OR
Of Verses in which every half line is alike.
In Verses of this Order the distinction of
the Genera and Species is worthy of atten-

tion.

The Genera take their’rise from the num-
ber of syllables in the verse, and the Species
from the kinds of feet employed in the mea-
surement of those syllables.348 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IV.

There are twenty-seven genera, and under
each genus the species vary from one to fif-
teen.

The first genus begins with one syllable
to the half line or four to the verse, and
proceeds regularly to twenty-seven, adding
one syllable to each half line for every addi-
tional genus; so that the last concludes
with twenty-seven syllables to the half line,
or one hundred and eight to the verse.

After this whatever number of syllables
may be added to the verse, the name of the
genus is still the same, though the names of
the species are changed.

Verses under five, or, above twenty-seven
syllables to the half line, do not frequently
occur.

a
FIRST GENUS.
Of this there is only one species, a long

syllable.

L. Sta
arat 1
May this prosperity be yours.CHAP. I. | PROSODY. 349

SECOND GENUS.

Of this there is only one species, a spon
dee.

L. REA hy:
AMIS
Crishna played with the shepherdesses,

ei
THIRD GENUS.
Of this there are two species:
Ist. A molossus. 2nd. A cretic.
1. trarat aretha: |
CAST SUT SANT:

May Crishna, who was embraced by the shepherdesses,
bless you.

= YW =

2. Qlzat——-—|
That deer.

=e a
FOURTH GENUS.
Of this there are two species.

Ist. A molossus and long syllable. 2nd. A
tribrach and long syllable.300 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IV.

a =
1]. AEH a SRT |
GU AA AA SLA Ul

Happy Yumuna*, on whose banks Crishna played !

2 aqaaay |
Behold the faithful wife !
eee

FIFTH GENUS.
Of these there are two species :
Ist. A dactyl and spondee. 2nd. An anapest
and iambus.

te ae eee
Ll. RAAT TWAT AE |
MAAR BRAWN It
Abundance of calves roved with Crishna their keeper

on the banks of the Yumuna.

92. suaq fra——-—
They were the beloved ones.
ier
SIXTH GENUS.
Of this there are three species :

Ist. An antibacchic and bacchic.
2nd. A tribrach and bacchic.
3rd. Two bacchics.

 

 

 

* Lit, Daughter of the Sun.CHAP. I. | PROSODY. 301

1, HVHCRaTCaRAeUT |
sret aa fat fret eaeeyt
May the astonishing shape of Mura’s enemy be conti-

nually in my mind.

We in WU aw =»

2 xfxaqzarat—————

Having faces like the moon.

3. CLS Mast — ——_—_—_
O Hury! (thy fame) is like the shining moon,

a

SEVENTH GENUS.

Of this there are three species:

Ist. Two tribrachs and a long syllable.

2nd. An amphibrach, anapest, and long syllable.
drd. A molossus, anapest, and long syllable.

Gwd =

l. teeterae aaqenafa: |
alyd ayadl ara caae I
Lhe rows of new sweet flowers by the side of the Yu-

mina gave pleasure to Mitdhiimthi na,

2,— ———— —qarxafearen
That youthful playful form.
a —FalaTaeaET |

Lhe foaming froth of a large elephant.302 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IV.

EIGHTH GENUS*,
Of this there are five species :

Ist. Two dactyls and a spondee.

2nd. A dactyl, bacchic, and iambus.

3rd. Two molossuses and a spondee, with a
pause at the 4th and 8th syllables.

Ath. A trochee, cretic, and amphibrach.

5th. An amphibrach, cretic, and iambus.

Gee Ne a
1. qaAqeAAk TUIy AA RAT |

aafcaiifasttat fasuaraneara It
May the playful motion of Crishna’s feet, which was
wonderfully diversified in his amours with the shepherd-

esses on the hanks of the Yumuna, preserve the world!

- UU s= = VW =

2.————— + HRA AAI |
The youth, the son of Nunda.

3, aeiaal fraarat——_ ——|
The folds of his clothes were like flashes of lightning.
4. ut: cattaat wea————|

Wisdom equal to another’s,

5. Slaatesataat————

Deriving proof from the Vaida and shastras.

 

* Anacreon’s Odes in Greek are nearly parallel to this and the
preceding metre,CHAP. I. | PROSODY. 303

NINTH GENUS,
Of this there are three species :

Ist. Two tribrachs and a molossus.

2nd. A dactyl, molossus, and anapest.
drd, An anapest, amphibrach, and amphimacer.

1 oer ee e - e eS Set

. Beaclaneatial yanicweat arate |
gece fe Su 1 a = Ww Ss —S Fp ma = ee sy »
TLiCuatad AN TAAATTAl GHAI

Lhe ground by the side of a lake which was infested
with young serpents, ufter the old one was trampled un-
der foot by Mira’s enemy, became a delightful spot to
the inhabitants of Vriija.

- VU Vv =

2. ——_— —— qafuayaiteeat |

Shining with the bright rays from the pearl in the midst.

wv a Yee Vv WwW =

3. SSS ae QHAHANAIAT |
Yiimuni troubled with serpents.
<5

TENTH GENUS.

Of this there are four species :

Ist. A dactyl, molossus, anapest, and long syl-
lable.

2nd. A molossus, dactyl, anapest, and long
syllable.

3rd. A tribrach, amphibrach, tribrach, and long
syllable.

Ath. A tribrach, cretic, amphibrach, and long
syllable. |

Lona a RS
ee
2 Sas

rf

of

|

hh
{ ie

if

a
}
4
. ie

!
|

D ig a ae ala ST 7354 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART LV.

:

ba bl} aie
1. qTHaTT el offers aa war aafetaata: |
Tres Caiaaarar ead fre SA aT i
To him who is constantly devoted to Kungsa’s enemy
with his whole oe mind, and words, the fine golden
palaces of kings will only be an annoyance.

oe a u Vu VY
2. at “ch ial aaa aD :
became intoxicated with drinking honey.

Bu VU =
ee |

le ee

4 ~. Ww w& =<

Vv
> e
wo. aie Caaas tag

HID a eee. ¥ 2097 araoy na tt } f
Lhe youth of Vriija were swift in

uw Oe ead . J
4, __.__._-___.__—_ qaantfaat FaTcat |
 ]

Captwating the minds of the virtuous.

1
<yhla
Sj il la=-

When the first species has a pause at the fifth s)
ble, it is accounted a new species.
ce dpe tat
ELEVENTH GENUS.
Of this there are twelve species :—
Ist. Two antibacchics, an amphibrach, and

spondee.
2nd. An amphibrach, antibacchic, amphibrach,

and spondee.
3rd. A tribrach, two amphibrachs, and an iam-

bus.
4th. A molossus, two antibacchics, and a spon-

dee, with a pause at the 4th and 11th syllables.CHAP. I. | PROSODY. 300

oth. A molossus, dactyl, antibacchic, and spon-

dee.

6th. A molossus and long syllable, two  tri-
brachs, and a long syllable.

7th. A dactyl, antibacchie, tribrach; and spon-

dee.

sth. An amphimacer, tribrach, amphimacer,
and ela

9th. An amphimacer, tribrach, dactyl, and spon-

LEREREA

Oth. Three dactyls, and a spondee.

a An antibacchic, two amphibrachs, and an
iambus.
12th. An amphimacer, amphibrach, amphima-

cer, and iambus.

aa

lL. MHS Toa U TAT RS qamefaanesr |
TT Ara TaRA, Tay wA FT Ft Tag aaurta:

—~

May he who has a discus in his hand preserve you ;
he who, when the incensed Indra poured down his de-
structive thunderbolts, hept both the herd and herdsmen

safe in their stall, by holding over them a mountain

in his left hand.

—_—

i)
al

2, staqarizategetfa:—_—__—_—_—_——~——
Shining with the pearly brightness of thunderbolts,

Se,
NS se mma CR reer AE

3. fafacqcaad gaat —--—————— I
She beautiful ( beheld) his darkness-destroying face,306 SUNSCRIF GRAMMAR. [PART IV.

4 ——__.___ — — gat waratiaat faerie: |

True faith in Vishnu (promotes the holiness) of men.

5, ———_ ——_ —— aati trafaarariaaey |

As a raging wind (destroys) a boat in the midst of
the sea.

6. Haat wAttrafeat ———-—----— act

An expanded flower adorned with humming bees.

ee ere anfta 4 aa |
Is there any one in the world, whose (wish) has not

been granted ?

a eae

8. ——— wag wfaac € 2 Ute at i

She was startled at the sound of Crishna’s flute.

Te a ee eee ae Se ay

9, SITAR TAS! ALA: |
All the gods respect him,
10. <qaatTyAay TART: —_—~ — ——__ —_— — \

Placed at the bottom of the Kiidumba tree, under
which the gods assemble.
1 A ai = aaa BTALHETHS HSTR |
The destruction of the great armies of the infernals.

a i alah m_—- w&e = VW

1 OTT
White and constantly purifying all people,CHAP. I. | PROSODY. 357

TWELFTH GENUS*,
Of this there are fifteen species :

Ist. A cretic, tribrach, dactyl, and anapest.
2nd. An amphibrach, antibacchic, amphibrach,
and amphimacer.
srd. An amphibrach and anapest, andthe same
repeated.
4th. Four bacchices.
oth. Four anapeests.
6th. Four cretics.
7th. Two molossuses, and two bacchics.
8th. An anapeest, amphibrach, and two ana-
pests.
9th. A tribrach, two dactyls, and a cretic.
10th. Two tribrachs, and two cretics.
llth. A tribrach and bacchic, and = same
repeated.
12th. A tribrach, two amphibrachs, and a bac-
chic.
13th. A tribrach, two amphibrachs, and a ere-
tic.
14th. An antibacchic and bacchic, and the
same repeated.
15th. A molossus, dactyl, anapest, and molos-
sus.

a

* The metre commonly employedin Greek tragedies very
much resembles this.308 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.  [ PART IV.

l. aaawiated vafafae: cached saa |
eae aa FaULS aqyrwfagicwmaaaal |
The path of Vise Pete as pisihoaen by thick darkness,

that of the king is destitute of people; then choose

your own path; Hury your delight is in the paths of
the groves.

5. feared afd qetitc:——_—_—_—————

The sweet-tuned flute (was filled) by the wind of his
mouth,

Mee A ORS eee A oe.

3. ———— ————_ — afeeaaaaateganta: |
The swelling motion of the waters of the Yumuna.

Ww —- —_ uUu=_= = _ we = —_

4, ———— ————-— AIAG Tata aa ATHET |
O Serpent! (make) your departure quickly to the sea.
5. Aiedletae Un date ——————

Happy to obtain freedom from sin in the iron age, go.

iN

6. ———_———— _atacret aaareta ataat
May his form be a briacslet in my bosom.

7 Rye teen oak Seo

os Te: STACTATS ASAT |
O brother! every goddess will be worshipped.

g. afraracactcinitate: —————_———
The melodious sound of Crishna’s voice.

9, qatratrauretrettea ——

Enchanting by his swift, slow, and delightful paces.CHAP. I. | PROSODY. 09

10. --——_—_—_ —_—— yaaaats ga activa)

From whose lotus feet the Mindékénee sprung,

ll, tafaatant qeatataar ——_—— ~—__

fis form is adorned with flowers when he wanders
in the grove.

Bete um Ma. 39 Vs

12. qaRRaaACa HITAL wu ee
Thy lotus face, O enemy of Murad!

YW VWs DW me WY WV

13, —_—————— fact qata aract as: |
And the bee is constantly embracing the flower.
14, —-_—~———— sraatataeat Rear laara |

An image like a chaplet of red pearls,

eer | ae = = oe

15, ————_____ _ ai? saucareraat |

New clouds for the destroying of heat.
a
THIRTEENTH GENUS.

Of this there are nine species :

Ist. A molossus, tribrach, amphibrach, cretic,
and long syllable, with a pause at the 3rd and
13th syllables.

2nd. An amphibrach, dactyl, anapest, and

amphibrach, with a pause at the 4th and 13th
syllables.

Jrd. A molossus, antibacchic, bacchic, ana-
pest, and a long syllable.360 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART IV.
4th. Two tribrachs, two anapests, and a long

5th. An anapest and amphibrach, the same
repeated, and a long syllable.

jth. Two tribrachs, two antibacchics, and a

Sth. An ) anapest and amphibrach, the same
repeated, and a long syllable.
Sth. A tribrach, two amphibrachs, a cretic,

1

and along syllable.

— at aie ce Ss i ik aN
VUMWACAMCAY WaenPFUMAanaas wry |
ey

NO =
srgact cafsudae: dare afacesra Wefaates

In this world the mind of Hury was delighted with
kissing, embracing, and wandering with the shepherd-
esses.

co ie

Ta AAALAC FATE |

Wandering among the falatral women of VFruja.

2, —————_— -— afey

PG Dm = VY —

3, yAITa ae rmaceataaad eee ee
fendered vocal by the noise of peacocks full of
play.
Bios wl We os bie
4. qcuUqutTnayauwt ————— ——— — |
Terrible in the motion of his lotus-like feet.CHAP. 1. ] PROSODY. 36]

De qeayd ayarsarfaut |

She speaking pleasantly promotes the Joy of the im-
perishable one.

Oe tele acta
Enjoying the autumnal rains (by the side of a river)
wradiated by the light of the moon.

UDR Ea Ca
4 drake in the pleasant parts of the Yumiuna,

8. tHaaraata aaienatiyat t
Being awaked aé that time, she expressed. surprise.

9. Aaraitgagd wm stg ——————_.——|

A deer falling into the mouth of a hungry lion.

=P
FOURTEENTH GENUS.
Of this there are seven species :

Ist. A molossus, spondee, two tribrachs, and
a molossus.

2nd. An antibacchic, dactyl, two amphibrachs,
and a spondee.

3rd. Two tribrachs, a cretic, anapest, and
iambus.

4th. Two tribrachs, a dactyl, tribrach, and iam-
bus.

oth. A molossus, antibacchic, tribrach, mo-
lossus, and spondee.362 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. __ [| PART IV.

6th. A molossus; anapest, molossus, dactyl, and
spondee.

7th. Two tribrachs, two antibacchics, and a
spondee.

SOE ra ee ae

1, ae t aa Balacaqera fa —
eae arayctafcaqaaarat |
qufaay vafoaraaa: —

aryat stat WATT AaHTT:

May the enemy of Kingsa, who became incarnate
to establish virtue, and by whom the earth was pr reserved
when Indra was burning with rage, assuage the affiic-
tions of the virtuous.

wei m=z US oe

2, He qaataan faa qa: —-—_——_—-—— |

The T la + plant and the glory of the groves is full
blown.
3, —————— —— aeaiqaa: Serer |

The army under the command of the son of Yudu
was invincible.

O 6 @2u. Ye ome VO we

4. quata AAHAETA afsat ——-—————— 1
O Cupid! thy flow’ry arrow gives great pain.

5, -—-—— GUTeTaT sata Sent aay |

When the enemy of Kiingsa dances, he resembles
the Pustnta t tree.

 

if This and the following are two lines of poetry : they are put
in four parts to suit the page.

+ Sesamum Orientale.
+ Gertnera racemosa.CHAP. I. | PROSODY. 303

, eC =e ~ Ut ee wie ss ~ =
6. Ae adaaattegeeaetat —— —— —-.— |
O fair one! the glory of youth is transient as a Slash
of lightning.

vw Vu VV = = Ww
===

7. ACaanquranaraee ————— —1

Tis surface is rendered vocal by the chirping of birds.

ear
FIFTEENTH GENUS.

Of this there are seven species :

Ist. Four tribrachs, and an anapest.

2nd. 'T'wo tribrachs, a molossus, and two bac-
chics, with a pause at the 8th and 15th syllables.

ord. Five molossuses.

4th. A tribrach, anapest, tribrach, and two
cretics.

Sth. A cretic and amphibrach alternately.

6th. A molossus, cretic, molossus, and two
bacchics.

7th. Three molossuses and two bacchics.

VU VU Vv WV DD AD INI ND IE A DR ee

l, nagataanaaizaninaa—
aaqifaaactannnunar |
actaxagrgcautaaiata—
qaaa saacuagicaca ii

The half circle of the rising moon made by sandal

wood, and placed on the bright forehead of the Vruja
youth as in the sky, raises in the sea of Crishna’s heart
a tumultuous motion.364 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. _ [PART IV.

vwv VU

2, —_—-—_— — ganufeuatiat nitaat UAT TAT
May Radha, who assumed the colour of Miidhoo’s
enemy, grant protection.

3———_— udaeantsruife: aS ata: |
Full of play with the sprightly playful shepherd-
eSSeS,

vw wv v- 9 Woe a ee

4, fatuateaataatad serataa
The Tela plant is in full flower at the heginning of
the spring.

 

oy a Ol ee —-— JT =~VU=—

Piaier es PE — FeAaqTa qi UATAUAS HAW i
A golden quiver full of Cupid’s arrows.

6. CATA Way wt TA wat ——=+—1
Radha was like the moon shining a little through a
dark cloud.

-—-— - —-—=-— —-— «_ v=-> =

~~

ae SaMIECATETAAUS haat
fhs form is ornamented with a necklace of wild

flowers, which resembles one made of bright pearls.
at
SIXTEENTH GENUS.
Of this there are nine species:

Ist. A cretic and amphibrach alternately, with
the last syllable common.
| 2nd. A dactyl, cretic, three tribrachs, and a
long syllable.CHAP. 1. ] PROSODY. 365

3rd. A dactyl, anapest,- molossus, antibac-
chic, tribrach, and long syllable.
4th. An amphibrach and amphimacer alter-
nately, and a long syllable.
oth. A molossus, dactyl, tribrach, molossus,
and tribrach.
6th. A tribrach, amphibrach, dactyl, amphi-
brach, cretic, and long syllable.
/th. A bacchic, molossus, tribrach, anapest,
eretic, and long syllable.
Sth. Five tribrachs, and a short syllable.
9th. A tribrach, amphibrach, dactyl, amphi-
brach, antibacchic, and long syllable.
l. tyaarewrytrentiatwaaes—
THU AA FAG AAHMALCALF |
al wag Wyss WERUIKaT —
qquataaax daca TasTT
O Vishnit, the worship of whose feet imparts virtue,
who didst assume a shepherd’s form, having thy hair
adorned with wild fiowers ; I constantly think of thee,
how thy beautiful body was embraced hy the shepherd-
esses, who were delighted with the sound of the flute,
which was adorned by thy coral-like lips.

my EOE) OF ee eo wae ORO UI Os. Vv =

2 ae aatae reuse qursttatead

@

 

The prancing of the prodigious elephant commanded

, Vv
by Kungsa.366 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART IV.

VU WD = ae.” Gorter et eer

3. ZRICTAAUTE G Sead) ——

(The earth) was terrified at the wicked pursuits of
the almost invincible giants.

Ves VU =

4. aceuanwe (irareaitend oo
(He dwells) in a house made of shining pearls, at

the root of a celestial tree.

5. Uyay acaafaarears suaaqy: +-—-——|
Radha is languishing in the swing of love.
6. wa AAS saa mattaetiate, ——-— |

May the goddess of speech now inspire wn me the

graces of poetry.

MON ee —-——=— = wv vu Vv ie s-+ baad esis aa

7, —_—— ear atieraiga sacafad waatat |

May this delightful sport of the shepherdesses prevail
with Hury.

8. ——--—_—__ qaaufancay qatareeg |

May he who sustained the mountain only shine into
my virtuous heart.

9. —-—-——_—— wasad Fateunt scares t

tt is like the ery of the Gurtraé, when it frightens

the monstrous serpents of the giants.CHAP. I. | PROSODY. 367

SEVENTEENTH GENUS.

Of this there are eight species :
ist. A baecchic, molossus, tribrach, anapest,

dactyl, and iambus, with a pause at the 6th and
17th syllables.

2nd. An amphibrach, -anapest, amphibrach,
anapest, a bacchic, and iambus, with a pause
at the 8th and 17th syllables.

3rd.-A dactyl, cretic, tribrach, dactyl, tribrach,
and iambus, with a pause at the 10th and 1/th
syllables.

4th. A molossus, dactyl, tribrach, two antibac-
chics, and a spondee, with a pause at the 4th,
10th, and 17th syllables.

Sth. A tribrach, anapest, molossus, cretic,
anapest, and iambus, with a pause at the 6th,
10th, and 17th syllables.

6th. A tribrach, amphibrach, dactyl, two am-
phibrachs, and an iambus*.

7th. Amolossus, dactyl, tribrach, molossus, bac-
chic, and iambus, with a pause at the 7th, 13th,
and 17th syllables.

Sth. A molossus, dactyl, tribrach, cretic, ana-
pest, and iambus, with a pause at the 4th, 10th,
and 17th syllables.

 

* This may have a pause at the 7th, 13th, and 17th syllables,
but it is then considered a new species.368 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART Iv.

wve™ ek ww Ww

1, acy ve aa feafeut mat fa frit —
fistar a: wat faaastd acted:
sfaaug wrateafararenas fad
fad farsa aneae Taser:

‘See! should this mountain fall from the hand of
this child,we shall certainly be destroyed ; this should be
thought of by us all’ The god, smiling at this private
chitchat of the fearful shepherds, sustains the mountain,

and preserves the world.

Ves Vv -_ Yew Vw V=—= Vv— — WY =

2. ZEMIEA, i RACIALS TGA --

The misery of the earth corrupted by the wicked
giants.

 

= Oe ee DE ee dt iets VU w=—

3. aaadnuautad calq saa ————_—
A drop of water fallen in the night upon a new leaf.

Ser age ee Ce eee ee

4. ——— armiqritacafiad qaaafa arart
By slow and persevering efforts the maid is subdued.

= w uv one

o. aftaa afaty we Aart al efcutawia—— |

Bruhmda, having taken the eyes of deer, placed them
(in these women).

ipso ae, afacucaatatcaneeae ata: |

The poet (describes him) by many pleasing verses of
this species,

FR ing ne nl ste
=

7. —— at denrtcaia a ae Cat AATSTTAT
How it is possible that Radha should not captivate
the enemy of Kungsa?CHAD. I. | PROSODY. 369 i

a ga

8. HITT AAT a inets sfaqrearat ——— |

This body of mine is oppressed with sustaining the
great mountam.

—~x@

 

EIGHTEENTH GENUS.
Of this there are five species:

Ist. A molossus, antibacchic, tribrach, and
three bacchics, with a pause at the Sth, 11th, and
18th syllables.

Qnd. A tribrach, amphibrach, dactyl, amphi-
brach, and two eretics, with a pause at the 11th
and 18th syllables.

2rd. Two tribrachs and four cretics, with
a pause at the 7th and 18th syllables.

4th. A molossus, dactyl, tribrach, and three
bacchics, with a pause at the 4th, 11th, and 18th
syllables.

5th. A molossus, anapzst, amphibrach, ana-

pest, antibacchic, and anapest, W rith a pause at
the 12th and 18th syllables.

u mrsratas Srataaaeaantcfue aaa —
ata: Bats: qairaaaa feat Ae |
waraitata: TRE

AATAaaT CHAATS BAIT QA ti
yy

rer —

   

             

 

 

  

  

pac

— a
eee

aaa TTS
3 eo
a SS

EE oS3/0 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART LV.

Lhe flowery shrubs, slightly shaken by the south
winds, which raise a gentle swell in the playful Yamuna,
and distinguished by having their new shoots surround-
ed with the hum of bees, excite the amorous desires of
him who has a discus in his hand.

Pw Fm GW = VU RS NY ies me:

2, ———— fatanaaea at Te Ta eae I
O friend! go to the Vrindi wood, the delight of the
earth, for happiness.

3. 4 fatacia Famcatafaegzae ———— |
Lo! she discharges the heart-piercing arrow from
her eye.

4. ——— ati wat aaaqnada faaaergarat |

fis belaved eyes were fixed on this wonderfully beauti-
jul creature.

be
—_=_ = Ww sv =

oR Raat UHRA wIaafad ———
Having hy his power formed himself into a sportive
niger for hunting the deer, Kingsit.

- - a GS a

eel OP eye Oe pa,

—<> ~~ -
NINETEENTH GENUS,
Of this there are five species :

Ist. A bacchiec, molossus, tribrach, anapeest,
two cretics, and a long syllable, wit
the 6th, 12th, and 19th syllables.

2nd. Like the preceding, except that it has
two antibacchics instead of two cretics.

h a pause atCHAP. 1. ] PROSODY. 34 |

ord. A molossus, anapeest, amphibrach, ana-
peest, two antibacchics, and a long syllable, witha
pause at the 12th and 19th syllables.

4th. A molossus, cretic, dactyl, tribrach, bac-
chic, tribrach, and long syllable, with a vans at
the 7th, 14th, and 19th syllables.

oth. A molossus, spondee, two tribrachs, two
antibacchics, and a spondee, with a pause at the
oth, 12th, and 19th syllables.

SO Oe 4 ae keke

1. aamatcuitatganaa Fira fe TERRE —
fataae: arqait fefcteingar eqcienatat |
fanwafrafeafarautateaea =
for: aida aasmeAal crane faa ii

If when the winds from the woods are enriched with
the scent of flowers, when the sleepless peacocks make

a pleasant noise, when the antelopes are roving at plea-

sure, when the frogs are croaking, and the clouds at

night are luminous with the vivid flashes of lightning ;
your beloved is subject to you, and the demons to him,
what is this but a kingdom ?

eat ares AE a ee iat — ww =—

2 wauismmaunarat Falcdtarag: ——— |
The distresses of life do not affect those who. have

taken refuge in the shadow of his feet.

3. aaa aaa wa AAAT mee afanifss ——— |
I will not trouble you with this wide-gaping tiger

of @ world,Ore SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART IV.

m=ivwe vv wW Vv

4. nifarel ae AAA ACLATAt VTS acai —— |
Gavindi: obtained delicious nectar of the shepherd-

 

esses,

OW = -_

oe eo ~

ee Re a1 Sant ATA que QW MAAS |
An unparalleled bunch of fiowers from the celestial
tree, fell on the head of the opposer of the demons.

ee
TWENTIETH GENUS.

Of this there are four species :

Ist. A molossus, cretic, dactyl, tribrach, bac-
chic, dactyl, and iambus, with a pause at the 7th,
14th, and 20th syllables.

2nd. An anapest, two amphibrachs, a dactyl,
cretic, anapeest, and iambus.

3rd. An amphimacer. and antibacchic alter-
nately, with a trochee.

Ath. A bacchic, molossus, two tribrachs, two
antibacchics, and a spondee.

Tea wer wv Vvwy vv = © = WV Vv =

L. sp afcactanararentaagat —
qt fray UCHAT ay SUIT TAT |
eect qatawacat amactaar —
mate, RAT Tat cateat LTMAATST I
Lo! O thou enemy of Nuritka! Radha my compa-

nion, having relinguished all passion for any besidesCHAP. I. | PROSODY. 343

thyself, being single in her view, meditating on thee,
filled with extacy, and having her eyes full of tears
of joy, dwells with pleasure in the grove: she is beau-
tiful, pensive, and resolved on the subjugation of her

passions.

VGmae FS mem 9

2, ——— face aft AAA AAA RATATAT |

(The flute), attended with the fanning and singing
of the shepherdesses, inspired Hury.

-- YVeme FJnae VW = DE iaT Gi) Bi eke

3. faqewetTat fraiceeeutuae ———— |
(He pleases) by the various movements and gestures
of his enchanting body.

Ww —-

eh al cei =< ==

4, mettre aan faraafaaes: wan ot aTteaET |
Crishna! there is a certain shepherdess (who re-
sembles a creeper), having its head adorned with a

multitude of bees.
a

TWENTY-FIRST GENUS.

Of this there are two species :

Ist. A molossus, cretic, dactyl, tribrach, and
three bacchics, with a pause at the 7th, 14th, and
21st syllables.

Ond. A tribrach, amphibrach, dactyl, three
amphibrachs, and a cretic.374 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. _[ PART IV.

Vw =

Is Water TCA At AAAI ATT utaaqear: awe —
Te ez Baa atae fee HLT BTCA TTA AL \

SF rT ay qmutaa Ate TSS waitae wat —
ataaing faairca 3 RUA I: QIVTT MPC SET 1

May the smiling body of Vishni, which was adorn-

 

ed with a necklace and pearls, fair. as the expanded
blue lotus, clothed in yellow and shining like pure
gold, having his hair adorned with a peacock’s feather,
and his beautiful ears with other ornaments, charming
the shepherdesses, and making the world happy with
the sound of his inclined flute, preserve you in the
world.

re eer oo ee YU = U Vee UU

2. WuIyat taentaaaraceey fawy ———

The imperishable one was versed in amours with the
deer-eyed and river-like women of Vriija.

ee
TWENTY-SECOND GENUS.

Of this there are two species :

Ist. Two molossuses, a spondee, four tri-
brachs, and a spondee, with a pause at the 8th,
14th, and 22nd syllables.

2nd. Seven dactyls and a long syllable.

EO ENON OS, 30. FO Re eee

1. ais ardsar® sh Sacans nyactataaalt —
RATARSTATATATATAULAACAATLa AT |
uitaets ugiy vaanaaufcacaucian —
AMC WATS acugutatey Faas iCHAP. I. ] PROSODY. 3/5

See, Hury, how this active goose, with her mate, is
drinking the sweet juice of the expanded lotus, and he-
ing full of sport and moving briskly about, ts playing
Jreely amidst the lotuses of the Yumina, the farina of
which is scattered in every direction hy the wind.

ae ee Ve wu wv Uew yy =
a.

2. Raq tetaane ica TAC Zat—— I
Drunk with the clear jaice of the opening flowers of
spring,
se se
TWENTY-THIRD GENUS,

Of this there are two species :

Ist. A tribrach, an amphibrach and dactyl alter-
nately, with an iambus.

2nd. Two molossuses, a spondee, four tri-
brachs, and an anapeest, with a pause at the 8th,
13th, and 23rd syllables.

vu oy “eigen ap) Biv sure o, eege Stok on

Fo

1. WCAC RT aM aA UAH AAAS ASAAT a
wateqaitiawaata: aat nfacturtaafear: |
Haas Ud aC Ua CASTS CYT sTaty aute —
raterad ste aa carafe antracisaaan

* Durga said to Kiungsa, Thy destroyer is become
encarnate in the world, in the jiame of whose mighty
valour the proud giant will be absorbed, like an insect
wn the flame: he being possessed of boundless majesty, ts
the delight of Lukshmee +, the refuge of the good, the
deliverer and sustainer of the earth.

 

 

* Daughter of the Mountain. ¢ Daughter of the Ocean.far
3/6 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.  [ PART IV.

Ory Ure Vier YU VU Oo wee

2. HaTATaaaaRts HAGA MALCATTA |
Full of sport from the sweet honey, easily obtained
im spring.
eh he

TWENTY-FOURTH GENUS.

Of this there is only one species:

A dactyl], antibacchic, tribrach, anapest, two
dactyls, a tribrach, and bacchic, with a pause
at the 5th, 12th, and 24th syllables.

-@ VU oo a ee ee ee vu VY Uv WU ee

ATTA AH TAL TR Ria atraneae wate: —
aqua AAGRafaa: aaaal SMfawAATaaced |
uquet facfaanad 2esdsacacuices —
fawadt ot qectaned qraaa aa farete oat
Thy fuir one, O Madhiwa, is dwelling in solitude,
trembling with the mountain winds, which are attended
with the song of the cuckoo, and the hum of the wanton
bees of spring ; yet glowing with heat through having
bathed in sandal water, and reclining on a bed composed
of lotus leaves, which are greatly agitated hy the heat

arising from the body.

 

TWENTY-FIFTH GENUS.
Of this there is only one species :

A dactyl, molossus, anapest, dactyl, four tri-
brachs, and an anapest, with a pause at the oth,
10th, 18th, and 25th syllablesCHAP. I. | PROSODY. Si A

Adi Sy am

Be Oo Wine Re Ue lanl aeuieuney

auatateufaaaet AARUMUAAAAAG TEI a
Hee ay hahaa weAiearyucacuTaaay |
ete ateaagicucya aaa: —
uy et sar aqua Sa ecte acanfacteataewa
See, Hury ! silted mind does not the swift Yumund
captivate ? which has its sides impressed with the foot-
steps of paddy birds, is rendered vocal with the sweetest
notes, adorned with full-blown lotuses, rendered enchant-
mg by the hum of hees drunk with honey, having its
surface covered with smiling froth, and heautified with

rolling waves ?

Eom

 

TWENTY-SIXTH GENUS.
Of this there is only one species:
Iwo molossuses, an antibacchic, three tri-
brachs, a cretic, anapzst, and iambus, with a
pause at the 8th, 19th, and 26th syllables.

- =—_ - = = See trant NS Ae CE Oe. ee Baw 2 ae

a

gS mlanae tates ETH SLUT RCATAR? ——
BIRT SISA wy feacaaaaraay ac Mageyval
Tait Falraacanagqn wawiacya:
nate cantaetizecnatanqatia cea a glasctual
May <Achyiita preserve you: he who clapping his

 

 

hands dances with varied motion and wonderful agi-

e ° ° ° : we ° 10"

lity, whose hair is adorned with a beautifully waving

peacock’s tail, and his ears with a flowing necklace of

new shoots, who is worshipped with uplifted hands by
ZZ3/8 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART IV.

the affrighted female serpents, and who destroys the
pride of the tremendous snake dwelling in a hed of the
Yumuna,

-
TWENTY-SEVENTH GENUS.

Of this there is an indefinite number of
Species, as it applies to all verses in which
there are upwards of twenty-six syllables
to the half line.

Of those which have twenty-seven to the
half line there are four species, and of those
which have twenty-eight, two.

Ist. T'wo tribrachs and seven amphimacers.

2nd. 'T'wo tribrachs and seven bacchics.

ord. Nine anapests.

4th. Nine creties.

oth. Fourteen trochees.

6th. Fourteen iambuses.

All verses containing more than twenty-
eight syllables to the half line, are formed by
adding cretics to the first species. Here the
Poet is allowed an almost boundless range,
and may proceed to any length he pleases

within the limits of a thousand syllables to
the half line.CHAP. I. | PROSODY. 3/9

It is not common, however, to go be-
yond thirty syllables to the half line; nor
does it appear that any one has ever added
more than six or seven cretics to the first
species.

Vv Sie ng ee ae ee oe _— Y= ai on

1. aqaRIe ME CHARGE aueherUTAT aS F TIRE
an anaaem aaa gaa Rasa aaNe cata
AAAATACA Cala THAT HAS Alayaare at
wes tHara graye fala ars CINTA LITA T THIS

May the enemy of Mira he your joy: who seeing
the shepherds terrified at the dreadful rains threatening
the destruction of the world, with ease and speed seized the
mountain Govurdhiina in his left hand, was embraced
by the shepherdesses afraid, and crying out, O lotus-
eyed one! save! save! and had his body covered with the
stream of the flowing lava.

OU SW Ur Or me Cy eae ae

2. gfaaaueuaiea aetna eater Ra
A noble lion for putting to flight the wild elephants
of the deceitful giants.

=

= u
Bee Se eee WU os = uv

3.—YATTALA Fag aAiiee TaealIaSITA AAT |
Its form is like a Rime of flowers from the Asoca
tree, surrounded with a multitude of bees.

J — = Una = V=

4: Hemi TT UTgTT AT ATMA (AISA AVATITHAMAAAT |
May he who holds a discus in his hand, going to the
mountain of battle against Kungsa, reeling like @

drunken elephant, preserve you.

ih a
See

Sh eT = ea ger: x
Geanike a

ve era . ee
Se Re a

Ree

Sn: hinchada esate eR dad Bs ca coe380 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART IV.

His yen: ae ah peri “ey a ay
D. MUAT UA Qasr Wasa aAaATUTATSTA |
He has the pedicles of Asocu* flowers in his ears, and

a bunch of Punnag t ones in his bosom.

6 ciara eran Rare oA ee a fara |
e WS a <><) ~ a \ v
Was it not formed of Champaca! flowers in a mecha-
nical frolic by the hand of the goadess of love, as an
ornament for the head of her husband ?

Poe Gein 6 ee UR ee a Pree

i. afawua afta We waite STA ra faassiaaR Saal |
O subduer of Vuly and chief of men, come and
deliver me who am sinking in the dreadful sea of life.

 

SECTION IL.

OF THE SECOND ORDER,
OR
Of Verses in which every line is the same.
Of this description of verse there are
seven genera, but no species.
Ist. Three anapests and an iambus for the

first; and three dactyls anda spondee for the
second part of the line.

 

 

* Jonesia Asoca. ¢ Rottleria tinctoria.

{ Michelia champaca.CHAP. I. | PROSODY. 381

2nd. Two anapests, an amphibrach, and spon-
dee ; then an anapest, dactyl, cretic, and amphi-
brach.

3rd. A pyrrhic, two dactyls, anda spondee ;
then three dactyls and a spondee.

4th. A pyrrhic, two dactyls, and a cretic; a
tribrach, two dactyls, and a cretic.

oth. Two tribrachs, a eretic, and iambus; a
tribrach, two amphibrachs, and a eretic.

6th. Two tribrachs, a eretic, and a bacchic; a
tribrach, two amphibrachs, a eretic, and a long
syllable.

7th. Two anapests, an amphibrach, and long
syllable; an anapeest, dactyl, eretic, and iambus.

BY = YU QGm YG YU = Ee Se me me OU ie

l. qesfeaqeqat ae Gahaiaaaeates |
m7aauafatad gat xicearfeae aus
May the body of Crishna, which is clothedin yellow,

anomted with sandal water, and resembles the sky

variegated with autumnal clouds attended with light-
ning, promote your happiness.

2. gama aes ATATTAMT Wet |
A fair one with a water-pot at her side, going at

the close of the day to the Yumini, is thus accosted.

Vv Ve Yyu = WO we es UL UCU Yo GS IC=_- =

3. PLATA AHL Ange cTI CHAAR |

A Vruja beauty, quick of recollection, was enchanted
with the sound of the flute.382 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Iv.

ese TAMISEMHATRUES ATH

4. wacuaal eicwaaataAa det ATT: Bart
The Yumuna abounds with fr e and its banks are

rendered enchanting by the bounding deer.

5. Beaqay ciwimMtatrmarcaqad aaa
They approached Madhuva, intent on the songs of
the melodiously sounding flute.
6. fan tactaray arm aHGTA AAA CLA A Zs sual
The youth of Vrija, resembling a cheonbe with a
flower on the top, are the delight of Haury.
7, qeqraxcta Baul ica: BEasa VAT |
The beautiful one, looking around with affectionate
eyes, said.

 

SECTION III.

OF THE THIRD ORDER,
OR
Of Verses in which every two lines are alike.
Of this Order there are three genera.
The first and third have each two species ;
the second has none.

aoe

* When a number of short sounds come together, by a poe-
tical license there may be nine syllables in a half line ; it is
however a license of very rare occurrence.CHAP. I. | PROSODY. 38d

FIRST GENUS.

This has eight syllables for each half line; the
fifth and sixth syllable in the first part of each
line form an iambus*, and the fifth, sixth and
seventh in the second part of each line, an am-
phibrach ; the others may be Jong or short.

stad @ cra feaaaa |

wate & SQ ASTRA BHUTETaT WAC |

Lhe excellent twice-born one, howing to the ding,
said, May prosperity attend thee, O monarch ! Govern
thy subjects with justice.

—.2 >
Species.
The first species has a molossus, cretic, and.

spondee in the second part of each line; and
the second, a molossus, anapest, and iambus.

1. qaqa Tae waters We

hd = =_

WD = =a

* = ~ = . e ~ ~
TAA ACTA FAT WF Waters: |

 

 

* A trochee, spondee, or pyrrhic is occasionally used instead
of the regular iambus.

+. This is the Heroic measure of the Hindoos, and that in
which their principal poetical works are composed. The se-
cond genus of this order, and the 11th and 12th genera of the
first order, are frequently used with it, at the close of a section
or book.o84 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART IV.

The lotus-faces of the shepherdesses, always smiling,
and having eyes like a full-blown blue lily, attract the

mind of Mura’s enemy as the flower attracts the hee.

2 craKtayeTy AMAMAYATE |

—-— -= WY wv =~ vw

TAR METralat wart TATE a: |

The sweet flow proceeding from the mouth of Crish-
ni, happy and full of sport in the spring, is the health
of the shepherdesses.

<=
SECOND GENUS.

This has eleven syllables ineach half line ; the
first foot in each half line may be an antibacchic
or amphibrach ; but the others must be an anti-
bacchic, amphibrach, and spondee.

ee PAM Hae hi WY — wv

@ arte Seer aad CAA aat AHA TAT |

qexnna ieranrat = Sat ara sclawest: *

The citizens having heard this speech of the king

g, and

obtained their wish, bidding their sovereign adieu, and

hastening home full of joy, worshipped the gods.

 

* This combines the peculiarities of the first and second species
under the 11th genus, Ist order; but admits of every variety
that can be produced by interchanging the antibacchic and am-
phibrach at the beginning of each half line, for which reason it is

classed under this order.CHAP. I. | PROSODY. O80

THIRD GENUS.

The third genus has ten syllables in each half
line except the last, which has thirteen: for the
first part of the first line, an anapest, amphi-
brach, anapeest, and short syllable; for the second
a tribrach, anapest, amphibrach, and long sylla-
ble :—for the first part of the second line a dac-
tyl, tribrach, dactyl, and long syllable, or a
dactyl, tribrach, amphibrach, andiambus; for the
second part an anapest and amphibrach alter-
nately, and a long syllable.

tras Ay TaAty aciwaaal TARA |

Zl MATAR aya sutatiet tetera i

The resplendent Yuimuna glides briskly among the
youthful shepherdesses, reflecting the tremulous light of
the moon’s beams on the hird*like eyes of Crishna.

 

OR
“a aay . wage Sa =p ~ see
Waa qaaaq wicsqeqiwaraa |

VvwW= VU

aituctraataniciad Saaatfa ee wars:
Then Duninjaya, at the command of Indra, with

v
ayo =
Lis

o-=

a pleasing countenance performed the appointed aus-
terities, to secure the favour is the unwearied three-eyed

One.

 

* The bird mentioned in the text is the Greek partridge,
which is fabulously reported to live on the moon’s beams.386 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. __ [PART IV.

Species.
The first species has an amphimacer, tri-

brach, &c. for the first part of the second line,
and the second two tribrachs and two anapests.

 

1. afcHamgwaraaatgearafaeat |

i - Vv Vv ie WW SS

RIM TCHTCATS TC AQUAAICTARAT TTR AT

O Hury! whose heart does not the astonishing sweet
Jragrance of thy lotus-mouth enchant? for it far excels

the scent proceeding from hundreds of expanded lotuses.

2.aATGU aAata Banat WHA |
tenatutaciaamaat afadquicaaaaiged |
Lhe delightful ambrosia distilled from the moon-like

face of Murds enemy is-like that which falls from the

moon, and is imbibed by the heautiful happy youth of
Vrija.CHAPTER II,
OF THE

SECOND CLASS OF POETRY,

MEASURED BY

THE TIME OCCUPIED IN THE PRONUNCIATION.

Of this class there are two Orders: the
first is regulated by the number of instants
and the sorts of feet used in their measure-
ment; the second is regulated by the number
of instants, without any particular reference
to the kinds of feet by which they are mea-

sured,

 

 

SECTION I.

OF THE FIRST ORDER,

OR
Of Verses regulated by feet and quantity.
This Order includes one genus and nine
species.
The Genus * has thirty instants for the first
line, and twenty-seven for the second.

* It is generically, though not specifically, of the same
nature as elegiac verse in Greek and Latin.388 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART IV.

Each line contains seven and a _ half feet, and
each foot (the 6th of the 2nd line excepted)
contains four instants; consequently only such
feet can be used as contain this number of
instants, and of this kind are the spondee, the
amphibrach, the anapest, the dactyl, and the
proceleusmatic.

The half foot must be a long syllable.

The sixth foot of the first line must be an
amphibrach or proceleusmatic; the sixth foot
of the second line must bea short syllable ;
and the first, third, fifth, and seventh feet must
not be amphibrachs.

When the sixth foot of the first line is a pro-
celeusmatic, the pause must be after the first
syllable of it; and when the fifth foot of the
second line is a proceleusmatic, the pause must
be before the first syllable.

iii

GENUS.
| | :

-_—

aw: few: sath quanacifuctedt 4 Le |
| | Ly | \

wv vv Vw vw V - Vv wv ee - @ ear -_

auata qruarfata ae Treyt THATaT
Crishna this boy of mine, being called by the shep-

herdesses, will not remain at home a single moment :
thus said his venerable mother.CHAP. II. | PROSODY. 389

OR
| |

eaaa Gate ATR HAlateaTTas: |
acu te yu, ol sles ree Ne ae
Sraqaiata: aa ae wala a Wa: |
If Crishna reclining negligently against a celestial
tree in the Vrinda wood, and playing his flute with a
smiling face, remains in the mind, then what is
heaven ?

 

First Species.

The first species requires the pause to be at
the close of the 3rd foot, and differs from the
genus only in this particular.

TE ee si oy al og ccs eee

FATATAT ALIS RLIKSTA AAIMAT |

oe oh | i at By Ne uke

qu TAUfata fafa: Vat wALiAeArat i

O victorious Lord, enemy of Mura, destroyer of
Kiungsd, heautiful-haired, eternal Madhava! pity me?
this intreaty is the health of those who are sick of the
world.

Second Species.

This admits the pause before or after, but not
at the close of the 3rd foot.

Riya \ \

PPA: os WW = — 4 WO Pe _-_— =

Tat ALAR AUIS aa arene facet |
| | ) 1 i

= ww w= VV =

metres
ditbraan Lae Ba Digit TEUAAARAT UI390 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. | PART IV.

If the all-prevailing charm of Hiry’s name remains
in the mouth, there is no fear to those who have been
bitten by the serpent of the iron age.

 

Third Species.

In addition to the regular rules for the genus,
this species requires the second and fourth feet
of each line to be amphibrachs.

a | ial | hs

vv iota Bore. Spd CC: am 0 ke s

GUAT < . ae acifeg, Ui areal a |
<4 | ! | | \ {

ern eee ee ei f-
aul THRTAATHTRALT 2 HCG T MAS? * Il
When the nature of men’s faith in Crishna is not
wavering, they are possessed of virtue, wealth, the ful-
Jilment of their desires, and liberation : of this there is
no doubt.

Fourth Species
This requires only the second and fourth. feet

of the first line to be amphibrachs.
Cs |

qTCAAIgaAN TE faRaa TR aa
| i L Asta

qawata d cw aft somefa REaTAT
O son of Nunda, you are a deceiver, your love is
not fixed, go where your passion leads you: thus
said one of the fickle maids.

aly

 

* Some describe this as having also a spondee or an anapest
for the first foot, and a spondee or dactyl for the third.CHAP. II. | PROSODY. 391

Fifth Species.
This requires only the second and fourth feet
of the second line to be amphibrachs.

Seo eS ail nae
AM BHT CUS Se HEA BUS: Gafaary: |
a ve Y | _- = | Oras oe lo @ chee ~ ~

TAKA HAA AATSL AIAGT AAT |
Crishna amorous, full: of youthful spirit, and beautt-
ful, is the delight of the brisk Vrije maids.
Sixth Spectes.
In this species the second line is the same as
the first, each containing thirty instants.

weve ute Fo ty tae te
ACLIICAltla MAA AS CMBlicay Bata |
ao ~ ha tootsie tts

Strutareara fatacht feamararsen Nt

The song of Crishna’s flute prevails, being asto-
nishingly melodious, leading captive the deer-like minds
of the people, and subduing the pride of the shepherd-
esses.

Ser

Seventh Species.
In this the first line is the same as the second,

each containing twenty-seven instants.
keayel his

wv W=_ w= VU — = —_ = —- — u — =

qq UAeciat Carwats aut
| a aay

- FY vy wv —_— =o - UV =

ATTAS Matfer NACHE Kt sitet

eter rrr

en

Tg as ee ee amen
era Seren

=392 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART Iv.

The song of the young beautiful shepherdesses a-
midst the joy of the festival, made Murd’s enemy
think it was the songs of the celestial nymphs.

 

Eighth Species.

This is simply the genus inverted: the first
line being put last, and the last first.

ol a ee eee Ve Se se

ara aaaARlfa: PTAA

Please dU yee ce, ee,

Haaaaiy eaCHaITaME acta:

Praising Nerayind, constantly recollecting him by
faith, and adoring his image, are the boat for the

almost impassable sea of life.

 

Ninth Species.
This species has thirty-two instants, and eight
feet in each line; it is the same as the 6th
species, with the addition of a long syllable.

\ | \ | \

on Fee 2 eee ee eR ee YY - Gow = Cm Ym Ce =

sustain: Fa ietmeasa water:
Ane os \

pw Aad. Dice “ol Se
sauitinat ata swaetcresat i
The fair ones, having their eyes filled with tears
of joy, and their bodies encompassed with sensations
of pleasure as with a garment, sing by faith praises
relating to the husband of Shree.CHAP. II. | PROSODY. 393

SECTION II.
OF THE SECOND ORDER,

OR

Of Verses regulated principally by Quantity.

Under this order are enumerated four
genera; but the last one belongs rather to
Pracrit than to. Sunscrit Poetry.

eet fe
FIRS® GENUS,

This has fourteen instants in the first part
of each line, and sixteen in the second: Each
half line must close with an amphimacer and
lambus.

a ee Oe < Sie a eee ee as
qeaaq aeautad aq atareta ciigh aw |
os, UV a oe = oe v - Ye
Ee eee = 2 nn eee

Featdad so uitay agarata We TF |

O kadhi! thou being perfumed with saffron and
musk outviest the ripe Tala * fruit here, and promot-
est the joy of Miry.

Fourteen or sixteen instants may be used in both
parts of the line, sometimes also a dactyl and spondee
are used at the close of each part, and some enu-
merate different species according as the Ist and 2nd,
drd and 4th instants remain separate, or are com-
bined in a long syllable.

o

 

 

* Borassus flabelliformis.

rks394 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART IV.

SECOND GENUS.
This has sixteen instants in the first part of
each line, and eighteen in the second. Each

half ne must close with an amphimacer and
baechiec.

SY eeu oes ae naa eas
MAGA: ACUCAT AMAT RAR CA CaaS |
ee is ei. ale 8 eee eae

ae at fasara eat we a anat fata cart tt

I salute that god, who “made the heart-cheering
necklaces of the female demons tremble, who destroyed
Kiingsa, and who supports the world.

This genus is the same as the preceding, with the
addition of one long syllable to each halfline; but

is a more favourite metre with the Poets.

Re

THIRD GENUS.

The third genus has sixteen instants in each
part of the line. The ninth and last instants in
each part must be included ina long syllable.
The ninth instant is often a short syllable.

acaIda AVA alSarares aa: |

a = 2 = =

niiaanaivigaae<: afaaikefa aay Fa

Mukunda, with his ear-rings reaching to his shoulders,
the bells round his waist tinkling by his brisk motion, and

a waving peacock’s tail in his hair, danced on the head
of the black serpent.CHAP. II. | PROSODY. 399

OR

afadieunasaaqacd aed SaaaferaaTe |

quath asaqdntitar wafa watagqacae Fra |

Life is exceedingly unstable, like water rolling on the
leaf of a lotus ; hut union with the good is the boat for

crossing the sea of Tife. *.

Different species have been enumerated from the
circumstance of the 5th, 8th, or 12th instant form-
ing a syllable of itself, or being united with ano-
ther instant to form a syllable; but from what has
been said, it is evident, that all the instants depend
entirely on the pleasure of the Poet, except the last
two, which must form a long syllable.

=

FOURTH GENUS.

This genus has thirteen instants for the first
part of each line, and eleven for the second.
Each part must close with a short syllable.

qe Atgtsuea aia efaa aradrara |

faqqmaUAyryT GAT RAG CATS Al

The playful shepherd Crishna has wandered inio
the most retired part of the Vrindt wood: hearing
this in this metre, his mother laughed.

This genus has many species; but as it does not
properly belong to Sunscrit Poetry, we forbear to

enlarge.396 SUNSCRIT. GRAMMAR. [ PART IV.

1 As an exercise in scanning, let the Class,
| Order, Genus, and Species of the following
verses be defined. The metres in which
they are composed, are some of those most
frequently employed by Indian Poets.
aice eva fafa Had MIT AFa |

ate er ca ~ oe sc as. “~~ Se.
Ot Mia ldq Ge SUGH Bae \
Muhabharité.

 

sufa a TaAquatated: wu qafatatsdtaas |
Brad waceciiaauaa faguiataasieagants |
Righuvingsa.

FS.

oe re ees SS x
cqatiaet aoa: fiefecaea wacrarat |
at: Siete weRewaty a ASUTK TATA: UI

Mohamudgura,

1,

i
i

 

aq ue aiaiainy feared aa a Saratat |
qa Miaiat afar aaa aratat i
Niloday a.

eo.

(ALM AHAUATTATH TAY AMaACSqAM |
Ga: WLI fara Lia: Loe al Ha Kaas: i
Ramayana.

TaTATAI THVT Ga faaat acaratateat |

TTT AMY FRY Waa | Gegtat Tear afseate it
Ramayana.CHAP. II. | PROSODY. 397

aaeata acai fasaaia faaaia cnaha fercaie
Tat ofa aay sag acini fara aaagar a wares |
Bhirtryhiry.
at stata: ufcfaanut stifad BR fedte —
~ ~ =A

aztae ata weet aqaaifaaat |

Titre nae fasay ne sai —

atat AY frfacafeat cist gayest 1

Maighaduta.
saad fafyugart fafaad arin treat —
faqia: afcacafa suaat yaa aatfaat: |
AaeyTAUe A Raat atar wara farr: —

TTR: MTITISaTY FT AA TM SYA Ay At i
Bhurtryhiry.

 

SS aS e ae ; Ss
Ba: aaRraate afauaizqaartaatt F aaa
TU: BETA waaaatsfeuat Fragae:
aracuare actu a afat afgatfa: sati—

Famagaa vra aaaarantyarS acta
Bhurtryhiry.CHAPTER If.
OF

THE DIFFERENT KINDS

OF

PROSE COMPOSITION.

 

In consequence of the union of one word
with another by the rules of Orthography,
and of a number of words together by the
rules for the formation of Compound words,
even Prose in Sunscrit is considered by the
learned as a species of Poetry, and is di-
vided into three sorts; which, in regard to
Native taste, may be denominated, the
Common, the Elegant, and. the Refined.

By a person who regards the rules laid down for
English composition. as correct, the first would be
denominated Elegant, the second Verbose, and the
third Bombastic. So great is the difference between
the taste of Europeans and Asiatics on the subject of
Composition,CHAP. IT. | PROSODY. 399

Ist.—THE COMMON STYLE.

Of this there are two species :

Ist. That in which no compound nouns or ad-
jectives are admitted; as,

a aa aie fraua dtd fawast ani aur za-
wa HERS: cod dare aerate |

Lhe wise one addressed the unhappy king who was
talking thus, bewailing his calamities, breathing like
a serpent, and frequently fainting.

2nd. That containing a mixture of simple
words with short compounds.

afte zaMag arat Wa: gcaTEE: Gearade
SHAMIALA ARC _inafaaswaw. TAM TTT
wT AtCarnctad CHAMASUUICAT FEIT sFa-
ae aE saga ar sufPat ar welaarai wat
HaicamMEcyicagaaata |

He is indeed the refuge of the three worlds, supreme
and most excellent, who seeing the earth oppressed by the
proud giants, and being of a compassionate heart, to
save it from its oppression, become incarnate in the fa-
mily of Yudu, taking the forms of Rama and Crishna:
and who, being recollected with respect or worshipped, sees
them safe over the sea of life who pronounce his name,

Of this Ist kind there are no entire works: it
is often used in explaining passages and in familiar
dialogues, and is generally supposed once to have
been the colloquial medium of the language.400 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [ PART IV.

2nd.—THE ELEGANT STYLE.

This is a medium between the first and
the last, being neither so simple as_ the
former, nor so abstruse as the latter :—it is
a sort of poetical prose.

qs Tafataarwsmniaawcacany
qaaaat cautsdtfaatccmea aracanqeuntc

 

ulcaHaaaIaTrt TeAA aaa ics a leHAsAqTRaATy
mlaittaees fatraauitgecantectraqacga
satfa: een faunas faeu gen faqen garaary
ATAY AwHAAaaaIs VI AG CA CA |

O victorious Vishni, whose foot is the eapanded
lotus in the pond of virtuous minds; thou lotus-eyed
one! who playest about Likshmee like a gander ahout
the lotuses ;. whose glorious fume fills the expanse of
the three worlds; whose lotus-feet are adored by
Seva, Bruhma, and ali the gods; who art the pure
light shining in the temple of that heart which has
ats passions subdued by abstraction, who art of incom-
parable form, having no form, having an excellent form,
having all forms; the friend of the friendless, and the
lord of the world: save, save me continually distracted
with the misery of life! jaCHAP. II. | PROSODY. AQ]

ord.—THE REFINED STYLE.

This is a very lofty style, and abounds
with compounds, remarkably long, and
sometimes exceedingly abstruse.

WT MOTAHAMY IAL GALLS LUPE TAS-
fadtenitetates went TAHT ci WCNAUTCGy
RA SAU gy eaat fewce sagen wreshi -
oe oa icMacacaisainaeaty -

~

*
a rafaeutananey & ALATUAACUCHiNcaa

\

o~, ae oN! fee rape peel
aaa MAIS AAAI ET |

A:

O Narayuina! whose moon-like toe nails are made
resplendent hy the intense brightness of the pearls placed
on the top of the il turbans of all the chief

® &. - . = ti I. a oink dee q f sy neta oann 2 ay J f
divinities making new supplant prostrateons, and who

art the purifier op the three worlds by the stream of
Gunga which is bright as the rays of the autumnal

7 7.

moon proceeding through the hole of that concave

vessel which was broken hy the top of the nail on the
great toe of thy energetic left foot, do thou pity me,
who am tossed about amidst the various whirlpools of

the tremendous and shoreless ocean of human life.AN APPENDIX,

CONTAINING

A LIST OF THE TECHNICAL TERMS

USED BY
SUNSCRIT GRAMMARIANS.,
——
grata Grammar,
=
ORTHOGRAPHICAL TERMS.

From a conviction that no one representation of the
vowel sounds in Roman letters, can fitly express their
nature, and at the same time be applicable to all those
languages in which that character is used, they have
been accommodated in this work only to the English.
When the Sunscrit becomes more extensively studied,
it is not improbable that men of other nations will a-
dopt the same method, as there is not yet, and perhaps
never will be, one system fixed upon to which all will
bow with submission.

As this is a subject however which admits of contro-
versy, the othersystems that have been previously used,
are here subjoined, that the student may exercise his

own judgment, and make his own choice.

   

te eae ear
ER arr yg

Br eoemee serecrte
S Denes leet404 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

Sir-W—dones's System.
a pak = « is =, ies 2
Sta, 81a; FLfi; Su,HRut; Riri, FET; a lri,
@ Ir: o oe. ee aK aN ie rie ot a al
“mi; ee, Y al; S10, Ht aw; 3] am, Sy; ah.
Dr. Carey's System.
— e = e
Siu, Sia; Hi, Fee; S 0o, BD 0O; Wrre, A rree;
dr lIree: Sek No ou aciipia : ; al
srlm, g rlree; Ue, Ti; Slo, ylou; 3 ung, a: wh.
Each of these schemes has its respective adherents.
Some Western writers have adopted the Greek as-
; ‘ ¢€
pirate to represent the aspirated consonants; as, @ ka

instead of kha.

satya letter. ara similar.

wt a vowel, awata dissimilar.
Ew short. si7qit the letter *
ea long. faaa the letter :

af grave,

 

Vowels as well as consonants are divided by the Na-
tives into different sorts;-as, Guttural 3, 31,7; Palatines
zz, u,v; Linguals x, #2; Dentals &, g3 Labials 3,
&, Sn, 3.

When the vowels are simply enumerated, 4 or #1
is used with the letter before it; as, s77 or s7ait the
vowel 37, &c. :

@s4, a consonant. Sway unaspirated.

@ Waa guttural. ARIDIW aspirated,

aAreiq] palatine. az} classified.

2g lingual. sjaiiaq miscellaneous.
=u dental. a-ai the % class: so ¥-
sire labial. an, e-an, &c,

 

aiaaifea nasal. sy the letters q, 4, q, B.APPENDIX. 405

aed Len ae! Sar peered oe

fatia the mark ‘

dara the union of two or more letters.
aq Sa{ a compound consonant.
SaTW pronunciation. i.
Trgrysita pronounced from the root of the tongue. q
Saqiata pronounced from the palate.
arent the artificial arrangement of the alphabet. E

The alphabet is thus arranged by the Natives.

: SRS A ae tT 8
SI = ca \ & X a \ t
wee a ue Fl Ul ah. Se aa i
ee a os SS, . le ‘
aa. Se ce, {WS AO eg i
ety
ej permutation by the union of two letters. i
{
sa df permutation of the vowels. a
: ,

@u* uf permutation of the consonants.
‘\
faaf-y permutation of ° and:
may the particular change of the vowels za.

die the particular change of the vowels sq.
aN

za The Rejection of Letters.+
‘\

= is rejected, to shew that the word must end in a
consonant ; as, At + fa = aye or at.

= is rejected, to shew that the vowel must be long,
Wa inserted, and the feminine formed by €9; as fae + ae
—~ NX N
—= Nom. faara; Obj. faaie; fem. faze.

* Some say Paya.

t+ These properly belong to Etymology, but may serve |
very well as an introduction to it. ‘406 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR. [PART Iv.

® is rejected, to shew that Ua must be inserted, and
the fem. formed by EU; asty + Ht = Nom. Waa fem.
WS at.

% is rejected, to shew that the vowel does not ad-
mit goon ; as, A+ aR wa.

w@ is rejected, to shew that a nasal is inserted; as,
me a tie t.

W is rejected, to shew that @ 3 become % W; as
Gq + UA Als

= is rejected, to shew that the vowel of a root does
not admit goon: when another letter precedes the =,
it supplies the place of the last letter in the word
to which it is affixed; as, ya + 5, fe, 3a = Aya.
Wet es = GR.

‘q is rejected, to shew that the word is indeclinable;
as, a+ At = afar.

* is rejected, to shew that the vowel requires vrid-
dhy: as, qa + GA = Wr.

€ or Wis rejected, to shew that the fem. gender is
formed by ET; as, YA + SAt= YaUls fq + a= aaqat.

S is rejected, to shew that the last vowel of the word,
and whatever follows it, is dropped, and that the letters
affixed to the = occupy its place; as, Siqq + St =
SWAY,

W is rejected, to shew that the vowel of the root re-
quires yriddhy, and that the affix united with it must
occupy the place of the last vowel of the word; as in

\ =
the perf. a + WY = aaIey WaT + Ua, At = waar,APPENDIX. 407

a is rejected, to shew that the affix with which it is
joined must follow the last letter of the word; as, Ia
+ faa = aifaa.

a is rejected from the affixes of verbs, to shew that
the vowel of the root requires goon. In participles it
shews, that # must be inserted when the root ends with
a short vowel; in nouns it points out the fem. gender.
ASk + faq = Uf; H + = ay; WT t+ ey = a.

# is rejected, to show that the increment united with
it must be prefixed to the syllable or word; as, Sua +
UA = as an t+ &, fey sa = TAT,

W is rejected, to distinguish the present tense of
verbs and their formatives, and the Obj. case plural of
nouns ; as, ¥ + WY, fay — Waa.

aa concealment, is used to point out deviations from
a general rule ; as, atf¢; Obj. aif¢ and not arfz; a, Ul,
az_and not ae.

%
<q obliteration shows, that when a letter is dropped

no change afterwards takes place; as, ¥: +Ba = UTeE:,
aT an expunging points out, that although an affix
has been rejected, the word must be changed as

though it had not been rejected ; as, faft + fae == far.

ETYMOLOGICAL TERMS.
We a word.
faam a double word, as etw.
fauia, Far an inflection.
et-q the final of an inflected word.
fa the first consonant of an inflection or .

eget a 2

      

brapsmiutces

Sa *

noe408 ~ SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

fe the final vowel, or final consonant with the vowel.
TH a COnsonant or a
3S or Sureq the penultimate.
yma an aflix*,
wa the insertion of @.
—eN
visI a name, a noun.
fae a noun in its uninflected state.
uz a noun in its inflected state.
dies + the masculine gender.
elisig the feminine gender.
gla or audafas the neuter gender.
waaga the singular number.
faaaa the dual.
qe aqq the plural.

y
The cases when simply enumerated are called:

yaa the first. aaa the fifth,

faita the second. ae the sixth.

ania the third. aaa the seventh.
¢ . ‘

aq the fourth.

When considered in relation to verbs they are called:

c ° ° e
a wt the nominative. seta the ablative.
C e e e
aq the objective. | ‘Bry the possessive.

# {aq the instrumental. sifaata the locative.
wyeqia the dative. | lua the vocative.

* ‘There are three kinds of affixes, AAAS affixes for words
formed from verbs; AEIyAa affixes for other derivatives ;
Walaa affixes for compound words.

+ From yaa and fay; qaT becomes q in composition,
but retains the aif wqw@—y followed by s3—W succeeds; as
GMa a, a male cuckoo.APPENDIX. 409

The Natives do not account the vocative a distinct

case, but only a certain modification of the nominative.

 

A Scheme of Terminations for Nouns, Adjec-

tives, and Pronouns.

Sing. Dual. Plural.

Nom. fa Sr ae
Ob}. tae SH we
Inst. ST Fy fre
Dat. = aye We
Abl = fa wa Tye
Poss. Fa STE ST
Loc. fs Se ey

\

The = of fa and sfa, also the 3, w, ¢, =, and gy of
the above terminations, are rejected: the #, W, &, and
y are rejected, merely to distinguish the particular cases
from which they are rejected.

The final 4 becomes *, and the final q becomes ¢.

The terminations fa, St, Te, HA, Si, and the fst sub-
stituted for wa in neuter nouns, are called fa; by some
Wz. :
oe ~ ~

The terminations NW, a, s, sya, +e, fs, Se, and
sH, and the feminine affix Eq, are called fa,

i the above scheme several alterations are adopted
to make it applicable to the different declensions, and
to account for some irregularities. As for tBOce,
in the first Declension, for et, Za is substituted ; for S,
314; for fz, SNA 5 for Fe, eq ; for ST, aes for fae,

~
wa.
% 2 C

= me - ;

irene maeia opera eater ae

ete ne
sare nae410 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

ag} or @} feminines ending with & and w; also
feminines in € and & in the last four cases singular.

Twarda an adjective.

S

@_gala a pronoun,

waite or fa words inflected like Waa.

UIT a root.

yafa a root in its primitive state.

fmat a verb, whether common, active, or deponent.

ATW a causal verb.

Waa an optative verb.

as a frequentative deponent verb.

qsaiay a frequentative active verb.

fag a nominal verb.

sma the insertion or prefixing of a letter.

seq the substitution of one letter for another.

fq reduplication.

fa or ayaa the changing of 7qatT VHtoL VRE.

The names of the Conjugations are taken from the
first example under each, as wife, from y—he, (the
example of the first conjugation,) and afg.

sieife, the second conjugation.

@ife or aerate the third conjugation.

feaife the fourth conjugation.

varie the fifth.

Wife the sixth,

Rulfe the seventh.

waif the eighth.

ggife the ninth,

avife the tenth,APPENDIX. All

According to the plan of this work the first four
Conjugations should be called, araife, feuife, ate,
and ws

TTR, v7, or y the active voice,

STINE, aa, or 4 the middle voice.

aie, are, a © ra the passive voice : 3 in opposition
to which the active is sometimes called aa ary. When
the passive is used in a reflective sense it is called aH fT,

nF aS, or @G@aaiy; when it is used impersonally,
called yraarey,

it is

The Tenses, &c. when simply enumerated are called,

al or Sz the present. at or fae the perfect.

wy or se the potential. | St or az the Ist future.

af} or ae the imperative, | @t or wz the precative,

Wi or fafefae the imperf. | Wor = the 2d future,

et or sufwists the indef. | yt or “as the subjunctive,

The Tenses, when denominated a ie time they ex-
press, are called :—

 

anna the present. Qaaray the indefinite.

Sadaaya the imperfect. | wfaaa the future,

Ue yA the perfect. ‘

There are no terms by which moods are distinguish-
ed from tenses.

The numbers are the same as in Nouns,

B@qary the first person.

44 ary the second person.

aaary the third person.

DfEE RS A iT SS ete ri

ce eee ET

SSeS seA\? SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

The followmg is a scheme of the terminations

Singular.

*

faq
~
. Fea
. fay,

Go

OD

tema!

Singular.

- aa
x

. Wa
\

mm b' W

~ AH
~

Sin oular.

OS
a
gq

iS)
ee
Si

Singular.

3. ea
2. faq
‘\
1. sau
\

for Verbs.

ACTIVE VOICE.

PRESENT.
Dual.

POTENTIAL.
Dual.
aa
STU

ara

IMPERATIVE.
Dual.
Ala
X
aA
SHTaq
XN
IMPERFECT.
Dual.
ala
\
qa

aq

Plural.
sift.
q.

Au.
\

Plural.
ad.
aid.
ala.

Plural.
Sa
Tle

STAT.
\

Plural.
Se.
XN
qd.
a

These are the present and its formatives ; they are
placed together by the Natives, because the latter three
are derived from the first.Singular.
3. fe
2. fe
1. a4
\

Singular.
3. WI
2. Qu
\
1. wa
“

Singular.

a. ON
9. arfe
arte

(anes
e

Singular.
ara
\

° ale
a
. ata :

m ro 09

Singular.

wir
. aia
. eifa

me bw

Singular.
Oe aa
2. eq
1. Qa
The above

tenses are arranged b

APPENDIX.

INDEFINITE.
Dual.

qa
‘“
Wa
X
a

PERFECT.
Dual.

and
>A
QaAaa
<a ~
a

FIRST FUTURE.
Dual.

att
ATS
Wey

PRECATIVE.
Dual.

area
aaa
are

SECOND FUTURE.

Dual.
aig
ay

wae

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Dual.

aaa
gaa

\

wa

Plural.
So,
\
qq.
a

Plural.
Se.
\
Si.
q.

Plural.
WIT.
X
ie e
ATeiy.
Plural.
alae.
>A
ale.
ate.

Plural.
wayra.

Qe.
lad.

Plural.
i:
lt.
la.

‘s the order in which the moods and

y Native Grammarians.4]4 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

MIDDLE and PASST VE VOICE,

PRESENT.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
a a sia si.
2. % STB] a,
Log az qe

POTENTIAL.

Singular, Dual. Plural.
3. €a EaAA eta.

e ‘< \ c N
2. Eq EAT IA aH,
l. eq Eafe Enfe.

IMPERATIVE.

Singular, Dual. Plural.
3. ne SUA AAT.
2. @ Sa aa.

EN 3
l. &q BART SURRY,
IMPERFECT.

Singular, Dual. Plural.
3. A STATA ST Ai,
2, ae SBT way.
1 ate afq.

INDEFINITE.

Singular. Dual. Plural
oD Wa ST Sq.
2. Be STAT way.

1. = ate ate.
PERFECT.

Singular. Dual. Plural,
3. SA rT.
oS ary a.

l. ae ae.APPENDIX.

FIRST FUTURE.

415

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. m1 aie WITH.
2. mie arate ao
l. are AES AS.

PRECATIVE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. We ware wits.
2 were wars wear.
l. a wate laf.

SECOND FUTURE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
3. wa aaa Qa.
2. qe au qe.
la was wae.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
Oo. Qa aaa Qa.
2. Gare aaa Geax.
eres: aqrafe arate.

In the preceding scheme, the xs of fey, fey, fe,
fa, and all the qs, are rejected.

As in the nouns, q and q become’ and:

A little alteration must Ge made in the scheme, to
render it applicable to all the Conjugations.

The terminations of the first five tenses, and every
affix which rejects w, are called {in the Mugdhaboadh.
Those of the first four tenses are called Req araa by

Paneény.416 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

The terminations of the first five tenses which do
not reject y, and such affixes as reject =, are called
fea; but those of the sixth tense which do not reject
y, the precative tense of the active voice, and such
affixes as reject a, are called faa.

The infinitive mood and participles have no distinct
names, but are denominated from the affixes by which
they are formed. They are not considered by the Na-
tives as belonging to the conjugation of a verb.

“44H infinitive mood.

wa the present active participle. wra the present,
middle, and passive.

aa the perfect active. ara the perfect middle.

we the 2nd future active. qata the 2nd fut. mid.

~a or Hy the Ist future passive and those formed by
afar.

aq and @Iz the indefinite, active or middle.

# the indefinite passive.

The 4 of a7, the wand & of wa, the q of Wa,
the * and S of WH, the x of aa, the m of ea, the
w# of afan, the « and = of WIA, the «# and = of ENE

and the a of #, are rejected.

sjaa7y, CHARACTERISTIC LETTERS.
sit shews, that the declinable indefinite participles
have two forms; as, fae —sn, a, EX, love ; afer faa,
“<e
Aer 4aaq \AAa.
Tyra faran,
= denotes, that @ must be inserted in the root; as,

\
ige—e, u, wyure; feafe, faa: Teafa.APPENDIX. 417

¢ shews, that in the declinable indefinite participles
must not be inserted; as, fea—e, know ; faa, fawan,

= shews, that in the indeclinable indefinite partici-
pie there are two forms 3 as, FH—sT, wander; Wfaray
Siray,

= denotes, that there are two forms in the futures ;
as, faa
%% denotes, that the penultimate of the indefinite

 

- ~ ~
sm, accomplish ; afari wel.

causal must be long; as, qAI—R, A, ask ; Saas.

7 denotes, that it has two forms; as, AI —aR, uw, Ss,
shine; Baygrea and HPA,

‘N

® indicates, that the indefinite has the penultimate
short, and ends with 3173 as, ya—a, B, SU, nourish,
srgaa and not saat, When @® is affixed to a
deponent verb, it has an active and deponental form ;
as, YA—S, ZW shine, saifig and Saini. From this
exam ple all such verbs are called qaife.

z{ indicates, that there are two forms in the indefi-
lee as, WH—4, EX covet, AYA and Svanita,

w intimates, that the penultimate of the indef. must
be short; as, 4]—¥, 7 beg, siaeim, and not sgl.

w@ shews, that =, 3, # must be used for 4, 4, T in
the reduplication; as, qa—®, Sy, A sacrifice, FAH.

3jr denotes, that # must be used for mW in the decli-
nable indefinite participles; as, fay—sit fear, faq,
faqan.

ST points out, that the future must be formed by Ar;
as, Wu-—4, SM curse, THI.

a is the characteristic of the 10th Conjugation.

sap in OS
Pema ies418 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

fa intimates, that the root may be of the 10th or Ist
Conjugation ; as, at—a steal, atafa or Stir.

e| signifies, that the word is reduplicated; as, =T¥t
—S, a, at, shine.

a is the characteristic of the 9th Conjugation,

fa denotes, that a long vowel must be made short in
the present tense of the 9th Conjugation; as, g—fr,
purify, Tair.

gq shews, that Zis inserted before a consonant in the
present and imperfect tenses, and imperative mood ; as,
RT—H, 4, FT, weep, tifeta, &c.

= is used to distinguish deponent verbs.

s denotes, that the penultimate of the derivative ad-
jective may be long; as, =e burn, sata or sae Durn-
ing: hence such verbs are called sqaite.

= is used to distinguish Common verbs.

f= indicates, that the passive indefinite participle
signifies present time ; as, wia—fa, wifan:, he is
meditated on.

< shews, that a noun signifying the simple act may
be formed from the root by 3¥; as, au, quake, quy, a
quaking.

s shews, that an adjective signifying the result of
the act may be formed from the root by [aA > as, Bi,
do, afaa, artificial.

w denotes, that there are two forms in the 2nd per-
son singular, and in the duals and plurals of the perfect
tense’; as, RS do, Uma, GRU: TRU: , GaAU? AU:
&e. hence called MUS.APPENDIX. 419

s intimates, that the root ends with a vowel; as,
RA—A, W speak.

= distinguishes verbs of the 8th. Conjugation.

¥ distinguishes verbs of the 7th Conjugation.

a@ distinguishes verbs of the 5th Conjugation.

y denotes, that a must be inserted in the root in the
present and its formatives; as, Aa ys YW, <<, SH,
liberate, nafa, &c. hence called Rafe.

w shews, that the penultimate of the root must be
long in the present; as, a, 4, S, RR, quiet,
wreypfa. Hence such verbs are called Waife.

# denotes, that the penultimate of the root is short
in the present causal; as ye—a, 4, = happen, qean.
Hence called yeife.

fa denotes, that there may be two forms ; as, ga—ta
sound, @aafa or Wiaafa.

a distinguishes verbs of the 4th Conjugation.

intimates, that the root is peculiar to the Vaidas.

a distinguishes verbs of the 2nd Conjugation, and
fa those of the 3rd.

@ points out some irregularity in verbs of the 2nd
Conjugation, or some peculiarity of sound which they
have in the Vaidas; as, q#y—4, 31, a, fr sleep, perf.
wag. Hence called 4uifz.
an denotes, that the verb has the active and deponen-
tal form in the 2nd future; as, @qa—s, ~, 4,S be,
afaein and aeifa. Hence called garfe.

w distinguishes verbs of the 6th Conjugation.

fx intimates, that the penultimate of the root is420 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

short in the future, &c.; as, ag w be crooked, afer
syela Hence called Reife...

uw denotes, that a verbal noun may be formed from
the root by SIT; as, qau—s, H, 40 pan; Mat,
pan. ,

31a or FY indeclinable words*.

SqET an inseparable preposition.

qa words derived from verbs.

af<a words derived from other words.

&Qaryax a common substantive,

alqaiaax a proper substantive.

HuIVIMas patronymics.

Sifqaa ax gentiles.

waar collectives,

vraaraax abstracts,

fRararax verbals.

HATA denominatives,

Several other kinds might be enumerated; as

=
sifwatqa names of animate beings ; SAW Waly sw names

e . e < e

of inanimate beings; aqqazwa passive nouns, as
S -

Rly a work; atwaraaR instrumental nouns, aS ay

the mouth; WAgtaaawN recipient nouns, as eTa @

servant; FUMTIAIMAR communicative nouns, as

sonar a teacher; sfaatwaraa possessive nouns,

wae a temple ;s WF aaa members of the body,
aU the ear.

as

S

eX

 

 

* Under this term are included Adverbs, Separable Prepo-
sitions, Conjunctions, and Interjections.APPENDIX. 49}

The adjectives formed from. verbs are denominated
a aK; as, BA doing. Of the others there are vari-
ous sorts ; as, THIy those relating to colour, as ata
blue ; sayfa a those relating to place or circum-
stance, as Wine near the sea; Rea those relating to
the seasons, as Rua or Saal belonging to the winter ;
and #asIq relating to what a thing is produced from,
as Ura produced from the sea.

Many derivative words that are formed in the same
manner, are arranged together by Native Grammarians,
and denominated from the first word in the list,

ware a compound word*.

FATA a compound noun of the Ist genus,

Wargiy a compound noun of the 2nd genus.

aq or 4 a general term including both the preced-
ing ones.

aWaITT or Fa compound noun of the 3rd genus,
The 2nd species of this genus is considered by the na-
tives as belonging to the class WUT.

aeatfe or ¥ a compound adjective of the Ist genus,

agEse or 4 a compound adjective of the 2nd genus.

faq or 7 a compound adjective formed by prefixing
a numeral,

BIE AAI or 4 a compound adverb,

 

ad

* The Natives reckon six classes of compound words;

Cc =
law. 2agqife. 3. anya. 4. waa. 5. fan. 6,
SAAT. The lst they subdivide into two sorts, EATAT and

: soi iS ; (
WATSIT; and the 5th into three, Whe arg, VATS, and SWC WE;
but make no farther distinction.

mena sae

papi yc
a422 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

For compound verbs, and for the different species

under the above genera, there are no terms.

J

 

SYNTACTICAL TERMS.
The terms of Syntax are very few.
fagay the words or clauses that agree
with others.
= q
fageq the words or clauses governed by
others.

Concord.

ata Government. When a verb governs two ob-

jective cases, the one is considered as inferior, and
; : “ . ; ~<

the other as principal; the inferior is styled Gry, and

the principal Fw@.

 

PROSODIAL TERMS.

qq Verse or Poetry.

gu verse measured by syllables.

sifa verse measured by time,

wa: metre.

wrax two lines of poetry, a verse.

wiz half a line of poetry, the 4th of a verse.
Iq an instant.

aa or Aw four instants.

afa the harmonic pause.

T& or 7 a long syllable -

«wor « a short syllable «

mm two long syllables, a spondee - -

na a long and short syllable, a trochee - »
aq a'short and long syllable, an iambus » -

a@ two short syllables, a pyrrhic » »APPENDIX. 423

WMT asrq an artificial word descriptive of the tri-
syllabic feet.

HH a molossus - - -

aa bacchic » - -

~ an amphimacer or cretic - » -

Wan anapest v v -

@ an antibacchic - - »

= an amphibrach v - »

4 a dactyl - vv

aa tribrach » v v

am the first class has three orders,

Ist. @a having every half line the-same:

2nd. stg@uA having every live the same,

3rd. faam having every line different.

The Ist Order is sub-divided into two sorts; off
including the first 26 genera, and ewan including the
27th and all the following.

sf the second class has two orders ; Ist, TWH =e >
measured by feet; 2nd, ame: measured by instants.

FIRST CLASS*.
First Order.

I. Sau. lil wa.
1. sit. | Ll. ait.
I, saea. 2. ai}.
1. ey.

 

 

 

* In the following list the genera are distinguished by Ro-
man capitals, and the species by Arabic numerals.

+ The name of each species will be found in the example
given of it.

hear asa yar a Te atA294 SUNSCRIT GRAMMAR.

VI. wrest.

2. WATIT a.
. wast.
VI. sfara*.

1. Rent.

OO

2. aAItTafaar.
3. ATU.

VII. sazut.

]. faauet.

2, AIMaa.

3. far ar.

4, warfaar.

5, WAraat or
AN Way.

IX. aya.
1. wsinfga.
2, afmay.

3. SAFI Tae.

* Nom. Sfara.
aN

 

X. Ufa
1. wayany or with
the pause 4 a-
RAST
2. AU or Bit
3. rafcanfa.
/~
4, HaITar.
XI. fauyt.
\
1. pyas7,
Sua asa.
Se,
array.
ar faafaat.
were
TUS.
QUINT.
os
= lam.
oN
HIe as.

Oo wp w bd

WDE SHON

~

wat.
XII, sa}.

], warari.
awaylaa,
Hare ATA.
HSH aia.

=
aie.

—

or OO bo

+ Nom. 314.

~

+ Nom. freq.APPENDIX. 425

 

6. @fsaat. 6. arat.
7. aagaat. 7. mtg.
8. a famrertr. XV. afa wag.
» Sifaafean. l. whewar.
10. Arer feat. 2.. nifaat.
ll. fafasr. 3. Hawa.
12. araza. 4. faiuafia a.
13. ara. 5. RUT.
14. afwarat. 6. waa.
15, sauTAret. 7. Vaat.
XIU. sifasraai. XVI. Heh.

1. yefuat. I. faz.
2. wFfatior yuraat. | 2. wHfaafer.
3. AMAA. 3. UfaAr.
4. awh. 4.fafax or awa-
5, waite at. STAT.
6. afrat. 5, avaafan.
7. RAT or faz- 6. arf.

are. 7. vatvafan.
8. yalfaar. 8. saul.
9, nis AR. 9. 1RSHA.

XIV. wait. XVII. 3st.

I. Qaaryy. 1. fafa.
2. aaafaaa. 2. yfequy.
3. ects, 3. @WyaupaTA,
4. Getwafaat. = A. Aez Iga.
5. aaa. : 5. #ftai.SUNSCRIT

6. Ages, or with
the pause aifa-
aa.

7- Bilqat.

8. HITTATA.

XV uff.
1. aafan aa.
2. aaa.
3. alta,
4, Faxai.
5. qigaefen.
XIX. afaafa.
1. Fafa.

2, Hat.
. wre afaanfs a.
RTE.
Re.
XX. wafa.

1. saya.

2. aifrat.

3. a7.

A, MTHT.

b

or B Oo

XXI. yafa.
]. qzvati.
2. BTR.
XXII. ara.

GRAMMAR.

1. aw.
2. Az
XXIII. faaia.

lL. sferar.
2. aTTARIS.

XXIV. wafer.

l. wal.

 

XXV. sfaafA.

1. AISIeI.
XXVE srafa.

i. ysig fase.
XXVIL ewe.

1. wT VATA.
Taq.

 

bo

| RRAG IS.

/ ATA AAT

on mh &

SUIT ARM.
. SAF RT.
at.

yaya.

. Ie.

: stam.

© MDT OH

fmm foe
— ©

. slat.
n~,

2. ATS.
. UE, &e.

a)
Co bbAPPENDIX. 427

Second Order.

I, sofas. V. Hutag.
Il. vat. VI. ufaqarer.
Ill. aaaqt. VII. aad.

IV. ef wa.
Third Order.

I, qaEH, | 1. susufa.
l. aq. Il. SRA.
2. UMqlag. | 1. Bee.
UW. suaifa. 2. afar.

 

SECOND CLASS.
First Order.

 

1. sar. 5, SVAaaqat.
Ll. Wegr. 6. aWifa.
2. favar*. 7. suattir.
3. Fail. 8. =aRifa.
4, AQETEIT. 9, sragiitfa.

Second Order.
I. aarsha. Il. usgyfear.
ll. Sapa. IV. ziefs.
aq PROSE,

I. awa. I]. q-anfa.
1. ame. il. smfa asta.
2. RAT |

 

 

 

——

* If the pause is before the 3rd foot it is called suifetaqet,
if after it s-gfayail, if in one part before and in another after

syajay a.
FINIS.Page.

306
317
318
352
303

6

dele

for

dele

for

dele

for

a

ERRATA.

—

aaaa

TUT,

Siz:

Sarat

Nafta

x noe

wfag

BUY

alutfe, fate

STH

w fora”

E, E,W

oe oreeet

————-

Ce

‘* Indefinite, in the —

*Future’’
<< © «
sata, saty
r~
ea iia
qe
faufar
“and jewels”
ATU
“arth”
“* bacchic”’

Wal

Seen,

Bay
SAT

‘\
Ata

‘ e
THe
war
ATI
waar

SRUY

=
a for @
z, 3,

‘** Future, in the
Indefinite”

WATT, Snay
= fatifa

7

ta faufan

wig

‘* antibacchic,”’

aT

%o% “The o *; and : being peculiarly liable to injury in printing,
partial or entire omissions of these letters will be observed ina

few instances by the attentive student.

As they occur only in a part

of the impression, they have not been included in the list of Errata.

SCR SCARY Cra are gre,i
p

a benti

vn